SERVICE MANUAL

CODE: 00ZSF1118/A1E

MODEL SF-1118

CONTENTS

[ 1 ] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 – 1

[ 2 ] PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 – 1

[ 3 ] PRODUCT VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 – 1

[ 4 ] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 – 1

[ 5 ] DESCRIPTION ON EACH SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 – 1

[ 6 ] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 – 1

[ 7 ] ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 – 1

[ 8 ] SIMULATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 – 1

[ 9 ] SELF DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 – 1

[10] MEMORY TROUBLES, FLOWCHART FOR REPLACEMENT OF

MAIN CONTROL PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 – 1

[11] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 – 1

[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 – 1

Parts marked with "!" is important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with specified
ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.

This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
 Contents
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1. Product features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
2. System configuration (options) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[2] PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2. Description of each section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
3. Supply parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
4. Optional specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
(1) Automatic document feeder (ADF) . . . . . . 2-3
(2) 10-bin sorter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
(3) 10-bin staple sorter (10-bin SS) . . . . . . . . 2-4
(4) Exclusive-use desk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
[3] PRODUCT VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1. External view and internal structure . . . . . . . . . 3-1
2. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3. Clutches, solenoids, and motors . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
4. PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
5. Sensors and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
6. Rollers, mirrors, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
[4] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION . . . . . 4-1
1. Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
2. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
(1) Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
(2) Space around the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
(3) Installation base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
(4) Power source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
(5) Grounding wire connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
3. Optical system lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
A. No. 2/3 mirror unit lock release . . . . . . . . . 4-3
B. Lens and No. 4/5 mirror unit lock release . 4-3
4. Charger cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
A. Main charger unit electrode cleaning . . . . 4-3
5. Developing unit setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
A. Developing unit setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
6. Toner density sensor level adjustment . . . . . . . 4-5
A. Developing unit level adjustment . . . . . . . 4-5
7. Accessory installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
A. Copier tray installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
8. Toner supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
9. Center shift adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
10. Label attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
A. Label attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
manuals4you.com
[5] DESCRIPTIONS OF EACH SECTION . . 5-1
1. Paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
1) General descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
2) Basic operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
2. Developing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
1) General descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
2) Basic composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
3) Basic operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
3. Optical section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
1) General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
2) Basic operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
4. Copy process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
1) Photoconductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
2) Process diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
3) Details of image forming process . . . . . . 5-10
4) Transition of photoconductor surface
potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5) Photoconductor drum sensitivity
correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
6) Process control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5. TRANSPORT/FUSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . 5-16
1) General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
2) Basic composition and functions . . . . . . 5-16
6. Fusing paper exit section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
7. High voltage section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
1) General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
2) Basic composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
[6] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . 6-1
1. Paper feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
1-1. Paper feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
1-2. Paper feed roller ass’y removal . . . . . . . . 6-1
1-3. PS front roller ass’y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
1-4. Separation roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
1-5. Paper feed roller, take-up roller . . . . . . . . 6-2
2. Transport unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
2-1. Resist roller, transfer roller . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
2-2. Transport belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
3. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
3-1. Fusing unit removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
3-2. Heater lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
3-3. Upper heat roller ass’y removal . . . . . . . . 6-5
3-4. Upper separation pawl replacement . . . . . 6-5
3-5. Lower heat roller replacement . . . . . . . . . 6-5
3-6. Lower separation pawl replacement . . . . . 6-6
3-7. Thermistor/thermostat removal . . . . . . . . . 6-6
4. Optical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
 1) Copy lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
2) Mirror base wire replacement and
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
[7] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
3) No. 2/3 mirror unit (mirror base B)
installation (Mirror base B positioning) . . . 6-9
4) Copy lamp unit installation
(Mirror base A positioning) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
5) No. 4/5 mirror unit (mirror base C)
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6) Lens wire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
7) Lens unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
5. High voltage section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
5-1. Main charger (MC) unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
5-2. Transfer/separation charger (TC/SC)
unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6. Process section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6-1. Process unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6-2. Waste toner bottle replacement
(required when waste toner full detection/
maintenance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6-3. Drum (Replace every 60K copies) . . . . . 6-18
6-4. Blank lamp unit
(Clean every 60K copies.) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6-5. Discharge lamp unit
(Clean every 60K copies.) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6-6. Cleaner blade
(Replace every 60K copies.) . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6-7. Drum separation pawl
(Replace every 60K copies.) . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6-8. Process control PWB (Clean the sensor
section every 60K copies.) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6-9. Drum mark sensor PWB (Clean the sensor
section every 60K copies.) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
[8] SIMULATION
6-10. Toner reception seal (Replace every 60K
copies.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
7. Developing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
A. DV side seals F/R replacement
(Replace every 120K copies.) . . . . . . . . . 6-20
B. DB blade replacement
(Replace every 120K copies.) . . . . . . . . . 6-20
C. V ring attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
D. Note for toner hopper drive gear (31T)
and stirring shaft attachment . . . . . . . . . 6-21
8. Operation panel/intermediate cabinet . . . . . . . 6-21
9. Frame major parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
9-1. Cooling fan motor replacement . . . . . . . . 6-21
9-2. Power unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
[9] SELF DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9-3. Tray size detecting PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
9-4. Main PWB unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
9-5. AC power PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
9-6. Ozone filter (Check every 60K copies,
and clean every 300K copies.) . . . . . . . . 6-23
10. Multi paper feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
10-1. Separation roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
10-2. Take-up roller/paper feed roller . . . . . . . 6-24
1. Developing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
1-1. Developing doctor clearance
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
1-2. Developing magnet roller main pole
position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
2. Optical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
2-1. Adjustment items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
2-2. Note for adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
2-3. Adjustment of each section . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
A. Lens reference position adjustment . . . . . 7-4
B. No.4/5 mirror reference position
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
C. Vertical copy magnification ratio
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
D. Resolution adjustment
(Focus adjustment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
E. Horizontal copy magnification ratio
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
F. Comparison table of lens values and
simulation input values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
G. Vertical skew adjsutment . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
H. Horizontal skew adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
I. Center shift adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
J. Exposure balance adjustment . . . . . . . . 7-12
K. Copy lead edge adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
2-4. Copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
2-5. Process section adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
1. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
2. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
3. Operating procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
4. List of simulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
5. Details of simulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
6. User simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
(1) Functions which can be set and
canceled by the user simulation . . . . . . . 8-16
(2) User simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
(3) User simulation code table . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
(4) Department counter setting content
(Set with user program P10 ∼ P15) . . . . 8-17
1. Summary/purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
2. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
3. Clearing the self diag display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[10] SERVICING AT MEMORY TROUBLE
AND MAIN CONTROL PWB
REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
2. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
3. Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
4. Set value recording sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
5. Memory simulation list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

[11] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

1. Maintenance cycle and maintenance items . . 11-1

[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

1. System block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

2. Main circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
(1) Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
(2) CPU (IC6) SC3041K12F . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
(3) Detector circuit of sensor signal . . . . . . . 12-8
(4) Start/stop control circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
(5) Heater lamp control circuit . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
(6) Driver circuit (Solenoid, electromagnetic
clutch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
(7) Stepping motor drive circuit . . . . . . . . . 12-10
(8) AE (Auto Exposure) sensor circuit . . . . 12-11
(9) Toner supply motor drive circuit . . . . . . 12-11
(10) Reset IC (IC13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
(11) Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
(12) EnergyStar circuit description . . . . . . . . 12-13

manuals4you.com
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE

1. Product features
(1) Compact body (2) Clean copy gentle to the environment
• Compact body size • Silent design,
The body width of 600mm is the smallest in the class.
• Low level of ozone, use of recyclable materials
• The employment of the front loading tray and the folding-type multi
manual paper feed cassette realizes the small occupying area.
• The energy-saving mode reduces the power consumption.
(Option) (3) High capacity of copying
• Warm-up time is less than 35 sec. The first copy of 5.3 sec.
(4) Fully expandable system. (Refer to "2. System configuration.")

2. System configuration (options)

Automatic document feeder SF-A18

Tray (reserve) SF-UB15

Exclusive-use desk
SF-DS17

10-bin sorter SF-S17 N 10-bin staple sorter SF-S54

Note: When installing the SF-S54, the exclusive-use desk (SF-DS17) is reguired.

1–1
 (12) Additional functions
[2] PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Function Remark
Auto Paper Selection ×
Auto Magnification ratio
1. Basic specifications ×
Selection
(1) Type: Table top Shift F
(2) Copy speed: 1-set 2-copy F Enlargement is impossible.
Edge erase F
Enlargement Reduction
Normal Built-in auditor
(Magnification) (Magnification) F 20 departments
password mode
A3 10 sheets/min 10 sheets/min 10 sheets/min
(200%) (50%) Interruption F
B4 12 sheets/min 12 sheets/min 12 sheets/min Monochrom ×
A4 (Portrait) 18 sheets/min 14 sheets/min 14 sheets/min AICS F
A4 (Landscape) 14 sheets/min 14 sheets/min 14 sheets/min Pre-heat mode F
81⁄2 × 13" 12 sheets/min 12 sheets/min 12 sheets/min Auto shut off F
Auto power save F
(Note) The copy speeds for enlargement and reduction are minimum
speed values. Auto tray switching ×
Cover insertion ×
(3) Warm up time: 35 sec or less
OHP insertion paper ×
(4) First copy time: 5.3 sec (Tray)
Overlay ×
(5) Jam recovery time: 8 sec (Conditions: After leaving the door
open for 60 sec, the standard conditions) (13) External dimensions

(6) Multi copy Max. 250 sheets WxDxH 600 × 595 × 365 mm
(7) Original Occupying area (W x D) 885 × 595 mm
Weight 41.0Kg
Max. original size A3
Reference original size Left side/Center (14) Power source
Original sensing No Voltage: 220 ∼ 230V 50/60Hz
240V 50Hz
(8) Copy magnification ratio
Frequency: 50/60Hz common
Fixed magnification: AB series: 200, 141, 122, 115, 100, 86, 81,
70, 50% (9 steps) (15) Power consumption

Zoom range: 50% ∼ 200% (151 steps by the increment of 1%) Max. power 1.5kw (Note) Max. when the
(9) Exposure consumption option is installed
Energy efficiency 64Wh/h or less
Exposure mode: Auto/Manual/Photo
Auto power shut 5W or less
No. of manual steps: 9 steps off (for EPA)
(10) Void width
Void area: Lead edge/rear edge: 3mm or less
Image loss Normal: 4mm or less
(11) Paper exit/finishing
Paper exit tray capacity: 250 sheets
Finishing: option 10-bin sorter, 10-bin staple sorter

2–1
manuals4you.com
2. Description of each section (2) Optical section

Light source Halogen lamp

(1) Paper feed section
Exposure system Slit exposure by moving the light source
Copying size A3 ∼ A6 Zooming system By changing the lens positions and the scan
Paper feed system 1 tray + multi manual feed speed.
Paper feed capacity 250 sheets × 1 Lens Fixed focus lens

Cassette Paper size Paper weight Paper kind (3) Process

AB series: A3 ∼ Charging system (–) DC saw teeth electrode system
Standard paper,
Tray A5 56 ∼ 80g/m2
recycled paper Transfer system (–) tungsten system
Ledger ∼ Invoice
Separation system (AC) separation tungsten system
AB series: A3 ∼ Standard paper,
Multi A6R 56 ∼ 80g/m2 specified paper, (4) Developing section
Multi
Ledger ∼ Invoice special paper,
manual
OHP film, Second Developing system Dry, two-component magnetic brush
paper
original paper, development (developer replacement)
feed AB series: A3 ∼ 52 ∼
Single postcards Developing bias voltage DC–200V ±5V
A6R 128g/m2
(without folding)
(5) Fusing section

Fusing system Heat roller system

Upper heat roller surface temperature 190 degrees C
Heater lamp Halogen lamp 1000W × 1

3. Supply parts
Name Content Life Product name
1 Photoconductor kit Photoconductor drum x1 60K SF-226DR
Cleaner blade x1
Drum separation pawl x2
2 Black developer Black developer (530g) x 10 60K x 10 SF-226CD
3 Black toner Black toner bottle (280g) x 10 6K x 10 SF-126CT
4 Upper heat roller kit Upper heat roller x1 120K SF-216HU
Upper separation pawl x4
Fusing bearing x1
5 Lower heat roller kit Lower heat roller x1 120K SF-220LH
Lower separation pawl x4
6 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge (For SF-S54) x3 5K staples x 3 SF-LS12
7 Upper heat roller Upper heat roller x1 120K SF-216HU
8 Upper separation pawl Upper separation pawl x 4 x 10 120K x 10 SF-216UP
9 Heat roller gear Heat roller gear x 10 120K x 10 SF-216HG
10 Lower heat roller Lower heat roller x1 120K SF-216HR
11 Lower separation pawl Lower separation pawl x 4 x 10 120K x 10 SF-216LP
12 Screen grid Screen grid x 10 120K x 10 SF-216SU
13 Cleaner blade Cleaner blade x 10 6K x 10 SF-216CB
14 Charging plate Charging plate x 10 120K x 10 SF-216PU
15 Ozone filter Ozone filter x 10 300K x 10 SF-216FL
16 Copy lamp Copy lamp x 10 — SF-216CL
17 MC case unit MC case unit x 10 — SF-216MC

2–2
4. Optional specifications (2) 10-bin sorter

(1) Automatic document feeder (ADF) <Model name: SF-S17 N>

Type Copier installation type/Hanging type
<Model name: SF-A18>
Distribution system Bin shift by lead screw
Original set direction Face up

Original set position Center reference No. of bins 10 bins (The top bin is used also for
non-sort.)
Original transport system Belt (half size) system
Capacity 30 sheets/bin A4, 100 sheets for the
Original feed sequence Bottom taking (Face up exit) top bin only.
Sorting 30 sheets (A4)
Original size A3 ∼ A5
15 sheets (B4)
Original change speed 16 sheets/min 15 sheets (A3)
(S → S)
Grouping 20 sheets (A4)
Original weight 50 ∼ 128g/m2 15 sheets (B4)
Original set quantity 50 sheets, 50 ~ 80 g/cm2, 15 sheets (A3)
80 ~ 128 g/m2 thickness max. 5 mm
Paper size (Non-sort) A3 ∼ A6 (Postcard)R
Original stop system Position control system (Sort/group) A3 ∼ A5
Dimensions 571 (W) x 521 (D) x 110 (H) (mm) Paper transport Center reference
(Height: excluding the tray)
Paper reception Face up
Weight About 11.5kg
Paper weight (Non-sort) 52 ∼ 128g/m2
Power source Supplied from the copier’s power section.
(Sort/group) 56 ∼ 80g/m2
Power consumption 65W
Dimensions 335 (W) x 493 (D) x 298 (H) (mm)
Functions (Width: Including the tray.)

Original sensing on YES (Scanning read for uncertain size Weight 8.6kg [9.8kg Including mounted fittings]
the tray originals.)
Power source Supplied from the copier. DC24V (1.2A)
Sensing size AB series: A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5
Power consumption Max. 30W
Original mixture Allowed (However, no linkage with the AMS)

Original reverse NO

2–3
manuals4you.com
(3) 10-bin staple sorter (10-bin SS) Staple section
Type Copier stapler
<Model name: SF-S54>
Type Copier installation type/hanging type Stapling time 1.8 sec

Distribution system Bin shift system by lead screw No. of stapled sheets 30 sheets (80g/m2)

No. of bins 10 bins (The top bin is commonly used Binding reference Front reference
for non-sort.
Staple supply Cartridge (5,000 pcs.)
Capacity 30 sheets for each bin
Staple SF-LS12
(A4, 80g/m2)
100 sheets for the top bin No staple/no cartridge/ Available
no stapler detection
Sort 30 sheets (A4)
15 sheets (B4) Staple jam detection Available
2
15 sheets (A3, 80g/m )
Manual staple mode Available (excluding manual stapling)
Grouping 20 sheets (A4) Note: When installing the SF-S54, the exclusive-use desk (SF-DS17)
15 sheets (B4) is required.
15 sheets (A3, 80g/m2)
Staple sort 30 sheets (A4) (4) Exclusive-use desk
15 SHEETS (B4) SF-DS17
15 sheets (A3, 80g/m2)
Dimensions 570(W) × 523(D) × 520(H)mm
Paper size Non-sort A3 ∼ A6R Weight About 19.5kg
Sort/group A3 ∼ A5 Functions Caster Provided
Staple sort A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5 Adjuster None
Door None
Alignment (Sorting) Max. shift 2mm (Alignment operation)

Paper transport Center reference

Paper loading Face up

Paper weight Non-sort 49 ∼ 128g/m2

Sort/group/staple sort 56 ∼ 80g/m2

Dimensions 390(W) × 542(D) × 400(H)mm

Weight About 11.5kg, 15kg [including the

installation kit]

Power source DC24V (1.5A) supplied from the copier.

Power consumption Max. 36W

2–4
[3] PRODUCT VIEWS

1. External view and internal structure

5 6

1
4
2
7

3 9
10

11 12

14 15

16
13

No. Name No. Name No. Name

1 Original cover
4 Grip
7 Operation panel
F Paper tray
I Fusing unit
L Drum
2 Original table 3 Paper exit tray
5 Manual feed original guide 6 Manual feed tray
8 Front cover 9 Power switch
G Developing unit grip H Toner hopper
J Developing unit lock lever K Release lever

3–1
manuals4you.com
2. Operation panel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

SORTER EXPOSURE PAPER SIZE 81/2 x 51/2 11x 17 200%

POWER SAVE AUDIT CLEAR
SORT
DUAL PAGE
COPY AUTO 11 x 17 81/2 x 11 11x 17
141% 1 2 3
81/2 x 51/2 81/2 x11 129%
MANUAL 8 1/ 2 x 14
81/ 2 x 14 11x17 121%
STAPLE
PHOTO 8 1/ 2 x 11 4 5 6
100%
SORT MARGIN 8 1/ 2 x 5 1/ 2 95%
SHIFT 11 x17 81/2 x14
8 1/ 2 x 11 R 81/2 x14 81/2 x11 77% ZOOM INTERRUPT
GROUP
1 2 3 4 5 EXTRA 11 x17 81/2 x11
81/2 x 51/2
64% 7 8 9 CA
81/2 x11
%
EDGE ERASE 11 x17 81/2 x 51/2 50%
LIGHT DARK
TRAY SELECT 0/ C

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

No. Name No. Name No. Name

1 SORTER key and indicators 2 DUAL PAGE COPY key and indicator 3 MARGIN SHIFT key and indicator
4 AUTO/MANUAL/PHOTO key and 5 PAPER SIZE indicators 6 Misfeed indicator
indicators
7 Paper feed location/misfeed location 8 Preset ratio indicators 9 Copy quantity display
indicators
F Maintenance required indicator G Developer replacement required H Toner required indicator
indicator
I 10-key pad J POWER SAVE indicator K AUDIT CLEAR key
L EDGE ERASE key and indicator M LIGHT and DARK keys and indicators N TRAY SELECT key
O Paper required indicator P Copy ratio selector keys Q ZOOM indicator
R Copy ratio display key S Zoom keys T INTERRUPT key and indicator
U Zero/readout key V Clear key W Print button and READY indicator
X Clear all key

.com
manuals4you

3–2
3. Clutches, solenoids, and motors

8
9

1
11
12

3 2

5
10
4

Clutches and solenoids

No. Signal name Name Functions, operations
1 PSPS Paper separation solenoid Paper separation solenoid drive
2 RRC Resist roller clutch For resist roller rotation
3 TRC Transport roller clutch For transport roller rotation
4 CPFC1 Tray paper feed clutch For paper feed roller rotation
5 MPFS Manual paper feed solenoid For pressing take-up roller

Motors
No. Signal name Name Functions, operations Type
6 VFM Ventilation fan motor Used to ventilate around the fusing section, cools DC brushless
down the machine, and remove ozone.
7 MM Main motor Used to drive the body. DC brush
8 CFM Optical system cooling fan Used to cool and ventilate the optical system. DC brushless
9 LM Lens motor Used to move the optical lens. DC stepping
F TM Toner motor Used to stir toner. DC synchronous
G MRM Mirror motor Used to move the mirror base. DC stepping
H SMF Suction fan motor Used to ventilate the suction section. DC brushless

3–3
manuals4you.com
4. PWB

15 1 2 3 4 5 14

16

6 7

11

8
13

12

10 9

No Name Description No Name Description

1 Operation PWB A Operation input, display control
3 Blank lamp PWB Used to control the blank lamp.
5 Optical PWB AE sensor and lens motor interface
7 Main PWB Used to control the body.
9 CSD PWB Used to sense the body cassette
size.
G PID PWB Manual paper entry detection
I High voltage PWB Process high voltage, developing
bias voltage supply
K Mark sensor PWB Drum marking point detection
2 Operation PWB B Operation input, display control
4 DL PWB Used to drive the discharge lamp.
6 Process control PWB Used to sense the toner density.
8 AC circuit PWB AC power input
F DC circuit PWB DC power input
H PPD PWB Body PR roller JAM detection
J POD PWB Body paper exit section JAM
detection, ventilation fan motor
interface
L Sub DC power PWB Supplies power in the energy
saving mode. (Supplies 5V to the
main PWB and the operation
PWB.)

3–4
5. Sensors and switches

2 3 5 4 6

1
10
14
8

9
11

13
12

No. Signal name Name Type Operation, function

1 TCS Toner density control sensor Transmission sensor HIGH when toner density falls.
2 ILSW Front cabinet open/close switch Interlock switch ON when closed.
3 MSW Power switch Seesaw switch
4 TH Fusing heater thermistor Thermistor Greater resistance at low
temperature
5 TS Fusing heater thermostat Thermostat Contact open at abnormally high
temperature
6 POD Paper exit paper sensor Transmission photo sensor LOW when paper is present.
7 MHPS Mirror home position sensor Transmission photo sensor HIGH when paper is sensed.
8 MMRE Main motor encoder Transmission photo sensor Rotation pulse output
9 TFD Waste toner full switch Lead switch HIGH when sensed.
F LHPS Lens home position sensor Transmission photo sensor LOW when reduction.
G PPD Paper transport sensor Transmission photo sensor LOW when paper is present.
H PED1 Body upper tray paper presence detection Transmission photo sensor HIGH when paper is present.
I DPPD1 Body upper tray paper transport sensor Transmission photo sensor LOW when paper is present.
J PID Single manual feed paper entry sensor Transmission photo sensor HIGH when paper is present.

3–5
manuals4you.com
6. Rollers, mirrors, etc.

30 29 28 20 19 18 3 4 17 7 34 16 6 5 8 14

15

2 12

13
1
11

32

33
38
35
31 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 37 36

No. Name No. Name No. Name

1 No. 3 mirror 2 No. 2 mirror 3 No. 1 mirror
4 Copy lamp 5 No. 4 mirror 6 No. 5 mirror
7 No. 6 mirror 8 Developing unit toner box 9 Manual tray
F — G Take-up roller H Paper feed roller
I Reverse roller J PS front roller follower roll K PS front roller
L Developing unit M Blank lamp N Main charger unit
O Photoconductor drum P Cleaner unit Q Resist roller follower roll
R Resist roller S Transfer charger T Separation charger
U Drum separation pawl V Suction unit W Suction belt
X Fusing thermistor Y Heater lamp Z Upper heat roller
[ Lower heat roller \ Transport roller (upper) follower roller ] Transport roller (upper)
^ Developing magnet roller _ Tray paper feed roller ‘ Tray paper feed reverse roller
a Tray paper feed take-up roller b PE actuator

3–6
 2 Avoid high temperature and high humidity, and avoid sudden
[4] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION temperature change. (Avoid installation near a cooler or a heater.)
If not, paper absorbs moisture and dew forms in the machine,
causing paper jam or degraded image quality.
1. Unpacking

(Standard condition): The best condition to use the machine.

20 ∼ 25°C: 65±5%RH
(Temperature and humidity): 15 ∼ 30°C
20% ∼ 85% RH
35°C for 65%

% HR
85

65

Humidity
20

15 30 35 ˚C
Packing material/accessory list

Name Q’ty 3 Avoid dust and vibrations.

1 Paper exit tray 1 If dust enters the machine, malfunctions may occur.
2 Instruction manual 1
3 Maintenance card 1
4 Dust cover 1
5 Service contract 1
6 Installation manual 1
7 Magnification ratio select label 1

2. Installation

Installing conditions
The surrounding conditions of the machine affect the machine perfor- 4 Avoid installation on an unstable surface.
mance greatly. Use great care for the following items. Keep the machine in level state to maintain the performance.
(1) Environment
1 Avoid direct sunlight, and avoid installation near the window. (Cur-
tains or blinds must be shut completely.)
If not, the plastic parts and the original cover may be deformed.
Even if the window is of frosted glass, there is no difference.

4–1
manuals4you.com
5 Avoid installation to a poorly ventilated place. (5) Grounding wire connection
1 Connect the grounding wire to prevent against a danger.
2 When connecting the grounding wire, connect only to the ground-
ing object (the grounding terminal of the power outlet, etc.) and
never connect to a gas pipe.

6 Avoid installation to a place where there are flammable materials

or ammonia gas, etc. If the machine is installed near a diazo
copier, the picture quality may be degraded and malfunctions may
occur.

7 Install near a power outlet.

(2) Space around the machine
Install the machine with its rear side about 10cm (6 inches) apart from
the wall in order to allow space to ventilation by the cooling fan.
Also allow enough space around the machine for proper operation.
(3) Installation base
Set the machine in horizontal position in the following procedure.
Be sure to use a leveling instrument (UKOGM0054CSZZ) to install
the machine on a flat, horizontal place.
(Note) If the machine is not in horizontal position, the toner density
control function may not work normally, resulting in degraded
picture quality.
(4) Power source
1 Use the power source of the rated capacity.
2 Avoid complicated wiring. If not, the breaker or the fuse may be
overloaded.

4–2
3. Optical system lock release 4. Charger cleaning

A. No. 2/3 mirror unit lock release A. Main charger unit electrode cleaning
Remove the one fixing screw of the No. 2/3 mirror unit on the left side 1 Press the hook section of the main charger unit to release lock,
of the copier. and pull out and remove the main charger unit from the copier.

Hook

Mirror unit
fixing screw

main charger unit

2 Remove one fixing screw of the main charger unit (on the back
side).
Fixing screw

Electrode section
B. Lens and No. 4/5 mirror unit lock release
Remove two fixing screws of the No. 4/5 mirror unit on the right inside
of the copier.
Open the front cabinet and remove one fixing screw of the lens on the
lower side of the operation panel.

Main charger unit

3 Press the electrode cleaner onto the tips of the electrode so that
the tips are inserted into the cleaner a few times to clean.
(Note)
• Do not move the cleaner back and forth with the electrode tips
inserted into it.
• When cleaning, clean thoroughly at one time. Avoid partial
Mirror unit cleaning.
fixing screw

Paper feed tray

Lens fixing screw

Electrode cleaner

Electrode section

4 Return the electrode section to the original position and fix it with a
screw.

4–3
manuals4you.com
5 Insert the main charger unit along the guide groove in the copier 3 Remove three fixing screws of the toner hopper of the developing
fully to the bottom. unit, and remove the toner hopper.

Fixing screw
Fixing screw Toner hopper

Main charger unit

Developing unit

5. Developing unit setting 4 While supplying developer from the developer supply port of the
developing unit, turn the MG gear clockwise with a screwdriver or
a scale to supply fully in the developing unit.
A. Developing unit setting
1 Open the front cabinet, remove the installation toner fixed to the
developing unit level with tape, and pull the developing unit lever
toward you. Developer
2 Hold the grip of the developing unit, and slowly pull out the Developer
developing unit until it stops. supply port
Then hold the hand carry strap and press the developing lever,
and remove the developing unit.

Hand carry strap

Developing unit

MG gear

Screwdriver (+) or scale

5 Install the toner hopper to the developing unit and fix it with two
screws.

DV lever Developing unit Grip Fixing screw

Toner hopper

Fixing screw

Developing unit

4–4
6 Hold the hand carry strap of the developing unit and insert it into 7. Accessory installation
the copier fully to the bottom.

A. Copier tray installation

Install the copy tray to the paper exit section on the left side of the
copier.
Hand carry strap

Copy tray

Developing unit Grip

7 Close the developing unit lever and close the front cabinet.
8. Toner supply
1 Open the front cover.

Developing unit lever

Front cabinet

2 Pull down the developer unit lock lever and pull the developer unit
out slowly unit it stops.
With the above procedure, setting of the developing unit is com-
pleted.

6. Toner density sensor level adjustment

Turn on the copier power switch.

A. Developing unit level adjustment

1 Execute simulation 25.

C 0 2

5 2

2 After 3 minutes, simulation 25 is completed.

(Note) If the simulation is terminated halfway, automatic reading
is not performed. Do not terminate it halfway.
3 Cancel simulation 25 with the CA key.

4–5
manuals4you.com
3 Hold the new toner bottle as shown and shake it four or five times. 6 Close the toner hopper cover.

4 Open the toner hopper cover. 7 Slide the developer unit into the copier.
8 Return the developer unit lock lever into place.

5 Pour the toner evenly into the toner hopper.

9 Close the front cover.

4–6
9. Center shift adjustment
There is basically no need to perform the center shift adjustment
because it is made when shipping. If the center should be shifted,
adjust in the following procedures.
Make a copy. If the center is shifted as shown in Fig. 1 or Fig. 2,
loosen the four screws which are fixing the cassette grip cabinet.
10. Label attachment
A. Label attachment
Attach the magnification ratio select label packed together with the
Operation manual to the position shown in the figure below.
• When attaching the label to the copier with the original cover.

Magnification ratio select lable

Section b Section b
Direction A
Section a Section a

Direction B

(Note) When fixing the cassette cabinet, the fixing screws and the
cabinet clearance a and b are in symmetry.

[Reference figure]

Section b

Section a
• When attaching the label to the optional automatic original feeder
(SF-A18)

Magnification ratio select lable

(1) Fig. 1
Move the cassette grip cabinet in direction A, tighten two fixing
screws (a) and tow fixing screws (b) in this sequence. Make a copy
again and check the center.

[Fig.1] Paper center line

Image center line (First image)

(2) Fig. 2
Move the cassette grip cabinet in direction B, tighten two fixing
screws (a) and tow fixing screws (b) in this sequence. Make a copy
again and check the center.

[Fig.2] Paper center line

Image center line (First image)

4–7
manuals4you.com
 2) Basic operations
[5] DESCRIPTIONS OF EACH
(Tray paper feed operation)
SECTION When the CPFC (Cassette paper feed clutch) turn on, the paper feed
roller shaft, the paper feed roller, and the take-up roller rotate in the
Descriptions are made on the following sections: direction of A. At the same time, the limiter spring moves down the
roller release arm. As a result, the take-up roller falls by its own
1 Paper feed section weight onto the paper surface, starting paper feed.
2 Developing section
3 Optical section Roller release arm
4 Process section Take-up
roller
5 Separation/transport section
6 Fusing/paper exit section
7 High voltage section

Paper feed roller

3 Paper feed roller shaft

4 When the CPFC turns off, rotation stops and the take-up roller is
6 pushed up to the original position by the roller release arm spring.
2
1

1. Paper feed section

1) General descriptions (Manual paper feed operation)

There is no special mechanism for manual paper feed other than the
To realize the compact design, the front loading system and the fol- manual feed paper sensing actuator and the paper guide.
dable multi paper feed unit (Option for some areas) are employed. When the CPFC turns off, rotation stops and the take-up roller is
pushed up to the original position.

50
Sheets

250 sheets

The paper feed tray is of the universal type and has capacity of 250
sheets. The front loading system allows the tray to be loaded from the
lower side of the front cabinet.
Manual paper feed is made in the multi paper feed.

5–1
2. Developing section
(Details of DV harness connector)

1) General descriptions For bias

(1) Two-component developer

The developer is composed of toner and carrier.
GND
Carrier serves as a medium for attaching toner onto the electrostatic
image on the photoconductor drum.
By stirring toner and carrier, they are rubbed to be charged positive GND
(+) and negative (–) respectively.
Since developer will deteriorate to degrade copy quality, it should be
replaced regularly.
(2) Two-component magnetic brush development *For toner density sensor
The rotatable non-magnetic sleeve is provided over the magnet roller
and is rotated.
Carrier forms a magnetic brush on the sleeve surface by magnetic VB
force to attach toner onto the electrostatic image on the photoconduc-
tor drum.
*Resistance value is identified by color
(3) Developing bias
When the photoconductor is charged and exposed to light (ex-
posure), the surface potential (voltage) of the photoconductor will not
be lost completely. (The residual potential remains.) 2) Basic composition
Toner is attracted to the photoconductor by this residual potential,
dirtying the photoconductor. As a result, a dirty copy of white back-
2 4
ground is generated.
To prevent against this, a voltage of the same polarity and higher than
the residual potential is applied to the MG roller, preventing toner from
being attached to the photoconductor surface.

Residual potential < DV BIAS 1

MG roller

3 5
DV BIAS
-200V
Toner No. Name
Carrier
1 Magnet roller Forms a magnetic brush of carrier
by magnetic force.
Developing bias voltage 2 Developing doctor blade Limits the height of the magnetic
brush.
3 Developing MIX roller Stirs carrier in the developing unit
(4) DV harness and distributes toner evenly.
The toner density sensor, the developing bias, harness.
4 Toner transport roller Transport toner sent from the
(For details, refer to [6] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY.)
toner hopper unit to the stirring
section.
(Viewed from the rear of develoing unit)
5 Toner density sensor Senses toner density in
developer.

DV harness connector

5–2
manuals4you.com
3) Basic operations
(Cassette paper feed) Proccess
Main motor
When the CPFC (cassette paper feed clutch) is turned on, the paper unit
feed roller shaft, the paper feed roller, and the take-up roller rotates in
Main drive unit
the direction of A, and the roller release arm is moved downward by
Stirring roller
the limiter spring. As a result, the take-up roller falls by its weight to DV drive unit Fuser unit
reach the paper surface, feeding the paper. When the CPFC is turned
off, the take-up roller is pushed up to the position by the roller release MG roller
arm spring. Cleaner Transport
unit unit
PS roller
Paper exit
Multi manual
roller
insertion paper
feed unit
(Option)

Transport
roller(upper)

Transport
roller(lower)

Paper feed
Paper feed
rive unit
unit

Paper feed
unit

3. Optical section

1) General description
• The optical section of this model is composed of the fixed focus
lens and six mirrors. Since the fixed focus lens is used, No. 4/5
mirror base is shifted according to the shift of the lens to change
the distance between the original and the drum (OID, Original
Image Distance) in reduction or enlargement copy.
The lens and No. 4/5 mirror unit are shifted by driving the stepping
motor with the signals from the main control PWB, allowing zoom-
ing of 151 steps in 1% increment in the range of 0.50 to 2.00.
• Exposure is adjusted by changing the copy lamp voltage. The AE
sensor is provided in the zoom base to sense the density of the
original.
The copy lamp light is reflected by the original to the AE sensor,
which senses the density of the original and adjust the copy lamp
light quantity according to the density.
• The exposure system is the slit exposure system by moving light
source.

16 4 11 1 2 3 17 15 7 13

10 5 6 9

14 8 12

1 Copy lamp 2 Reflector 3 No. 1 mirror

4 No. 2 mirror 5 No. 3 mirror 6 Lens
7 No. 4 mirror 8 No. 5 mirror 9 No. 6 mirror
F No. 2/3 mirror base unit G Copy lamp unit H No. 4/5 mirror base unit
I Mirror motor J Lens/No. 4/5 mirror base drive motor K Lens home position sensor
L Mirror home position sensor M Automatic exposure (AE) sensor/
Optical system dirt sensor

5–3
(1) Original table (2) Copy lamp
The original table is fixed. The original is set in the left center position. 200V series: 170V, 310W
(3) Mirror
This model uses six mirrors.
No. 1 mirror is attached to the copy lamp unit, No. 2/3 mirrors are
attached to No. 2/3 mirror base, No. 4/5 mirrors are attached to No.
4/5 mirror base.
The copy lamp unit and the No. 2/3 mirror base unit are scanned in
copying. The No. 4/5 mirror base is shifted in zoom copying to
change the distance between ten original and the drum.
(4) Lens (fixed focus lens)
• Construction (1 group 3 lenses)
• Brightness (F8.5)
• Focus: (195mm ±1%)
(5) Lens home position sensor (LHPS)
This sensor senses the lens home position. The output signal of this
sensor is the basic signal to control the copy magnification ratio.
(6) Lens base
The lens is mounted to the lens base, which is shifted toward the
paper feed direction in reduction copy or toward the paper exit direc-
tion in enlargement copy by the lens drive motor.

Mirror base scan speed is changed for zooming

Enlargment

Normal

Zooming by changing the lens

and mirror position
Original

Reduction
Copy direction

5–4
manuals4you.com
 Parts identification and functions

Lens home position sensor

Mirror home position sensor Mirror motor
AE sensor Lens No. 4/5 mirror unit
No. 2/3 mirror unit Reflector drive motor N
Copy lamp unit Copy lamp

Lens drive wire

No. 4/5 mirror unit

Lens

Lens
unit

Mirror base wire Temperature fuse

(7) Lens drive shaft (14) Temperature fuse

This shaft controls the optical axis of the lens in zoom copy. The lens This is attached closely to the reflector to prevent against abnormal
follows along the slide base shaft. temperature rise in the optical system. If the temperature rises abnor-
mally, it turns off the copy lamp power directly.
(8) Lens drive wire
200V series (117°C)
This is to shift the lens unit and the No. 4/5 mirror base.
(15) Reflector
(9) No. 4/5 mirror unit
Light from the copy lamp is reflected by the reflector to the original.
No. 4/5 mirrors are attached to this unit. It is shifted by the lens drive
motor to change the distance between the original and the drum (16) Exposure adjustment plate
according to the zooming ratio. Four exposure adjustment plates are attached to the copy lamp unit
to adjust exposure balance in back and forth direction of the frame.
(10) Mirror motor
This stepping motor shifts the copy lamp unit and the No. 2/3 mirror (17) Mirror base drive wire
base. It is rotated at the rpm according to each zooming ratio. This wire transmits the mirror motor power to the copy lamp unit and
the No. 2/3 mirror base to scan the mirror base.
(11) Mirror home position sensor (MHPS)
This sensor senses the home position of the copy lamp unit. It is of (18) Lens drive motor
light transmission type. This stepping motor drives the lens and the No. 4/5 mirror base.
(12) No. 2/3 mirror unit (19) AE sensor
No. 2/3 mirrors are attached to this unit. It is scanned by the mirror This AE sensor senses the original density by the light emitted from
motor. the copy lamp and reflected by the original, controlling the developing
bias. The photometric area is about 100m width at the center and in
(13) Copy lamp unit
the mirror base scanning direction.
This is composed of No. 1 mirror, the temperature fuse, the copy The element is photo diodes.
lamp, the exposure adjustment plate, and the reflector, and scanned
by the mirror motor.

5–5
2) Basic operations
Mirror base scan speed
(Positions of the original, the lens, and the image in each mag-
nification ratio)
Lens and mirror positions
Normal: The distance between the original set on the table glass and are changed to adjust the
the lens is equal to the distance between the lens and the Copy paper magnification ratio
drum, resulting in the equal size of the original and the feed derection
image. Mirror scan speed is cahnged to adjust the magnification ratio
Mirror scan speed Drum rotation speed<Mirror scan speed

Enlargement

Enlargement: Compared to the normal copy, the lens is nearer to the

original and the distance between the original and the Original
lens is shorter.
The distance between the No. 4/5 mirror unit and the
lens is greater, and the distance between the lens and
the drum is also greater.
The distance between the original and the exposure
surface of the drum is greater than that in the normal
copy.
Reduction

(Copy lamp control in each copy density)

[MAX. 83V(166V)]
80

70
CLV
60
Reduction: Compared to the normal copy, the lens is nearer to the (Copy lamp
drum, and the distance between the original surface and application 50
the lens is longer. voltage)
40
The distance between the lens and the exposure surface
[MIN. 45V(90V)]
of the drum is shorter.
The distance between the No. 4/5 mirror unit and the
lens is greater. (V)
The distance between the original and the exposure sur-
face of the drum is greater than that in the normal copy. EX1 2 3 4 EX5

Execute Sim 46-01 to determine the copy lamp application voltage

(CLV) in EX1 and EX5.
Then divide the difference between the voltages of EX1.0 and EX5.0
into nine.
The application voltage of the copy lamp in each exposure level is
determined by varying the ON timer duty of the copy lamp ON control
signal.
• Photo density copy mode
Make the same control procedures as the manual density copy
mode.
The image density is controlled by lowering the grid bias voltage of
the charging charger. To maintain the reproduction quality in half
tone, the ON time duty of the copy lamp ON signal is made shorter
than in the manual density copy mode. (The application voltage is
lower.)

5–6
manuals4you.com
(Optical system dirt correction)
Reference plate (Glass holder) Table glass
This model perform dirt correction by changing the copy lamp inten-
sity according to the dirt degree in the optical system (the copy lamp
unit, No. 1 mirror, No.2 mirror, No.3 mirror) to prevent against remark-
able degrading of copy quality.
The reference value is the AE sensor output value which is obtained
when the reference plate is exposed with the copy lamp voltage of Copy lamp light quantity "UP"
67.0V (134.0V) at power ON.
This value is checked with sim 44-08, 09.
Automatic exposure
sensor

CPU
Reference value
>Measured value
Correction data output

CLV

Sim46

100 200 300 400 79.8K 80K

CLV + (0.7)

(1) Setting the reference value for optical system correction. (2) Dirt correction
Reference plate (Glass holder) Table glass Reference plate (Glass holder) Table glass

Copy lamp light quantity "UP"

Automatic exposure Automatic exposure

sensor sensor

CPU
CPU reference value Reference value
setting >Measured value
Correction data output

1 Clean the optical system at every maintenance. 1 Measure light quantity when performing mirror initialization.
2 Perform Simulation 46-1. 2 Store the correction data into memory.
(The previous data are cleared.) 3 Reset the register inside the CPU.
3 After completion of Simulation 46-1, when performing the first
mirror initialization, measure light quantity of the copy lamp.
Obtain the average value from the four measurement values and
use the average value as the reference value for correction.
1234
800ms

CL
Light quantity
measurement
Obtain the average value of four AE sensor values, and store it.

5–7
4. Copy process

This model basic process and structure

• The Scorotron method is used to evenly charge the photoconduc-
tor surface to the given potential in the charge process. The
corona wire regularly used is now replaced with a new corona
charge mechanism that employs the 0.1mm thick stainless steel
saw teeth plate, in order to suppress ozone generated when the
oxide molecule in air is ionized.
• Considering the service efficiency, the process separation
mechanism is adopted.
• To prevent high voltage leakage by the loose corona charge unit, a
one-touch stopper mechanism is adopted.

Proccess
Main motor
unit

Main drive unit

Stirring roller
DV drive unit Fuser unit

MG roller
Cleaner Transport
unit unit
PS roller
Paper exit
Multi manual
roller
insertion paper
feed unit
(Option)

Transport
roller(upper)

Transport
roller(lower)

Paper feed
Paper feed
rive unit
unit

Paper feed
unit

1) Photoconductor
• This model uses OPC (organic photoconductor) as photoconduc-
tive material. (φ50 mm)

OPC layer CTL (Electric charge moving layer)

CGL (Electric charge generating layer)

Aluminum layer

5–8
manuals4you.com
2) Process diagram

Original

Mirror lens Copy lamp

High voltage unit

Main corona unit Charging Exposure Blank lamp

Discharge lamp Discharging Discharge

High voltage unit
Toner
Development
Cleaning blade Cleaning Developer

Waste toner collection

Separation
Manual paper feed
Drum upper Paper feed roller
image/paper Resist roller Paper cassette
synchronization Transportroller
Paper exit Fusing Separation
Transfer

Heat roller Separation corona unit

Transfer charger
Image forming process
Heater lamp High voltage unit
Paper transport path
High voltage unit

2 1 Main corona unit

1
2 Blank lamp
9 3 3 Developer unit
8 4 MG roller
4 5 Transfer corona unit
6 Separation corona unit
7 Separation pawl
8 Cleaning blade
7
9 Discharge lamp
6 5

5–9
3) Details of image forming process
Step 1 (Main Charging)
By negative discharging of the main charger, uniform negative char-
ges are applied to the OPC drum surface.
The OPC drum surface potential is controlled by the screen grid
voltage to maintain the grid voltage at a constant level.
• When the drum surface potential is lower than the grid voltage,
electric charges generated by discharging of the charger go
through the screen grid to charge the drum surface potential until it
becomes equal to the grid voltage.
• When the drum surface potential virtually reaches the grid potential
level, electric charges generated by discharging of the charger 1 Main corona unit
flows through the electrode of the screen grid to the high voltage 2 Blank lamp
unit grid voltage output circuit, thus always maintaining the drum
3 Developer unit
surface potential at a level virtually equal to the grid voltage.
4 MG roller
• The main corona unit employs the scorotron system to charge the
photoconductor surface to a certain level uniformly. 5 Transfer corona unit
In addition, the conventional corona wire is replaced with the 6 Separation corona unit
corona charging mechanism by saw-teeth plate (stainless steel
plate of 0.1 mm thick). In corona discharge, oxygen molecules in 7 Separation pawl
the air are ionized to generate ozone (O3). The mechanism restrict 8 Cleaning blade
the generation of ozone.
9 Discharge lamp

Main corona unit

High voltage unit 1 2

3
Screen grid 9
8
4

CTL

CGL 7
OPC drum
Aluminum 6
layer 5

Step 2 (Exposure)
Light from the copy lamp is radiated on the document, and the optical On the contrary, electric charges are generated more in the CGL
image of the document is reflected by the mirrors and projected layer corresponding to the darker density of document (lower intensity
through the lens to the OPC drum. of the OPC drum surface), and less quantity of the negative charges
The lighter portion of the document reflects more light (high intensity) on the CPU drum surface is neutralized, decreasing the OPC drum
to the OPC drum, and the darker portion of the document reflect less surface less. Therefore, the OPC drum surface potential correspond-
light (low intensity) to the OPC drum. Positive or negative charges are ing to the lighter portion of the document is lower, and that cor-
generated in the CGL of the OPC drum where lights are radiated. responding to the darker portion of the document is higher. Latent
Negative charges generated in the CGL move towards the positive static-electricity images are formed in the above manner.
charges in the aluminum layer generated in step 3. While the positive
charges in the CGL move towards the negative charges on the CPU
drum surface generated in step 3. Therefore, positive charges and
negative charges are neutralized in the aluminum layer and the OPC
drum surface at the light radiating position, decreasing the OPC drum
surface potential. The CGL electric charge generating amount in-
creases in proportion to the document density, that is, reflected light
intensity (the OPC drum surface intensity). Therefore, electric char-
ges are generated less in the CGL layer corresponding to the lighter
density of document (higher intensity of the OPC drum surface), and
a greater quantity of the negative charges on the OPC drum surface
is neutralized, decreasing the OPC drum surface potential more.

5 – 10
manuals4you.com
 Low intensity in
Medium intensity HIgh intensity in
the area corre-
in the area corre- the area corre-
sponding to the
sponding to the sponding to the
darker density
medium density lighter density of
portion of the
portion of the the document
document
document

CTL

CGL

Aluminum 2
layer 1
OPC drum 9 3

4
Surface potential Surface 8
(High)
potential
(Medium) Surface
CTL
potential
(Low) 7
CGL

6 5
Aluminum
layer
OPC drum

1 Main corona unit

2 Blank lamp
3 Developer unit
Step 3 (Development)
Toner is attached to the latent static-electricity images on the drum 4 MG roller
surface to change them to visible images. The two-component mag- 5 Transfer corona unit
netic brush development system charges toner positively by friction
6 Separation corona unit
with carriers, and toner is attached to negative charges on the drum
surface. The potential in the darker document projecting area (low 7 Separation pawl
intensity) is high (much negative charges) and attracts more toner. 8 Cleaning blade
The potential in the lighter document projecting portion (high intensity)
is low (less negative charges), and attracts less toner. 9 Discharge lamp

OPC drum

Aluminum layer CGL CTL

1 2

Higher surface 9 3
potential
(Much negative 8
(charges)
4
Medium surface
potential MG roller
(Less negative
(charges)
7
Lower surface
potential 6 5
(No negative
(charges) -200V

High voltage unit

bias voltage

At that time, a bias of –200V is applied to the MG roller (magnet

roller), which is provided for preventing toner from being attracted by
the residual voltage (about –80V to –100V) in the lighter portion after
exposure.

5 – 11
Step 4 (Transfer)
The transfer paper is charged higher than the OPC drum surface
potential by strong negative discharge of the transfer charger, making
the binding force between the transfer paper and toner stronger than
that between the drum and toner, attracting toner to the transfer
paper.

Aluminum
layer
OPC drum
CGL
1 2
CTL Toner
9 3
Transfer paper
8
4
7

6 5
Transfer corona unit

High voltage unit

Step 5 (Separation) 1 Main corona unit

After transfer, the copy paper and the drum are negatively charged. 2 Blank lamp
Since, however, the negative potential of the copy paper is higher
3 Developer unit
than that of the drum, a attraction force is applied between the drum
and the copy paper. To avoid this, AC corona is applied to the copy 4 MG roller
paper by the separation charger to decrease the copy paper potential 5 Transfer corona unit
to the same level as the drum surface potential. The attraction be-
tween the copy paper and the drum is weakened by this, allowing 6 Separation corona unit
separation of the copy paper by its own extending force. If the copy 7 Separation pawl
paper is not separated by the separation charger, it is separated by
8 Cleaning blade
the separation pawl mechanically.
9 Discharge lamp

Aluminum
layer
OPC drum
CGL 2
1
CTL Toner 3
9
Transfer paper
8
4

5
6

Seperation corona unit

High voltage unit

5 – 12
manuals4you.com
Step 6 (Cleaning)
Residual toner on the drum is removed by the cleaning blade. The
removed toner is sent to the waste toner container by the waste toner
transport screw.

Blade CTL CGL Aluminum layer

1 2

9 3
8
4

Residual toner
OPC drum 5
6

Step 7 (Discharging) 1 Main corona unit

When the OPC drum is exposed to the discharge lamp light, positive 2 Blank lamp
and negative charges are generated in the OPC drum CGL. The
3 Developer unit
negative charges generated in the CGL move towards the residual
positive charges in the aluminum layer, while the positive charges in 4 MG roller
the CGL move towards the residual negative charges on the OPC 5 Transfer corona unit
drum surface. Therefore, the positive and the negative charges are
neutralized in the aluminum layer and on the OPC drum surface, 6 Separation corona unit
removing the residual charges on the OPC drum surface. As a result, 7 Separation pawl
the OPC drum surface potential becomes 20V ∼ 30V.
8 Cleaning blade
9 Discharge lamp

Discharge lamp

1 2

9 3

OPC drum 4
Residual charge 8

7
CTL
CGL
5
6
Aluminum layer Residual charge

5 – 13
4) Transition of photoconductor surface potential
Charge Exposure BL Develop Transfer Separate Clean DL

-730V
Dark area

Developing bias voltage

-215V

Light area

Residual potential

5) Photoconductor drum sensitivity correction

In this model, fall in sensitivity due to long use of the photoconductor
drum is corrected by the copy lamp light intensity to prevent against
considerable change in copy quality.
The photoconductor drum sensitivity fall correction is performed as
follows:

Cleaner
Develop

Change the tickness of the carrier transport layer (CTL).

OPC drum By the developper.
By the cleaner blade.
(NEW) (USED)

CTL CTL

CGL CGL

CLV

Sim46

Time

6) Process control function

F
[Summary]
The process control function detects the density of the standard toner
image formed on the photoconductor, the density of the initial image R
and controls the charging grid voltage so that the same level as the
initial image density is provided.
That is, the process conditions are established and the high voltage
output and exposure level are controlled to stabilize the toner density. MAin control PWB
In this model, the density sensing level is automatically set.
CPU density
judgement

High voltage PWB

I/O MC grid
output selection MC grid bias
output (density
correction)
in each mode

(Light quantity
correction)
5 – 14
manuals4you.com
Process control The grid voltage value where the same density level as the refer-
ence level is obtained is displayed by Sim. 44-9 "a". This value is
1 Toner patch images are formed on the photoconductor surface
displayed with 50 as the center in the range of 0 ~ 99 in integer
under the three process conditions (MC grid bias voltage).
numbers. The correction for 50 is 0V (–410V), and the correction
At the first process control, a toner parch image is formed with the
for 56 is +30V (–440V).
reference grid voltage –410V as the center and ±30V. At the
second or later process control, the MC grid bias voltage deter- 4 When the MC grid bias voltage is corrected by the process con-
mined at the former process control is used as the center, and a trol, the corresponding light quantity is calculated to control the
toner patch is formed under the process condition of ±30V to the copy lamp.
center value. To correct the MC grid voltage, the delta value of the sensitivity
level when the initially recorded reference grid voltage is –410V
2 Measure the three toner patch images formed in the above and
and the MC grid voltage where the same density is obtained in
the drum surface with the process density sensor to obtain the
process control is fed back to the MC grid voltage of each mode.
relations.
Toner Toner Toner
Process control timing
Surface image Surface image Surface image Surface In this model, the process control is performed in the following timing:
3
472V
1 When the main switch is turned on and the first copy is made:
2 2 At every specified copy quantity (First copy after 1,000 copies)
440V Judged by the total counter.
1
408V 3 After the specified time after turning on the main switch. (First
Bias
copy after 44, 60, 120, 180 min)
Drum marking
Drum 1/2 rotation 2/2 rotation 3/2 rotations
In this model, a toner patch image is formed in the same position on
1 the photoconductor drum surface to improve the accuracy of the
BV 2
3 process control.
3
A marking is provided on the drum and the marking is sensed before
PV 2 forming a toner patch image. If the marking level is not sensed, the
1
developing lamp blinks and the trouble code (F2-32) is displayed.
IDPAT 1 =PV 1 x 20 IDBAS 1 =BV 1 x 20
IDPAT 2 =PV 2 x 20 IDBAS 2 =BV 2 x 20
IDPAT 3 =PV 3 x 20 IDBAS 3 =BV 3 x 20

BVS: Sensor detection level on the photoconductor drum surface

PVS: Sensor detection level with the toner patch image
Obtain the above two levels from the calculation formula and record
them as the reference values. R
A. STD BA: Reference level when detecting the drum surface
→ STD BA = BV x 20 6mm x 7mm
B. STD PA: Reference level when detecting the toner patch image F
→ STD PA = PV x 20
In the density correction, the process conditions are determined
so that the ratio of the reference levels  STD PA 
 set in the above
 STD BA 
may be maintained at constant.
3 Obtain the MC grid bias voltage from the reference level ratio.
Basic structure
PA Photoconductor drum: The 50mmφ ground plate of the OPC
( ӊ)
BA drum is on the rear frame side of the drum
ID PAT3 unit so that it contacts the drum locator
3 3=
ID BAS3 pin.
STD PA ID PAT2
STD BA 2 2= Blank lamp: The non-image area is exposed by the
ID BAS2
light from the blank lamp to erase the
1 ID PAT1 positive potential outside the drum CTL.
1=
ID BAS1 Use of the latchet simplifies the lamp posi-
tion adjustment.
Discharge lamp: Eight bulbs cast light over the drum sur-
face to erase the positive potential in CTL.
-380 -410 -440 Ventilation hole provided in the drum
GB PAT
frame releases heat from bulbs.
MC grid bias voltage
Cleaning mechanism: The cleaning blade removes the toner
In this model, the absolute value of the output of the density remaining on the drum surface. The blade
sensor is not directly used for control calculation, but the ratio of always rests on the drum surface.
the sensor output value (BA) on the drum surface and the sensor
Main corona: The saw teeth corona charge method is
output (PA) of the toner patch image is used for control calcula-
used. Use of the screen grid maintains the
tion.
even charge potential over the photocon-
* The grid bias value is obtained so that the ratio of the drum ductor surface.
surface level and the sensor level when forming patch level and
Enforced separation Using two pieces of separation pawl, the
the sensor level when forming patch images is 200:40.
mechanism: copy paper stuck over the drum surface is
Though, therefore the light quantity of the reflection type sensor is forced to separate from the drum surface.
varied by dirt or deterioration, the ratio (PA/PB) will not be affected
by change in light quantity to provide stable control.
5 – 15
Waste toner transport The waste toner is passed through waste 5. TRANSPORT/FUSING SECTION
mechanism: toner transport screw 1 and waste toner
pipe 2 to waste toner bottle 3. 1) General
Waste toner bottle 3 is rotated by the
This model allows transport of paper of max. A3 (11" x 17") and min.
main drive gear via gear 4 to transport
A5 (8 1/2" x 5 1/2").
toner evenly.
After images are transferred on the paper, the paper is separated
When the waste toner bottle is full of
from the drum by the separation pawl and transported to the fuser
waste toner, the rotation torque of gear 4
section by rotations of the resist roller and the transport belt.
is increased to escape gear 5 in the
The drum separation pawl is provided under the process unit. It is
arrow direction A, and switch 6 is turned
made by turning on (separating) the solenoid inside the main drive
on at the same time to light the waste
unit.
toner replacement lamp.
2) Basic composition and functions
1 Transport belts (2pcs)
The transport belts are provided with notches to hold paper rear
45 6 ends.
Paper
Feeding direction

A Transport belt

6. Fusing paper exit section

1 Upper heat roller

The upper heat roller is teflon-coated.
2 Lower heat roller
A silicone rubber roller is used.
3 Separation pawl
The upper heat roller is equipped with four pawls which are teflon
coated to reduce friction.
the lower heat roller is equipped with two pawls.
4 Upper/lower separation function
The upper and lower heat roller sections are separated by rotating
operations with the transport roller as a fulcrum, providing better
serviceability.

5 – 16
manuals4you.com
5 Drive system division 7. High voltage section
The fuser unit is rotated by the main drive unit. In case of manual
rotation of the fuser unit to remove paper jam, however, excessive 1) General
loads may be applied to the gears. To prevent against this, the
There are three kinds of coronas; the main corona, the transfer
pressure of the upper/lower heat rollers is reduced when the
corona, and the separation corona. The main corona employs the
machine clamshells are opened. In addition, the fusing gear is so
scorotron system, where the drum surface is evenly charged with
constructed that the drive is not transferred to the drive system.
negative charges controlled by the screen grid between the corona
and the drum. The transfer corona is used to transfer toner images on
Proccess
unit Main motor the drum to the copy paper. A high, negative voltage is applied to the
rear side of the paper. The separation corona applies AC corona to
Main drive unit the copy paper to eliminate potential difference with the drum to allow
separation of the paper.
Fuser unit
The output voltage of the main charger and the transfer charger is
supplied by transformer 1. The feedback current from the transfer
Cleaner Transport charger is controlled to be constant and outputted to the main
unit unit charger.
PS roller
Paper exit
roller
2) Basic composition
Multi manual
insertion paper
feed unit 1 Main (charging) corona – High voltage transformer (MHVG)
(Option)

Transport
Grid voltage Developing bias voltage
roller (upper) Standard mode –750V
Transport Photo mode –500V –200V
roller (lower)
TSM mode –650V
Paper feed
Paper feed
rive unit
unit
2 Main transfer corona – High voltage transformer (THVG)
Paper feed
unit –41µA (Electrode sheet front-rear balance difference: max. 7.0µA)
3 Separation corona – High voltage transformer (SHVG)
Thermo control AC4KV ±0.1KV

Heat roller surface

Thermistor
temperature detection

CPU Heat roller The heat roller is heated by the

heater lamp.
Heater lamp (When the heat roller surface
temperature is 190 C˚ or lower,
the heater lamp is actuated)

(Heater trouble)
Self diag display Thermostat Contact open (*)
Abnormal high
temperature

• Abnormally high temperature (H3) 240°C or upper

• Abnormally low temperature (H4)
• Thermistor disconnection (H2)
* When the thermostat contact is open, it is required to press the
reset button in the upper side of the thermostat. (The contact is not
reset automatically.)

5 – 17
 (Note for assembly)
[6] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 1) There is the 8-pin connector on the back of the rear frame side.
When assembling it, carefully insert.
The descriptions are divided into the following sections.
2) The belt must be on the paper feed unit gear and the resist roller
1. Paper feed section gear.
2. Transport section and power section
3. Fusing section
4. Optical system 1-2. Paper feed roller ass’y removal
5. SPF section 1) Remove the rear frame side electromagnetic clutch connector.
6. Drum section
2) Remove the front frame side stopper and the bearing.
7. Developing section
8. Operation panel section and intermediate cabinet 3) Remove the roller release arm spring from the paper feed frame.
9. Major parts on the frame side
10. Manual multi paper feed unit

1. Paper feed section

1-1. Paper feed unit

1 Open the front cover and lift up the upper clamshell. Remove two
fixing screws of the manual paper feed section, and remove the
manual paper feed section.

4) Remove the rear frame bearing, and one side of the paper feed
roller ass’y will be disengaged. To remove the ass’y completely,
remove the E-ring.
(Note for assembly 1)
With roller release arm spring A hooked on the spring notch, attach
the paper feed roller ass’y to the paper feed unit, and hook the spring
on the paper feed frame.

2 Remove the four fixing screws of the paper feed unit, and lift the
rear frame side of the paper feed unit and remove it. (Since there
is the 8-pin connector on the back of the rear frame side, it re-
quires some force to remove. Carefully pull it out straight.)

6–1
manuals4you.com
(Note for assembly 2) 1-4. Separation roller
When attaching the paper feed section roller ass’y, adjust so that the
1 Remove the paper feed unit and remove the separation roller.
paper feed roller clutch and the PS front roller ass’y clutch projection
face toward the paper feed side.

1-3. PS front roller ass’y 1-5. Paper feed roller, take-up roller
1 Remove the paper feed unit. (For the details, refer to the 1-1.) 1 Remove the paper feed roller, and remove the take-up roller.
2 Disengage the hook section of the front frame side bearing,
remove the connector on the rear frame side, and remove the PS
front roller ass’y from the paper feed frame.

2 Remove the roller holder, the stop ring, the bearing, and the paper
feed roller.

6–2
(Note for assembly) 4 Remove the clutch and the gears as shown below.
Attach the paper feed roller so that the one-way clutch is on the rear
frame side. (Be careful of the direction.)
Attach the roller holder as shown below.

One-way clutch side

(Note for assembly)

1) Attach so that the resist roller clutch projection is on the paper exit
side as shown in the figure below.
2) Arrange the cable and the power grounding wire from the resist
roller clutch as shown in the figure below.
3) Hook the hook section of the TC case as shown below.

2. Transport unit TC/SC case

2-1. Resist roller, transfer roller

1 Open the front cover.
2 Release two lock pawls of the TC case, and lift the front side of
the TC case to remove.

4) When attaching the resist roller ass’y to the copier, attach over the
upper side of the PS roller lower mylar, then rotate the roller to set
the mylar to the normal position. (If the mylar is deformed, it may
cause paper jam. Replace it if deformed.)

PS mylar
3 Remove the hook of the front frame side bearing, and lift it up to
remove it toward the upper frame side. Remove the rear frame
side connector, and slide and remove the resist roller ass’y toward
the rear frame side.

6–3
manuals4you.com
2-2. Transport belt 4 Remove two connectors from the unit.
1 Remove the fusing unit.
2 Remove the TC case.
3 Disengage the transport belt drive shaft holder on the TC case
side, then disengage the drive shaft on the paper exit side and
remove the belt.

5 Remove the stop ring and remove the unit.

(Note for assembly)
1 There is a mark ( î ) on the transport belt. Set so that the tip of
the mark faces toward the paper exit direction.
2 Be careful of the installing direction of the transport belt drive
shaft.

3. Fusing section

3-1. Fusing unit removal

1 Open the front cover.
2 Push the open/close lever down to the right side, and slowly open
the upper unit.
3 Remove the fixing screw of the fusing connector cover and
remove the cover.

(Note for assembly)

When removing the unit from the copier, ba careful not to scratch the
photoconductor drum and the lower heat roller. Be careful not to
break the actuator of the paper exit sensor (POD).

6–4
3-2. Heater lamp replacement
1 Remove the fusing cover fixing screw (1 pc.), and slide the cover
to the front side to remove.
2 While pressing the Fasten terminal projection connected to the
thermostat, remove the lead wire from the connection section.
3 Remove the fixing screw of the lamp holder on the upper side of
the rear frame, and remove the holder.
4 Pull out the heater lamp from the front frame side.
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedures.
3-3. Upper heat roller ass’y removal
1 Remove two fixing screws of bearings of the front and the rear
frames.
2 Push the paper guide down to the paper exit side and separate
the separation pawl from the roller and fix it.
3 Rotate the bearing fixing screws about 45 degrees downward and
remove the ass’y.
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedures.
6–5
manuals4you.com
3-4. Upper separation pawl replacement
1 Remove the fusing unit, and remove the cover.
2 Put the fusing unit so that the paper guide is on the lower side of
the fusing unit (the separation pawl is on the upper side).
3 Remove the tension spring, hold the separation pawl tip and
remove it from the supporting section, and remove it from the unit
by tilting.
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedures.
3-5. Lower heat roller replacement
1 Remove the fusing unit.
2 With the lower separation pawl upright, slide it to the rear frame
side and keep the lower separation pawl upright.
3 Remove the lower heat roller together with the bearing.
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedures.
(Note for assembly)
Assemble so that the lower separation pawl is on the upper side of
the lower heat roller. (At that time, return the separation pawl which
was set upright in procedure (2).)
3-6. Lower separation pawl replacement 3-7. Thermistor/thermostat removal
1 Remove the fusing unit. 1 Remove the fusing unit.
2 Remove the lower heat roller, after removing the lock panel. 2 Remove the fusing cover, and remove the thermistor/thermostat.

3 Remove three screws and remove the lower separation pawl unit.
* Note for assembly
• Check that the thermistor center is in contact with the heat roller.
• Clean the thermistor surface with alcohol to remove foreign
materials.

4. Optical system
The optical system is an integrated finish product delivered by the
maker as stated in the previous section. The replacement procedures
for the major parts in the optical system are described here.

1) Copy lamp replacement

1 Remove the OR guide, and remove the table glass. (2 screws)
2 Slide the copy lamp unit to the notch at the rear of the upper
cabinet. Push the copy lamp electrode (section A) in the arrow
5 Remove the tension spring, hold the separation pawl tip to remove direction B, and remove the lamp.
it from the supporting section, and remove it by tilting. Do not move the optical adjustment plate. (If it is moved, the light
balance will go wrong.)

Note: Be careful of the installing direction of the copy lamp.

6–6
 2 Remove the operation panel, the upper cabinet R, and the right
cabinet.

(B)

Optical adjustment plate 3 Remove the dark box cover upper.

Install so that the projected portion of the copy lamp is near the rear
side as shown above. 4 Manually move mirror base B. (Within the range where the wire
fixing plate fixing screw can be removed.)

2) Mirror base wire replacement and adjustment
A. Copy lamp unit removal
1 Remove OR guides R/L, and remove the table glass.
5 Remove the wire fixing plate in the front/rear frame side of the
copy lamp unit, and remove the wire from the side plates F/R.
6 Remove the harness from the copy lamp unit.
7 Rotate the copy lamp unit counterclockwise to remove.

6–7
manuals4you.com
B. Mirror base wire removal 3 Rotate the mirror base B counterclockwise to remove.
1 Remove the upper cabinet L, and the left cabinet. 4 Disconnect the connector from the copy lamp unit on the rear
frame side and from the No. 2/3 mirror unit.
5 Rotate the No. 2/3 mirror unit counterclockwise and remove.

1 2

2 Remove the mirror wire spring from the groove on the left side of
the optical base plate.

D. No. 2/3 mirror unit (mirror base B) assembly

Reverse the above procedures.
E. Mirror base wire stretching
Check that the wire groove in the front winding pulley is aligned with
the wire groove in the rear winding pulley.
(If there is too much a shift in the circumference, loosen two pulley
fixing screws, and visually fit the positions and fix.

3 Remove the mirror base wire from the winding pulley.

(Remove he wire fixing screw.)

C. No. 2/3 mirror unit (mirror base B) removal

1 Move the mirror base B to the center between the positioning and
the optical base plate left surface.
2 Lift the front side of mirror base B and separate it from the rail.
(The front side only)

6–8
1 Hook the metal fixture of the mirror base wire on the optical base
plate hook.
2 Pass the mirror base wire along the groove outside the double
pulley.
2
<Note> At the time, put the No. 2/3 mirror unit on the mirror base
positioning plate.
Hold it so that the winding pulley groove is on the upper
side, and wind the wire.
4 Pass it under the L pulley supporting plate and wind it around the 3
fixed pulley.
5 Pass it along the groove inside the double pulley.
6 Pass in through the fixed pulley.
7 Hook the mirror base wire spring on the groove at the left of the
optical base plate.
(Same in the front and the rear side.)

4 5
4
3
6 2 3 Fix the mirror base wire to the pulley with the mirror base wire
1 fixing screw.
5
4 Return the 9th winding tip of the mirror base wire to the original
position. (Perform the same procedure for the front frame side and
the rear frame side.)
4
6 (Note) After replacing the mirror base drive wire, perform the vertical
7 skew adjustment, the focus adjustment, and the horizontal
skew adjustment.

3) No. 2/3 mirror unit (mirror base B) installation

(Mirror base B positioning)
This is to adjust the parallelism of mirror base B and the drum surface
and the original surface.
a
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:

F. Mirror base wire fixing • When the mirror base drive wire is replaced.

1 Manually turn the mirror base drive pulley to bring the mirror base
B into contact with the mirror base positioning plate.
2 Shift the 9th winding tip of the mirror base wire from the pulley
screw hole section.
1
• When mirror base A or mirror base B is replaced.
1 Manually turn the mirror base drive pulley to bring the mirror base
B in contact with the mirror base positioning plate. If the front side
and the rear side of the mirror base B make contact with the
mirror base positioning plate simultaneously, the parallelism of the
mirror base B is proper, and there is no further adjustment.

Mirror base positioning plate

Mirror base B
No.2/3 mirror unit

6–9
manuals4you.com
2 If the parallelism of the mirror base B is improper as shown in the
figure below (one side of the mirror base B is in contact with the
positioning plate and the other side is not in contact), perform the
following procedure.
3 Loosen the mirror base drive pulley fixing screw on the side where
the mirror base B is not in contact with the positioning plate.
4 Manually rotate the mirror base drive pulley on the side where the
mirror base B is not in contact with the positioning plate to bring
the mirror base B into contact with the positioning plate.
5 Tighten the mirror base drive pulley fixing screw.
6 Manually rotate the mirror base drive pulley to separate the mirror
base B from the mirror base positioning plate once, then bring it
into contact with the positioning plate.
Check that the front side and the rear side of the mirror base B
make contact with the positioning plate simultaneously.
7 If the condition of 6 is not satisfied, repeat procedures 3
through 6 until the condition is satisfied.
6 – 10
4) Copy lamp unit installation (Mirror base A
positioning)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
• When the mirror base drive wire is replaced.
• When the mirror base A or B is replaced.
• When any part in the dark box is replaced.
When installing the mirror base, reverse the removal procedure of
(2)-A.
1 Put the mirror base A in the copier. Pass the mirror base drive
wires in the front frame side and the rear frame side through the
clearance between the mirror base A and the mirror base wire
fixing plate. Do not tighten the mirror base A wire fixing screw at
that time.
2 Bring the mirror base B into contact with the positioning plate, put
a flat jig (such as a scale edge) onto the right surface of the optical
base plate (paper feed side), press the projection of the copy lamp
unit onto the jig and fix it with two screws.
(Note) When tightening the copy lamp unit fixing screws, be sure to
press the projection onto the scale.
Horizontal scales
Projections
5) No. 4/5 mirror unit (mirror base C) replacement
A. No. 4/5 mirror removal
1 Remove the OR guide L and R, the remove the table glass.
2 Remove the dark box cover upper. 5 Remove the drive springs 4 and 5.

3 Remove the right cabinet.

6 Remove the zooming rack of the roll holder unit.

4 Remember the positions of the lens drive shaft attachment plate

(in the directions of A and B) (Inscribe a line).

Inscribed
line 7 Remove the lens drive shaft attachment plate.
A

A B

* (IMPORTANT) This is to prevent against defective focusing.

(Measurable with a scale.)

6 – 11
manuals4you.com
8 Remove the drive shafts 4 and 5. 6) Lens wire replacement
A. Lens wire removal
1 Remove the OR guide L and R, and remove the table glass.

* When removing the No. 4/5 mirror unit, remember the positions
(scales) of the arrow marks of the drive holder 4 and 5.
Zooming rack

2 Remove the dark box cover upper.

No.4/5
adjustment
screw
No.4/5 drive latch
stop screw

No.4/5 drive holder

B. No. 4/5 mirror unit assembly

Reverse the above procedures.
<Note>
When attaching the lens drive shaft attachment plate, attach it to
position 5 in the above description.
Fit the arrow positions of the drive holder 4 and 5 as the previous
state. 3 Remove the lens motor.
Zooming rack

No.4/5
adjustment
screw

No.4/5 drive latch

stop screw

No.4/5 drive holder

* When the arrow positions cannot be fit:

1 Loosen the zooming rack screw and slide it to adjust.
2 Loosen the two screws which are fixing the driver holder 4 and 5
and the drive latch 4 and 5. Adjust with the drive holder 4 and 5.
After completion of adjustment, tighten the two screws.

6 – 12
4 Remove drive spring 4 and 5. 7 Remove the drive wire spring and the wire hook from the lens
carriage boss.

L drive pulley

Lens unit

Wire SP Wire hook

5 Remove the E-ring which is fixing the roll holder drive shaft, and
remove the roll holder unit.
8 Remove the L pulley and the L drive pulley from the lens wire.
B. Lens wire stretching
1. This procedure is performed in the following case.
(1) When the lens unit is removed.
(2) When No. 4/5 mirror drive unit is disassembled.
(3) When the copy is out of focus because relative position of the lens
unit and No. 4/5 mirror unit is shifted by moving the lens unit itself
back and forth without turning the L drive pulley.
* In order to move the lens unit of this machine back and forth in
servicing, be sure to turn the L drive pulley. (If the lens unit itself is
moved, the wire may slip at the L drive pulley and the relative
position of the lens unit and No. 4/5 mirror unit is shifted, resulting
in improper focusing.)

L drive pulley

6 Remove the zooming cam and the zooming cam drive gear (which
are fixed with screws).

Lens unit

6 – 13
manuals4you.com
2. Procedures 4 Manually turn the zooming can drive gear to fit the zooming cam
1 Manually move the lens carriage unit to fit the lens carriage hole drive gear hole and No. 4/5 mirror drive unit base hole B.
with the optical unit frame hole (which is not the home position
hole but the reduction side hole). Insert a pin into the holes, fix the Pin
lens unit, and stretch the wire.
Hole Zooming cam
drive gear

No. 4/5 mirror

drive unit base

Lens carriage unit

Hole B

2 Under the above state, fit the zooming cam drive gear hole with
the No. 4/5 drive unit base hole A (by inserting a pin, etc.), and
insert the zooming can drive gear into the shaft.

Zooming cam drive gear

Hole
Zooming cam drive gear

Hole A 5 Install No. 4/5 mirror drive shaft unit and the rack.
* When installing the rack, be sure to fit No. 4/5 mirror unit projection
with No. 4/5 mirror drive shaft unit hole.
Shaft

Hole B

3 Remove the pin which fixes the lens unit and the zooming cam.

6 – 14
6 Loosen the zooming cam screw, and fit the mark of zooming cam 5. High voltage section
drive gear with the mark of No. 4/5 drive shaft.
Clean the MC case, and the TC/SC case every 50K copies. Clean the
screen grid, the charging plate (saw teeth), and the TC/SC wire every
50K copies, and replace them every 100K copies.
Zooming cam
5-1. Main charger (MC) unit
1 Open the front cover.
Zooming 2 Hold the MC unit lock section, and pull out the MC unit.
cam gear

∗Do not move the zooming cam gear at this time.

3 Loosen screws A and B, and remove screen grid E.

(When attaching the screen grid, tighten screw B until the mark-
ing position F of grid holder C in the above figure is aligned with
marking position F of MC holder D, and tighten screw A.)
Mark

* After this procedure, be sure to perform the optical system adjust-

ments (focus adjustment, etc.). (Refer to [7] ADJUSTMENTS.)

E
7) Lens unit replacement
A. Lens removal
1 Remove the lens wire. (Refer to the procedure of "A. Lens wire
removal" in 16) Lens wire replacement.)
2 Hold the lens drive shaft with radio nippers and remove it.

Notch in the optical A

A
base plate.

B F
B

3 Remove the lens drive shaft from the notch in the optical base
plate. The lens unit is removed at that moment.
B. Lens unit installation
Reverse the disassembly procedures. (Refer to (6)-B. Lens wire
stretching.)
6 – 15
manuals4you.com
4 Remove the screw and remove the charging plate (saw teeth) 5-2. Transfer/separation charger (TC/SC) unit
ass’y.
1 Open the font cover, open the body up.
2 Push TC/SC unit pawl sections A (2 positions) and lift the front
side and pull it out.

(Cleaning/replacement and note)

1 When attaching the screen grid, be careful not to deform and dirt
the screen grid. Check that the screen grid is securely in position. (Cleaning/replacement and precautions)
1 Set the charger SP length to 17 ±1.0mm.

2 Be careful not to deform the saw teeth edge of the saw teeth
ass’y.

17 1.0

2 The charger wire must be free from distortion and deformation,

and must be in the wire positioning groove of each holder.
3 The charger case must be free from oil, dirt or adhesion of foreign
material.

3 Do not touch the inside (saw teeth ass’y) of the MC case, the
screen grid, and the saw teeth.
4 To clean the MC saw teeth, push styrene foam onto the saw teeth
at right angles and remove dirt. 3~5mm

4 Clean the wire with alcohol.

6 – 16
5 When installing the unit to the body, check that the grounding
spring is in contact with the TC/SC case (metal section) on the
rear and the front sides. (Visually check, and push the center of
the TC/SC unit to check that it can be moved up and down.)
TCUN
Front Rear
6-2. Waste toner bottle replacement (required when
waste toner full detection/maintenance)
1 Take out the process unit as shown above,
<Note> If the unit is removed by holding the toner transport pipe,
toner is spilled. Avoid this.
2 Remove the bottle cover. (2 screws)

Base plate Rear pawl

Front pawl

6 Transfer mylar lower

TC mylar lower
attachment reference
1.5 0.5
0~0.5

3 Rotate waste toner bearing 1 A 90 degrees counterclockwise.

Hole the base of toner transport pipe B and pull it out. (At this
time, toner may be spilled. Put a sheet under the pipe.

1.0 0.5

6. Process section

6-1. Process unit

1 Open the front cover, remove the developing unit, and open the
clamshell.
2 Remove process cover A. (Loosen the screw and release the
lock pawl to remove.)
3 Loosen two blue screws which are fixing the unit. Remove one
screw, disconnect one connector, and remove unit B. (Do not
hold the toner transport pipe.)
<Note> Remove the developing unit in advance.

B
Lock pawl
Insert a screwdriver to
remove the lock pawl.

6 – 17
manuals4you.com
4 While pushing waste toner bottle in the direction of A and lift it 6-3. Drum (Replace every 60K copies)
and remove.
1 Remove the process unit from the copier. (Refer to 6-1.)
2 Loosen two blue screws which are fixing the drum, rotate the plate
slightly to the right and pull it out.
3 Remove the drum.
<Note> Be careful not to scratch the drum.

(Note for assembly/maintenance)

1 As shown in the figure below, attach so that two projections of
gear 19T g are on the rear frame side (on the screws supporting
plate f side).

6-4. Blank lamp unit (Clean every 60K copies.)

g 1 Remove three blue screws which are fixing the process unit
holder, slide the holder and remove it.
2 Tighten the blank lamp unit position adjustment screw completely,
and remove the unit rear side, then loosen the screw.
f

2 Replace the waste toner bottle when waste toner full is detected
or at 50K maintenance. At this time, clean and remove the waste
toner from waste toner pipe A.

3 Remove two connectors of the blank lamp PWB, and remove the
blank lamp unit.
<Note> When the unit is installed or replaced, adjust according to
"Blank lamp position adjustment" in [7] ADJUSTMENTS.

manuals4you
.com

6 – 18
6-5. Discharge lamp unit (Clean every 60K copies.) 6-6. Cleaner blade (Replace every 60K copies.)
1 Remove three blue screws which are fixing the process unit 1 Remove the holder from the process unit. (3 blue screws)
holder, slide the holder and remove it. 2 Remove the cleaning blade. (3 blue screws)
2 Remove the discharge lamp unit. (one screw, one connector)

6-7. Drum separation pawl (Replace every 60K

copies.)
Slide and remove the blue pin to remove the separation pawl.
Replace the star-shape washer with a new one if it is worn down.

6-8. Process control PWB (Clean the sensor

section every 60K copies.)
1 Remove the holder from the process unit (3 blue screws), and
remove the connector of the process control PWB.
2 Remove the holder of the process control PWB (2 screws), and
remove the PWB (2 screws).

6-9. Drum mark sensor PWB (Clean the sensor

section every 60K copies.)
Remove the holder from the process unit (3 blue screws), and
remove the marking sensor PWB. (1 screw).

6-10. Toner reception seal (Replace every 60K

copies.)
Remove the drum and remove two screws to remove the seal.

6 – 19
manuals4you.com
7. Developing section B. DB blade replacement (Replace every 120K copies.)
1 Remove the old DV blade from the DV cover. (Remove the duplex
A. DV side seals F/R replacement (Replace every 120K tape.)
copies.)
2 Attach the new DV blade with the pasteboard as shown below.
1 Remove two screws which are connecting the hopper section and (Attach the DV blade to the reference of A and the inscribed line
the developing unit, and separate them each other. ( 0.2). Do not allow extrusion from the edge. Do not allow
covering the inscribed line. The allowable reference shift is within
0.5mm from the inscribed line. Attach the sheet without being
wavy.
Fixing screw
Fixing screw Toner hopper DV cover

DV blade

Developing unit

2 Replace the developing unit side seals F/R as shown below.

3 Remove the base pasteboard from the DV blade.
Note: If the pasteboard is not removed, the drum is scratched.
C. V ring attachment
Be careful of the direction of the V ring when attaching it to the MG
roller and the MX roller.

V ring

(Side seal R attachment reference)

V ring
(MG roller)
Section A

Section A V ring

(Side seal F attachment reference) V ring

(MX roller) Section A

Note: Since the developing side seals are in the vicinity of the drum,
be careful of peeling off and defective attachment. 1 As shown above, be careful of the direction of the V ring.
2 Do not allow clearance at section (A) between the V ring and each
roller.
3 Attach the MG roller and the right V ring as shown in the figure.
(3.0+5
−0 )

Magnet fixing shaft φ6.5

MG roller

@ Note: When attaching the MG roller, put the milled surface up.

6 – 20
D. Note for toner hopper drive gear (31T) and stirring 8.Operation panel/intermediate cabinet
shaft attachment
• Be careful of the stirring shafts A and B attachment positions. 1 Open the front cabinet.
2 Remove two screws A, two screws B, and two harnesses con-
Stirring shaft B
nected to the operation panel unit.
2 Remove the operation panel unit.
3 Remove the process cover unit, remove six screws C and two
90 connectors, and remove the intermediate cabinet.

Stirring shaft B A

Attach so that the angle between stirring shaft A and B is 90

degrees.
• When attaching the toner hopper drive gear (31T), be careful of
the E-ring stop position as shown below. (If the E ring is on the A
milled surface, it is apt to disengage.)
C
31T gear

9. Frame major parts

9-1. Cooling fan motor replacement
A. Cooling fan motor removal
1 Remove the original cover, the original guide, the upper cabinet
left, and the upper cabinet right.

6 – 21
manuals4you.com
2 Remove the upper cabinet and the rear cabinet.
<Note> When attaching the cooling fan motor, put the harness sec-
tion B and the CFm duct groove section A in the same
direction, and pass the harness in the groove.
Check that the fan center label is on the back when viewed
from the rear of the machine.
Check that air blows in the arrow direction (toward the
machine).

9-2. Power unit

1 Remove the rear upper and lower cabinets.
2 Remove two connectors, hold the PWB fixing bush with radio
nippers and slide it toward the paper exit side to remove.

3 Remove the cooling fan from the CFM duct. (2 screws, 1 connec-
tor)

9-3. Tray size detecting PWB

1 Remove the rear upper/lower cabinets.
2 Remove the power unit.
3 Remove one fixing screw, one connector, and remove the tray
size detection PWB.

B. Cooling fan motor

Label

Reverse the removal procedures.

6 – 22
9-4. Main PWB unit 2 Remove the ventilation fan motor (2 screws).
1 Remove the rear cabinet upper.
2 Disconnect all the connectors (6 connectors) connected to the
main PWB.
3 Remove the main PWB plate (one screw).
4 Remove the main PWB from the plate. (2 screws)

3 Remove the process unit. Insert a screwdriver from the process

unit position into the copier to push out the oZone filter.

9-5. AC power PWB

1 Remove the main PWB unit. (Refer to 9-3.)
2 Remove the rear cabinet lower.
3 Remove all the connectors (11 connectors) of the AC power PWB
and remove one grounding wire connected between the AC power
PWB and the copier chassis.

4 Remove two screws which are fixing the AC power PWB, and
remove the PWB.

9-6. Ozone filter (Check every 60K copies, and

replace every 300K copies.)
1 Remove the upper cabinet left, and the left cabinet. (5 screws)

6 – 23
manuals4you.com
10. Multi paper feed unit 10-2. Take-up roller/paper feed roller
1 Remove the manual feed arm spring, the bearing stopper, and the
10-1. Separation roller E-ring. (At this time, slide the bearing from the guide section in
advance.)
1 Remove three screws and remove the paper feed/take-up roller
ass’y. 2 Lift the manual feed stopper, and remove the manual feed shaft
ass’y.

3 Remove the take-up roller.

2 Remove the separation roller.

4 Remove three E-rings, and remove the manual feed shaft. then
the paper feed roller will come off.

@ When attaching the roller, engage the D-cut section with the
groove.

(Note for assembly)

The paper feed roller is provided with the one-way clutch, which must
be installed in the proper direction. Attach so that the side where
there is the one-way clutch (specified with "LOCK") is on the front
frame side.

6 – 24
[7] ADJUSTMENTS
1. Developing section

1-1. Developing doctor clearance adjustment

Plate D
a. If the clearance between the developing doctor and the MAG
roller is improper, the following trouble may occur. 0.6 ± 0.03mm
• Insufficient coy density MAG roller

• Background copy
• Toner splash
A A
<Adjustment procedure>
(1) Remove the developing unit from the copier.
(2) Loosen four screws (A) which hold plate D fixed.
(3) Insert two clearance gauges of 0.6mm into the clearance be-
tween plate D and the MAG roller.
<Note> For insertion of the clearance gauges, refer to the
figure below.

(4) With two clearance gauges inserted, gently press plate D and
tighten four screws (A).
(5) Check that the clearances at two points 50 ∼ 80 mm from the 50mm
both ends of the developing doctor are within the specified 30mm
range (0.6 ± 0.03mm).
<Note 1> When inserting the clearance gauges, be careful
Clearance gauges
not to scratch the plate D and the MAG roller. 0.6mm
<Note 2> When adjusting or checking, be careful not to allow 30mm

foreign materials (oil, etc.) to attach to the MAG 50mm

roller sleeve.
(6) After adjustment, apply screw lock to the four screws (A).

1-2. Developing magnet roller main pole position

adjustment
a. If the MAG roller main pole position is improper, the following
troubles may occur.
• Insufficient copy density
Marking
• Toner splash
<Adjustment procedure>
(1) Remove the developing unit from the copier.
(2) Tie a thread to a needle as shown below.
(3) Hold the thread and bring the needle close to the MAG roller.
(4) Mark the contact point of the thread on the MAG roller sleeve
surface.

7–1
manuals4you.com
 (5) Measure the distance from the marking position to the bottom
(A) of the developing unit and check that the distance is
17.6mm. If the distance is not as specified above, loosen the
MG adjustment plate fixing screw, move the adjustment plate
in the arrow directions and perform procedures (3) to (5) again.

17.6mm
A
MG adjustment plate

(6) After completion of adjustment, tighten the MG adjustment

plate fixing screw. When tightening, check that the bias ter- MG adjustment plate fixing screw Bias terminal
minal is as shown below. After tightening the screw, apply
screw lock to it.

MG adjustment plate

2. Optical system

2-1. Adjustment items

1. Lens reference position adjustment
2. No. 4/5 mirror reference position adjustment
3. Vertical copy magnification ratio adjustment
4. Resolution adjustment
5. Horizontal copy magnification ratio adjustment
6. Comparison table of lens values and simulation input values
7. Vertical skew adjustment
8. Horizontal skew adjustment
9. Center shift adjustment
10. Exposure balance adjustment
11. Copy lead edge adjustment

7–2
2-2. Note for adjustments
1. Only the exposure balance adjustment, the blank lamp adjust-
ment, and the copy lead edge adjustment can be performed
individually.
For the other adjustments, follow the flowchart below.

1. Mechanical reference position adjustment (without copying)

A. No. 2/3 mirror unit parallelism adjustment

Vertical skew copy adjustment --- Manual adjustment
B. Check the following preset values according to the lens focus rank.
Lens reference position adjustment --- SIM 48-01
No. 4/5 mirror reference position adjustment --- Manual adjustment

2. Adjustment while
copying

Image distortion
NO Vertical skew copy adjustment
1. Image distortion,
Horizontal skew copy adjustment
center shift check
Center shift:
Lens center shift adjustment

YES

Resolution (focus) adjustment

2. Normal (x 1.00), NO Normal: Adjust with the No. 4/5
zooming (x 2.00) mirror adjustment screw.
resolution (focus)
Zooming: Adjust with the zooming
check
cam.

YES

Copy magnification ratio adjustment

3. Normal copy Vertical copy magnification ratio
magnification ratio NO
adjustment
(vertical, horizontal)
check Horizontal copy magnification
ratio adjustment

YES

Exposure balance adjustment

4. Exposure balance, NO Blank lamp position adjustment
blank lamp position, Copy lead edge adjustment
lead edge variation (Including the void area
check adjustment.)

YES

END

7–3
manuals4you.com
2-3. Adjustment of each section
A. Lens reference position adjustment <Check after adjustment>
In this model, the reference value according to each lens charac- Be sure to check that the magnification ratio cam is at the home
teristics must be entered. With this value, the lens home position is position as shown in the figure below.
determined.
<Procedure>
(1) Execute simulation 48-01
• Perform the following key operation.

C — ë — 0/ — ë— 4 — 8
— PSW — 1 — PSW

"A" is displayed on the third digit of the copy quantity dis-

play, and the previously set value or 50 is displayed on the
second and the first digits.

Numerals B. No. 4/5 mirror reference position adjustment

1 2 3
<Procedure>
(1) Remove the external fittings.
4 5 6

7 8 9

0/ C

• Substitute the "O – L" value (variation in the distance be-

tween the original and the lens) on the lens value label at-
tached to position B shown in the figure below into the follow-
ing formula, and input the obtained value.

B (Lens value label)

(2) Loosen two screws (A) which are fixing the No. 4/5 mirror and
the No. 4/5 mirror drive holder to the No. 4/5 mirror holder.

No.4/5
drive rack
Screw A
50 – {(O – L value) × 5} = Correction reference value

No.4/5 drive holder

51 50 49
No.4/5 mirror holder

Lens

<Example> When the lens value is +1.2;

50 – (1.2 ×5) = 44 (Correction reference value = input
value)

7–4
(3) Check to confirm the lens value specified on the lens value
label.
(4) Insert a screwdriver into hole (P) in the right rear side (paper
feed side) of the optical base plate, and adjust the adjustment
screw. The scale on the zoom base at section Q in the figure
below determines the position of the No. 4/5 mirror cor-
responding to the lens value. P

<Example> When the lens value is +1.2, loosen the adjustment No.4/5 sdjustment
screw and adjust so that the arrow section of the No. screw
No. 4/5 mirror drive (shaded portion)
4/5 mirror drive holder points to the zoom base scale at holder arrow section
Q
+1.2. Zoom One scale = 1mm
Turning the adjustment screw clockwise moves the No. base
4/5 mirror drive holer arrow section in the (–) direction, (-) direction (+) direction

and turning it counterclockwise moves the arrow sec-

tion in the (+) direction.

C. Vertical copy magnification ratio adjustment

Be sure to check that mirror bases A, B and C are in parallel and <Procedure>
that the focus is proper before executing this adjustment. (1) Put a scale on the original table as shown in the figure below.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases.
• When the lens home position sensor (LHPS) is replaced or its
installation position is changed.
• When the lens is replaced.
• When the mirror base is replaced or its installing position is A4 (11" x 8½")
changed. paper
• When the main PWB is replaced.
• When the EEPROM inside the main PWB is replaced. Scale

(2) Make a normal copy (100%) on an A4 (11" ×81⁄2") paper.

(3) Compare the scale image length and the scale length.

(When a 100mm scale is used as the original.)

Original scale
HARDDENCD
STAINLESS
JAPAN
mm
1/2mm
10 20 100 110 120 130 140 150
Shizuoka

HARDDENCD
STAINLESS
Paper feed direction mm
JAPAN

1/2mm
10 20 100 110 120 130 140 150
Shizuoka

Reference Comparison point Copy

110

7–5
manuals4you.com
(4) Calculate the copy magnification ratio. (9) Adjust the copy magnification ratio according to the flowchart
Copy image size shown in (6).
Copy magnification ratio = × 100%
Original size
(10) Make a copy at 50%.
(5) Check that the obtained copy magnification ratio is within the
(11) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
specified range (100 ± 0.8%). If it is within the specified range, range (100 ±0.9%). If it is in the specified range, the vertical
go to procedure (7). If not, execute simulation 48-1.
copy magnification ratio is completed. If not, enter [%] in
• Perform the following key operation. simulation 48-1 as follows:

— • Perform the following key operation.

C ë — 0/ — ë— 4 — 8
— PSW — 1 — PSW C — ë — 0/ — ë— 4 — 8
— PSW — 1 — PSW — % — %
"A" is displayed on the third digit of the copy quantity dis-
play, and the previously set value or 50 is displayed on the
"C" is displayed on the third digit of the copy quantity dis-
second and the first digits. (Refer to "D-1. Lens reference play, and the previously set value or 50 is displayed on the
position adjustment.")
second and the first digits.
(6) Perform the magnification ratio adjustment according to the
flowchart below.
Numerals 1 2 3

4 5 6
The copy
size is shorter YES Enter a value greater
7 8 9
than the original than the set value

0/ C
NO

The copy (12) Adjust the copy magnification ratio according to the flowchart
size is longer YES Enter a value greater shown in (6).
than the original than the set value
D. Resolution adjustment (Focus adjustment)
Normal copy ratio focus adjustment is made with No. 4/5 mirrors.
NO Enlargement/reduction focus adjustment is made with the zooming
cam.
END <Note> After entering a value, press [PSW]
1 Normal copy ratio focus adjustment
(7) Copy the scale at 200%. (1) Check the "O.L value" on the lens value label of the lens unit,
and fit the reference position of No. 4/5 mirror. (Use the No.
(8) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
4/5 mirror adjustment screw for positioning. Loosen screw A at
range (100 ±0.9%). If it is within the specified range, go to
this time.)
procedure (9). If not, enter % key in simulation 48-1 as fol-
lows:
Lens value label
• Perform the following key operation.

C — ë — 0/ — ë— 4 — 8
— PSW — 1 — PSW — %

"B" is displayed on the third digit of the copy quantity dis-

play, and the previously set value of 50 is displayed on the
second and the first digits.

Numerals 1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0/ C

7–6
 No.4/5 mirror adjustment screw (Copy) 4.5 2.8
5.0
Check points 3.2
5.6
6.3
3.6
7.1
4.0
8. 0
9.0

9.1
9.2 9.2

9.2 9.2 9.2

2 Perform the focus adjustment in the enlargement mode

(200%).
(1) Make a copy of the test chart on an A4 or 8 1/2″ × 11″ paper.
(2) Check the resolution at the four corners and the center of the
copy image. If the resolutions are within the specified range,
the adjustment is completed. If not, adjust by shifting the rela-
1scale: 1mm tive position of the zooming can to the drive cam.
(-) (+)
direction direction (3) Turn off/on the power to initialize the lens and No. 4/5 mirror
unit. Check the focus in the enlargement mode again.
Resolution standards (Unit: lines/mm)
Example: In the case of O.L value +1.0, this position is the
reference position. Copy center Corners
Normal (100%) 5.0 4.5
(2) Turn off/on the power to initialize the lens and No. 4/5 mirror Enlargement (200%) 5.0 4.5
unit. Check the focus in the normal ratio.
Reduction (50%) 3.2 2.8
(3) If the focus is improper, perform the focus adjustment of the
normal ratio as follows:
(Copy) 4.5 2.8
(3)-1 Make a copy of the test chart on an A4 or 8 1/2″ × 11″ paper.
5.0
Check points 3.2
(3)-2 Check the resolution at the four corners and the center of the 5.6
copy image. If the resolutions are within the specified range, 6.3
3.6
the adjustment is completed. If not, adjust No. 4/5 mirror 7.1
4.0
adjustment screw. (Loosen screw A at that time.) 8.0
9.0

9.1

(3)-3 If the resolutions are not within the specified range, use the 9.2
9.2 9.2
9.2

9.2

No. 4/5 adjustment screw to adjust. (Loosen screw A at this

time.)

Zooming cam

Zooming
cam gear

Screw A

(4) Turn off/on the power to initialize the lens and No. 4/5 mirror ∗Do not move the zooming cam gear at this time.
unit. Check the focus in the normal ratio again.
Resolution standards (Unit: lines/mm) 3 When the zooming can position is changed in 2, check the
focus in the normal mode again. If the resolutions are out of the
Copy center Corners specified range, perform the focus adjustment in the normal
Normal (100%) 5.0 4.5 mode again.
* Repeat 2 and 3 until the proper focus is obtained in the reduc-
Enlargement (200%) 5.0 4.5
tion mode (50%) and the enlargement mode (200%).
Reduction (50%) 3.2 2.8

7–7
manuals4you.com
E. Horizontal copy magnification ratio adjustment (2) Replace the displayed value with the copy magnification ratio
a. This adjustment is performed to meet the displayed magnifica- correction rate obtained in (1).
tion ratio with the actual one. (Input value) = (Previously set value) / (Copy magnification
ratio correction rate [%]) ×10
b. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
(Example) When the previously set value is 25, the input
• When the main PWB is replaced. values of examples 1 and 2 are as follows:
• When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced. • Example 1: 35 = 25 + (1 × 10)
• When the mirror motor is replaced. • Example 2: 15 = 25 + (–1 × 10)
• When self diag. U2 occurs. Enter the input value and press the print switch. The value
is stored and the ready lamp lights up.
The scanning speed of the mirror base is changed to adjust the
horizontal (paper transport direction) copy magnification ratio.
<Adjustment procedure> Eg1:
(1) Put a scale on the original table as shown in the figure below, Copy A, of
and execute simulation 48-02. The machine starts warming up which length 10 20 90 100 110
and the ready lamp lights up. At the same time, the previously is shorter
set value ( 1 ∼ 99) is displayed. Under this state, make a nor- than original
mal copy and calculate the copy magnification ratio.

Scale
10 20 90 100 110
(Original)

Scale

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 50 100 110 120130 140

Eg2:
Copy B, of
Space which length 10 20 90 100 110
Blank paper
is longer
than original

(3) Cancel simulation 48-02.

Note: Input correction can be made in the range of 1 – 99
(simulation set range).

7–8
F. Comparison table of lens values and simulation input values
Zoom correction Zoom correction Zoom correction Zoom correction
Lens (Enlargement) (Reduction) Lens (Enlargement) (Reduction)
display Sim 48-01 display Sim 48-01
Sim 48-01 — % Sim 48-01 — % — Sim 48-01 — % Sim 48-01 — % —
value value
% %
+4.0 30 70 70 –0.8 54 46 46
+3.9 31 69 69 –0.9 54 46 46
+3.8 31 69 69 –1.0 55 45 45
+3.7 32 68 68 –1.1 55 45 45
+3.6 32 68 68 –1.2 56 44 44
+3.5 33 67 67 –1.3 56 44 44
+3.4 33 67 67 –1.4 57 43 43
+3.3 34 66 66 –1.5 57 43 43
+3.2 34 66 66 –1.6 58 42 42
+3.1 35 65 65 –1.7 58 42 42
+3.0 35 65 65 –1.8 59 41 41
+2.9 36 64 64 –1.9 59 41 41
+2.8 36 64 64 –2.0 60 40 40
+2.7 37 63 63 –2.1 60 40 40
+2.6 37 63 63 –2.2 61 39 39
+2.5 38 62 62 –2.3 61 39 39
+2.4 38 62 62 –2.4 62 38 38
+2.3 39 61 61 –2.5 62 38 38
+2.2 39 61 61 –2.6 63 37 37
+2.1 40 60 60 –2.7 63 37 37
+2.0 40 60 60 –2.8 64 36 36
+1.9 41 59 59 –2.9 64 36 36
+1.8 41 59 59 –3.0 65 35 35
+1.7 42 58 58 –3.1 65 35 35
+1.6 42 58 58 –3.2 66 34 34
+1.5 43 57 57 –3.3 66 34 34
+1.4 43 57 57 –3.4 67 33 33
+1.3 44 56 56 –3.5 67 33 33
+1.2 44 56 56 –3.6 68 32 32
+1.1 45 55 55 –3.7 68 32 32
+1.0 45 55 55 –3.8 69 31 31
+0.9 46 54 54 –3.9 69 31 31
+0.8 46 54 54 –4.0 70 30 30
+0.7 47 53 53
+0.6 47 53 53
+0.5 43 52 52
+0.4 48 52 52
+0.3 49 51 51
+0.2 49 51 51
+0.1 50 50 50
0 50 50 50
–0.1 50 50 50
–0.2 51 49 49
–0.3 51 49 49
–0.4 52 48 48
–0.5 52 48 48
–0.6 53 47 47
–0.7 53 47 47

7–9
manuals4you.com
G. Vertical skew adjustment
a. This adjustment is performed when a skew copy is made as
shown below or when a part of the mirror base drive wire or the
No. 1/2 mirror base is replaced.
(4) Loosen the fixing screw of the rear frame side mirror base
drive pulley.
When La > Lb, rotate the rear frame side mirror base drive
pulley in the arrow direction A. (Do not move the flange and
the mirror base drive pulley shaft.)
When La < Lb, rotate the rear frame side mirror base drive
pulley in the arrow direction B. (Do not move the flange and
the mirror base drive pulley shaft.)

Document Copy

<Adjustment procedure>
(1) Put an A3 (11" ×17") white paper on the original glass neatly to
the glass holding plate and the front frame side as shown
below.

Mirror base
drive pully
(Rotate)

Shaft A
(Do not rotate)

Pulley fixing screw (Set screw)

B

(5) Tighten the fixing screw of the mirror base drive pulley.
(6) Perform procedures (1) ∼ (3).
(7) If La=Lb is not satisfied, perform procedures (4) and (5). (If
La=Lb, the adjustment is completed.)
Repeat procedures (1) ∼ (6) until La=Lb is satisfied.

Glass retaining plate A3-size or 11" x 17" blank paper H. Horizontal skew adjustment
a. This adjustment is performed in the following cases:
Apply paper front end Align paper side edge
to glass retaining plate with front frame
• When a horizontal skew is made.
• When the mirror base drive wire is replaced or its installing
(2) With the original cover open, make a normal (100%) copy on position is changed.
an A3 (11" ×17") white paper. • When the No. 1/2 mirror base is replaced or its installing
(3) Measure the width of the black background at the front side position is changed.
and the rear side.
• When the No. 2/3 mirror base rail is replaced or its installing
position is changed.
Lead edge black background width La
Rear edge black background width Lb

Paper
feed
direction
Document Copy
La Lb

7 – 10
<Adjustment procedure> Adjustment procedure (1)
(1) Make an original for adjustment.
Draw parallel lines at 10cm from the both edges of an A3 or When La>Lb (Lc<Ld): Rotate to increase the height of the front
11" × 17" white paper. (Be careful to draw precisely parallel frame side of the No. 4/5 mirror base unit.
lines.) When La<Lb (Lc>Ld): Rotate to decrease the height of the front
frame side of the No. 4/5 mirror base unit.
Parallel line Parallel line Open the front cabinet, insert a screwdriver
as shown below, and turn the eccentric
10mm 10mm
screw to adjust the height of the No. 4/5
mirror base.

No. 4/5 mirror base

10mm 10mm

Blank paper

(2) Set the adjustment original made in (1) as shown below.

Hole for screwdriver

<Note> When turning the eccentric screw, remember how much it

is rotated from the original position. When the eccentric
screw is turned 36 degrees, the height of the front frame
side of the No. 4/5 mirror base is increased or decreased
by 2mm and the difference (La – Lb) is varied by 4mm.
If the above adjustment is not effective, then follow
the Adjustment procedure (2) .

Glass holding plate Adjustment procedure (2)

Adjustment original
Fit the original edge with the 1 Move the mirror base rail B up and down in the arrow directions
glass holding plate edge to adjust.

(3) Make a normal (100%) copy on an A3 or 11" × 17" white • When La > Lb, shift the mirror base B rail upward by half of
paper. the difference of La – Lb.

(4) Measure the distances at four points as shown below: • When La < Lb, shift the mirror base B rail downward by half of
the difference of La – Lb.
La Lc

Paper
discharge
direction

Mirror base rail handle

Loosen Loosen

Lb Ld

1 scale = 1mm

7 – 11
manuals4you.com
(Example) When La=12mm and Lb=9mm, shift the paper exit side (5) Remove the document reference plate and the right upper side
mirror base B rail upward by 1.5mm. cabinet, and remove the document table glass.
• When Lc > Ld, shift the mirror base B rail downward by half of Document
the difference of Lc – Ld. reference plate

• When Lc < Ld, shift the mirror base B rail upward by half of Document table glass
the difference of Lc – Ld.
(When moving the mirror base rail, hold the mirror base rail handle.)
2 Adjust according to procedure (1) so that La=Lb and Lc=Ld are
satisfied.
3 After completion of the adjustment, turn the mirror base drive
pulley manually to full scan mirror base A and mirror base B,
and check that the mirror bases are not brought into contact
with each other.
(Note) When the mirror bases are moved extremely, they
may be brought into contact. Carefully avoid it.
I. Center shift adjustment
a. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
Right upper side cabinet
• The copy (100%) center is shifted from the original center
(6) Loosen the three fixing screws of the optical system unit and
more than 2mm.
slide the optical system unit to adjust the center position.
• When any part of the lens rail or the lens unit is replaced.
<Adjustment procedure>
(1) Make a test chart for center position adjustment. (Refer to the Original
figure below.) center

(Original)

Draw a line at the center B

Optical system Copy
unit paper
Copy paper center
(A4 or 11" x 8½") Loosen the 2mm
screws
A
or less (Copy 1)
Paper transport direction (3pcs.) Move lens is the A direction

(2) Set the test chart for the center position adjustment to the Lens Copy
document reference line, and make a normal (100%) copy with body paper
an A4 or 11" × 81⁄2" paper. side center
(3) Check that the copied image line is at the center of the copy 2mm (Copy 2)
paper. Lens bearing side
or less Move lens is the B direction

2.0mm or less (7) After adjustment, set the removed parts in the reversed se-
Copy image quence. make a copy of the test chart to check that the center
(Copy A)
shift is within the specified range (0 ±2.0mm). If the center shift
Copy paper
Shift is within the specified range, the adjustment is completed. If
fold
not, repeat procedures (2) – (7) until it is within the specified
range.
2.0mm or less Copy paper
J. Exposure balance adjustment
fold
(Copy B) a. This adjustment is to provide uniform exposure, and must be
Copy image performed in the following cases:
Shift
• When the reflector is replaced.
(Paper feed direction) • When the copy lamp is replaced.
(4) If the error of the copy image line is within the specified range • When the exposure adjustment plate is replaced.
(0±2.0mm), the adjustment is not required. If not, perform the <Adjustment procedure>
following procedures. (1) Set a half tone paper on the original table and make a half
tone copy at 100%.
(2) If the exposure of the half tone copy is uniform, the adjustment
is not required. If it is varied as shown below, perform the
following procedures.
Exposure
insufficient
Paper
discharge
direction

Half-tone copy

7 – 12
(3) Remove the original reference plate and the right upper side (The value displayed before pressing the % key is stored in the
cabinet, and remove the original table glass. memory by pressing the zoom up key.)
(4) Move the exposure plates a, b, c, and d in arrows directions A Display section:
and B to adjust exposure. Moving the plates in the direction of During execution of the simulation, the RRC-A value is displayed
arrow A makes the copy darker, and moving in the direction of on the copy quantity display.
arrow B makes the copy lighter.
Top digit: Displays A, b, C, d.
Lower two digits: Displays RRC-A value, RRC-B value, or void
area value.
A A A
<Adjustment procedure>
(1) Put a scale on the original table.

B B B
Exposure adjustment Exposure adjustment
plate b plate d
Exposure adjustment Exposure adjustment
plate a plate c

(Example) If the half tone copy is as shown below, move the

exposure adjustment plate a in the direction of Scale
arrow B to balance exposure.

Exposure
insufficient
Paper
discharge
direction

Half-tone copy

(5) After adjustment, set the original table glass. Make a copy to
check uniformity of copy density. If the copy exposure is not
uniform, repeat procedures (1) – (5). (2) Press keys as follows:
K. Copy lead edge adjustment C → ë → 0/◊ → ë → 5 →
a. This adjustment is performed to provide the maximum effective 0/◊ → PSW → 1 → PSW
copy size, proper void area, improve separation in the photocon- Simulation 50-01 is executed and the ready lamp lights up.
ductor section, fusing section, and reducing dirt in the fusing The previously set value (1 – 99) is displayed. (RRC-A content)
section pawls.
(3) Set values A and B to zero, and make copies at 100% and
b. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases. 200%.
• When the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) is replaced or • 0/◊ → 0/◊ → % key →
its installing position is changed.
0/◊ → 0/◊ → PSW (A copy at 100% is made.)
• When the mirror base is replaced.
• Enlargement key → (Lens shift, ready) → PSW (A copy at
• When the resist roller and the resist roller clutch are replaced. 200% is made.)
• When the main control PWB is replaced.
• When the ADF is installed or disassembled.
• When the original guides L and R are removed and the glass
is removed.
<Adjustment procedure>
* The copy lead edge adjustment is performed with simulation 50-
01 and 50-02.
When the copy lead edge adjustment is made with simulation 50-
01:
In this simulation, the following keys and the display section have
special functions.
Reduction key: Makes the magnification ratio 50%.
Enlargement key: Makes the magnification ratio 200%.
• % key:
Pressing the % key changes A → b → c → d → A → sequen-
tially, and the set value corresponding to the display is dis-
played on the copy quantity display.
A: RRC-A set value
b: RRC-B set value
C: Lead edge void amount set value
d: Rear edge void amount set value

7 – 13
manuals4you.com
(4) Measure the distance between the copy paper lead edge and (8) Put a scale and an A3 (11" × 17") white paper on the original
the copy image lead edge in each copy. Obtain RRC-A and table as shown below.
RRC-B values from the following formulas.

If the RRC-A preset value is not proper, the lead edge

position varies in each magnification ratio. The RRC-B is to
adjust the RRC ON timing for fitting the drum image lead
edge and the transfer paper lead edge.
L2 L1
Scale

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 50 100 110 12 0130 140

50mm
10 20 30 40 50 60 70
A3(11" x 17") Blank paper
10 20 30

End of scale image End of scale image

(9) Press the zoom key to display "C" in the lowest digit of the
magnification ratio display. (Void amount adjustment mode)
(10) Make a copy and enter the normal copy lead edge void area
adjustment set value so that the black background edge
Full-size(100%) copy Enlarged(200%) copy comes to the scale 1 – 3mm of the copy image scale.
→ → PSW
• La: Led edge shift at 200% (mm)
With the above key operation, a copy is made and the adjust-
• L2: Lead edge shift at 1005 (mm) ment value is inputted. When the adjustment value is changed
• RRC-A = 6.151 × (L1 – L2) by 1, the void area is changed by about 0.13mm. The greater
the adjustment value is, the greater the void amount is.
• RRC-B = 15.385 × L2 – 7.692 × L1
(5) Enter the RRC-A and RRC-B values obtained from the above End void area
formulas with the 10 digit key pad in the same manner as 1~3mm
procedure (3).
(6) Make copies at 200%, 100%, and 50%, and check variations in
the magnification ratios. (About 1.0mm) Scale image
If there is a considerable variation, repeat from procedure (3).
(7) Make a normal copy and check that the lead edge image loss
is within the range of 0 ∼ 4mm. If the image loss is outside the
above range, change the RRC-B value and adjust again until 10 20 30 40 50
the image loss is within the above range.

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Solid edge
Paper end
Full-size(100%) copy

Image loss Full-size(100%) copy

0~4mm

Note: The above image loss range is effective only for

simulation 50-01, and is not the final one.

7 – 14
(11) Make a normal copy and check that the image loss and the [Adjustment procedure]
void amount are within the specified range. (1) Put a scale on the original table.
(Specified range) (2) C → P → 0/◊ → P → 5 →
• Image loss: 0 ∼ 4mm
0/◊ → PSW → 2 → PSW
• Void amount: 1 ∼ 3mm
With the above key operation, simulation 50-02 is performed
and the machine starts warming up.
Void area
0~3mm (3) The lower two digits of L1 value is displayed on the copy
quantity display. The top digit is for data identification.
• L1 : Lead edge shift at 200% (|||mm, 3 digits)
• L2 : Lead edge shift at 100% (✕✕✕mm, 3 digits)
Scale image
Paper end Example of display
• For 42.5mm, the display is 2 5 .
(4) Use the % key and the 10 digit key pad to set A and b values
to zero. Make copies at 100% and 200%.
10 20 30 40 50 • 0/◊ → 0/◊ → 0/◊ → % key → 0/◊
→ 0/◊ → 0/◊ → PSW (A copy at 100% is made.)
• Enlargement key → (Lens shift, ready) → PSW (A copy
at 200% is made.)
(5) Measure the distance between the copy paper lead edge and
the copy image lead edge in each copy. Enter L1 and L2
Solid edge values with the zoom key and the 10 digit key pad. With this
operation, RRC-A and RRC-B values in simulation 50-01 are
Image loss Full-size(100%) copy automatically calculated and stored.
0~4mm Input procedure
(Example)
(12) Press the clear key and cancel simulation 50-01. When L1 = 24.5 mm and L2 = 15.0mm:
Note: When the RRC-A and RRC-B values are changed Check that the lowest digit of the magnification ratio display is
in simulation 50-01, be sure to adjust the copy lead "A," and perform the following key operation.
edge void area. 2 → 4 → 5 ("45" is displayed on the copy quantity display.)
When adjustment is made with simulation 50-02: → % key → 1 → 5 → 0 ("50" is displayed.) → PSW
<Note> The keys and display functions are the same as simulation (6) After this, check shift and image loss, and void amount in each
50-01. In simulation 50-02, L1 and L2 values can be direct- copy similarly to simulation 50-01.
ly set. It is easy and simple. The void area adjustment is
also the same as simulation 50-01.

7 – 15
manuals4you.com
2-4. Copy density adjustment (2) Drum sensitivity setting
(1) Execute Sim. 26-07, and check that the top digit of the 9-digit
A. When the copy density adjustment is required: drum number printed on the flange in front of the drum is dis-
The copy density adjustment must be performed in the following played on the copy quantity display.
cases: (2) If the displayed number is different from the drum number,
• When maintenance is performed. change the setting with the 10 digit key pad.

• When the output current of the main charger and the transfer (Note) When the 10 digit key pad is used to enter a number, the
charger, the separation charger bias voltage, or the grid voltage is display shows only in the range of 1 ∼ 3.
adjusted. (When the charger unit or the high voltage unit is (3) AE sensor level adjustment
replaced.)
(1) Execute Sim. 47.
• When the developing bias is adjusted. (The mirror base starts scanning and stops at the AE sensor
• When any part of the AC PWB unit is replaced. level measurement position.)

• When the AE sensor is replaced. (2) Put several sheets of A3 (11" x 17") paper on the original table.

• When the copy lamp is replaced. (3) Press the PSW again, and the copy lamp will light up and the
sensor output will be displayed on the copy quantity display. This
• When the optical unit is replaced. output level is stored.
• When the optical unit is disassembled, repaired, or adjusted.
• When exposure adjustment plate is moved.
• When the drum is replaced.
• When the main PWB is replaced.

B. Note for copy density adjustment

• The charger output and the developing bias voltage are properly
adjusted in advance.
• The half-tone uniformity is within the limit sample range.
• Sim. 44-01 is set to "7."

C. Copy density adjustment procedure

(1) Set the automatic exposure level to "3."
(When the mode select key is pressed for 5 sec in the photo mode,
the mode is switched to the automatic exposure mode. In this mode,
press the exposure select key to set the exposure level to "3.")

COPY DENSIty
Put several sheets of
AUTO A3 (1" x 17") paper
MANUAL
PHOTO

1 2 3 4 5

LIGHT DARK

7 – 16
(4) Test chart setting (2) Make a copy.
Check that "6" of the test chart is slightly displayed.
(1) Put several sheets of white paper (Sharp specified paper) of
about 120mm wide and about 420mm long to the center refer-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
ence.
(2) Put the test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) as shown below:

Not copied Slightly copied

<When too light> Make the value displayed on the copy quantity
display smaller.
<When too dark> Make the value displayed on the copy quantity
display greater.
* The range of set values is 1 ∼ 99.
* Entry number "1" corresponds to a change of
about 0.33V in the copy lamp voltage.
(3) Make a copy.
UKOG-0162FCZZ When the copy exposure is within the exposure limit sample
range, press the DARK exposure key to set to exposure "5." ("b"
is displayed on the copy quantity display.)

COPY DENSIty

AUTO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W MANUAL
PHOTO

1 2 3 4 5

LIGHT DARK
Test chart comparison table

UKOG-0162FCZZ
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
DENSITY No.
(4) Make a copy.
UKOG-0089CSZZ Check that "2" of the test chart is clearly copied.
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.9 0
DENSITY No.
<When too light> Make the value displayed on the copy quantity
KODAK GRAY
1 2 3 4 19 A display smaller.
SCALE
<When too dark> Make the value displayed on the copy quantity
SHARP CORPORATION display greater.
MODE IN JAPAN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
(5) Manual exposure (ME) mode adjustment
1) Normal mode exposure adjustment
(1) Execute Sim. 46-01.
Exposure "1" in the manual exposure mode is displayed on the
exposure display.
"0" of value A is first displayed on the coy quantity display. After Not copied Copied
sensing the drum mark, the two-digit number corresponding to
the sensed mark number is displayed. 2) Toner save mode adjustment
(1) Press the exposure select key to set to the toner save mode.
The manual mode lamp and the photo mode lamp are simul-
COPY DENSIty taneously lighted and exposure "1" is displayed on the exposure
display section. "C" is displayed on the copy quantity display.
AUTO
MANUAL

PHOTO
COPY DENSIty
1 2 3 4 5
AUTO
MANUAL
LIGHT DARK
PHOTO

1 2 3 4 5

LIGHT DARK

7 – 17
manuals4you.com
(2) Perform the same procedures of (2) through (4) in "1) Normal (4) Make a copy.
mode exposure adjustment." Check that "3" of the test chart is slightly copied.
3) Photo mode exposure adjustment 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
(1) Press the exposure select key to set to the photo mode.
The photo mode lamp is lighted and exposure "1" is displayed
on the exposure display section. "E" is displayed on the copy
quantity display.

Not copied Slightly copied

COPY DENSIty <When too light> Make the value displayed on the copy quantity
display smaller.
AUTO
MANUAL <When too dark> Make the value displayed on the copy quantity
PHOTO display greater.
2) Automatic exposure (toner save mode) adjustment
1 2 3 4 5
(1) Press the exposure select key to set to the automatic exposure
LIGHT DARK
mode (toner save mode).
The automatic exposure mode lamp and the photo mode lamp
are lit and exposure "1" is displayed on the exposure display
section. "1" is displayed on the copy quantity display.

(2) Perform the same procedures of (2) through (4) in "1) Normal
mode exposure adjustment." COPY DENSIty
(6) Automatic exposure mode adjustment
AUTO
1) Automatic exposure (normal mode) adjustment MANUAL
(1) Press the exposure select key to set to the automatic exposure PHOTO
mode (normal mode).
The automatic exposure mode lamp is lit and exposure "1" is 1 2 3 4 5
displayed on the exposure display section. "G" is displayed on
LIGHT DARK
the copy quantity display.

COPY DENSIty
(2) Perform the same procedures of (2) through (4) in "1) Normal
AUTO mode exposure adjustment."
MANUAL

PHOTO

1 2 3 4 5

LIGHT DARK

(2) Check that "0" is displayed on the copy quantity display.

(3) Press the DARK exposure key to set to exposure "5." ("H" is
displayed on the copy quantity display.)

COPY DENSIty

AUTO
MANUAL
PHOTO

1 2 3 4 5

LIGHT DARK

7 – 18
Copy density adjustment
Item Content
Automatic exposure level initial setting 3 (Standard level)
TSM mode initial setting 5 (Standard mode)
AE sensor level adjustment Execution of Sim. 47
Drum sensitivity setting Execution of Sim. 26-07
Test chart setting Test chart comparison table
UKOG-0162FCZZ
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
DENSITY No.
UKOG-0089CSZZ
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.9 0
DENSITY No.
KODAK GRAY
1 2 3 4 19 A
SCALE
SHARP CORPORATION
MADE IN JAPAN
Copy density adjustment
Developing bias output voltage adjustment 200V (Manual exposure 1)
Execution of Sim. 8-01
Manual exposure copy density adjustment Execution of Sim. 46-01
ME1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W

Not copied Slightly copied

ME5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W

Not copied Copied

TSM mode copy density adjustment
TS1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W

Not copied Slightly copied

TS5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W

Not copied Copied

Photo mode copy density adjustment
PE1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W

Not copied Slightly copied

PE5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W

Not copied Copied

7 – 19
manuals4you.com
 Item Content
Automatic exposure copy density adjustment Enter "0" with the 10 digit key pad.
Normal mode
AE1
AE5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W

Not copied Slightly copied

TSM mode Enter "0" with the 10 digit key pad.
AE1 (TS)
AE5 (TS) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W

Not copied Slightly copied

2-5. Process section adjustment B. High voltage output balance adjustment

A. Blank lamp (BL) position adjustment
1 Check that the center shift is within 0.2mm. (If the center shift
exceeds 0.2mm, adjust the center shift.)
2 Set a white original of A3 (11" x 17"), and make a reduction copy
(x 0.64) on an A3 paper (11" x 17") with the original cover open.
3 Measure the black background sizes on both ends, and slide the
blank lamp unit back and forth to adjust so that the size difference
is within 1 mm.
This model employs the one transformer system where the output
power is common to the charging charger (MC) and the transfer
charger (TC). The feedback current from the transfer charger (TC) is
constant-current controlled and outputted for charging.
For the output adjustment of each high voltage, follow the procedures
below.
Transfer charger (TC)
• Output adjustment

A
Main charger (MC)
• Grid voltage

B
Developing (BS)
• Bias voltage
IA-BI 1mm

7 – 20
A. Use of special measurement tools 5 Attach the process unit to the copier. (Attach so that the electrode
sheet lead wire extends from the developing unit side.)
• Tool: UKOGE0043CS01 (Digital multi meter)
6 Clean the transfer charger wire, and attach the transfer/separation
• Electrode sheet (UKOG-0110FCZZ)
charger unit to the copier.
(Do not install the main charger unit.)
UK0G-0110FCZZ

UKOG-0110FCZZ

Adjustment Adjustment F/R Tester

Sim
output range difference range
–41.0
TC current 08-02 7.0 µA DC1000 µA
±4.0 µA 7 Connect the electrode sheet and the digital multi meter (or an
Standard (A) ammeter). Manually turn on the door switch.
–750 ±5V
MC grid Photo (b)
44-11 — DC1000V
voltage –500 ±5V
Green clip
TS (c)

F
Orange
–650 ±5V Orange
DV bias voltage 08-01 –200±5V — DC1000V

R
White
Electrode sheet harness (DHAI-0304FCZZ) Yellow clip (Microswitch)
Black clip White
Orange Copier chassis
Green (Uncoated section)
A (QCLIZ0005FCZZ) Black
Orange Blue Blue
(QCLIZ0006FCZZ)
White Black Black
(QCLIZ0010FCZZ)
White Yellow
(QCLIZ0004FCZZ)
(Microswitch) Red Red Blue Red
(QCLIZ0002FCZZ) 2
(QSW-M0118FCZZ) PHOG-0007FCZZ 20
(DCmA)
2 00
QTIPH0017FCZZ Blue clip
(Wiring of sectionA)
Orange Blue
300KΩ x 2
White Black Digital multi meter Red clip
(VRN-RT2EK304F)
(UKOGE0043FC01)

C. Transfer charger output check (Note) Check that the black clip is firmly grounded to the chassis.
When the UKOGE0043CS01 is used:
1) Transfer charger current adjustment Control 1: Set to "2" of DCmA.
1 Remove the developing unit, the transfer/separation charger unit, Red clip: Connect to ⊕.
and the main charger unit from the copier. Blue clip: Connect to -.
When a DC ammeter is used:
2 Remove the process unit from the copier.
Red clip: Connect to - of the DC ammeter.
When removing (attaching) the process unit from (to) the copier,
Blue clip: Connect to ⊕ of the DC ammeter.
do not hold the toner transport pipe.
8 Transfer charger output current check and adjustment
3 Remove the photoconductor drum from the process unit, and at-
tach the electrode sheet by using rubber ring and tape. a. Turn on the main switch and execute simulation 8-02. (MTHV
is turned on for 30 sec.)
4 Attach the photoconductor drum with the electrode sheet attached
to it to the process unit. b. Adjust VR102 (MTHV output adjustment control) so that the
output current of MTHV is –41 ±4.0 µA.

7 – 21
manuals4you.com
9 Check the drum current in the front frame side and the rear frame 4 Select the standard mode (A) with the magnification ratio display
side. Difference between the front frame side current and the rear key on the operation panel. (The mode is displayed on the copy
frame side current must be within 7.0 uA. quantity display.)
a. Turn on the main switch and execute simulation 8-02. (MTHV Execution of simulation 44-11
is turned on for about 30 sec.) Select the standard mode (A) with the magnification ratio select key.
b. Measure the drum current in the front frame side and in the
(Reference)
rear frame side.
Display Mode
• When the microswitch is OFF: The drum current in the front
A Standard –750 ±5V
frame side is displayed.
b Photo –500 ±5V
• When the microswitch is ON: The drum current in the rear
C TS –650 ±5V
frame side is displayed.
d GB patch –410V → GB is not adjustable.
(OFF) (ON)
5 Use the 10-key pad to adjust so that the measurement value by
N/C N/C the tester in the standard mode (A) is –750 ±5V. (Input value 1
N/O COM N/O COM corresponds to 5V.)
* For the voltage check, enter the value with the 10-key pad and
press the PRINT button to store it, and press the PRINT button
c. Check that the difference between the front frame current and again and measure the voltage with the tester while copying.
the rear frame current is within 7.0 µA. If the difference ex-
ceeds 7.0 µA, the charger unit is abnormal. Replace the 6 Adjust similarly in the photo mode (b), and in the toner save mode
charger unit in that case. (C).

2) Charging grid voltage adjustment Check the GP patch (d) after adjustment of standard (A), photo (b)
and TS (c).
Before this adjustment, check that the photoconductor drum, and
developing unit, and the charger (MC/TC) units are attached. • Grid voltage adjustment
(Measurement and adjustment at the high voltage PWB check point) (Sim 44-11)
1 Remove the rear cabinet. Input value * 1 (Input value 1
Display Mode Grid
(Standard) corresponds
2 Set the digital multi meter range to DCV, and connect to the grid
A Standard –750±5V 48 to 5V.)
voltage output check pin (GB).
b Photo –500±5V 46 2 d (GB) is fixed.
GB C TS –650±5V 46
d GB patch –410V 41
• Grid voltage check
Grid voltage
Sim No. Mode * Drum marking number: 1 * Drum marking number: 2
8-2 Standard –740 –770
8-3 Photo –480 –480
8-4 TS –630 –650
* Drum marking number 1 = SHARP
Drum marking number 2 = Mitsubishi
* This model performs the process correction according to the num-
ber of drum mark(s). With Sim 8, the grid voltage after correction
can be checked.
3) Developing bias (BS) voltage adjustment
The developing bias voltage is measured and adjusted with the check
pin (DV BIAS) on the high voltage PWB and the control knob
(VR301).
In advance to this adjustment, check that the photoconductor drum,
3 Turn on the copier power and execute simulation 44-11. the developing unit, and the charger (MC/TC) units are installed.
1 Remove the rear cover.
2 Set the digital multi meter range to DCV, and connect it to the
developing bias output check pin (DV BIAS).
3 Turn on the copier power, and execute simulation 8-01.
4 During execution of the simulation, check that the developing bias
output monitor voltage is –200 ±5V. If the voltage is outside the
range, adjust with the control knob (VR301).

7 – 22
[8] SIMULATION
1. Outline
This model is equipped with the simulations feature which allows the
following operations with the keys on the operation panel:
1) Adjustments
2) Setting of specifications and functions
3) Resetting trouble codes
4) Checking operations
The set adjustment value or
NO
the counter value is displayed
on the copy quantity display
To change the set adjustment
value or the counter value,
enter a new value with numeric
keys
The entered value is displayed
on the copy quantity display
Press the print key
The new set value is stored
2. Purpose
The purpose of the simulations feature is to improve serviceability in
repairs and adjustments.
Since the mechanical adjustments can be performed electrically, the
above purpose is achieved with low costs.
3. Operating procedure
Simulations operating procedure
Start
Press the clear key
Press the interruption key
Press the zero key
Press the interruption key
All lamps and indicators
on the operation panel go off.
Ready for entry of the main
test command number
Enter the main test command
number with numeric keys
The main simulations
number is displayed on the
copy quantity display
YES
Is there a sub code? Press the print key
NO
Press the print key "00" blinks on the copy
quantity display. Ready for
entry of the sub code.
Enter the sub code with
numeric keys
Press the print key
Is the test
command for operation
check?
YES
Operations according to the
simulations are performed Enter a new main code
The main code is display on
the copy quantity display
YES NO
Do you
perform another YES Is the main NO Is the sub YES
Press the clear key
simulations? code same? code display?
NO
Press the clear key
All the lamps and indicators
on the operation panel go off.
Ready for entry of the main
simulations number
Press the clear key
End
8–1
manuals4you.com
4. List of simulations
Main Sub Main Sub
Content Content
code code code code
01 Mirror scanning 01 Maintenance counter display
02 Optical system sensor check 02 Maintenance preset counter display
1
03 Lens operation check 03 JAM memory display
04 Lens operation aging 04 Total JAM counter display
01 ADF aging 05 Total counter display
22
02 ADF sensor check 06 DV counter display
ADF individual load operation check (Paper feed 07 DV preset counter display
03
motor forward rotation) 08 ADF counter display
ADF individual load operation check (Paper feed 10 Staple counter display
04
motor reverse rotation)
11 Toner concentration correction counter display
2 ADF individual load operation check (Transport
05 15 Trouble memory display
motor forward rotation)
01 JAM memory/total JAM counter clear
ADF individual load operation check (Transport
06 02 Trouble memory clear
motor reverse rotation) 24
ADF individual load operation check (Paper feed 04 ADF counter clear
08
solenoid) 05 Staple counter clear
ADF individual load operation check (Paper feed 01 Drive system check
10 25
motor normal rotation + paper feed solenoid) 02 Automatic developer adjustment
02 Sorter sensor check 05 Counter mode setting
Sorter individual load operation check (Transport 06 Destination setting
03
motor)
07 Drum sensitivity setting
04 Sorter individual load operation check (Bin motor)
3 26 10 AE document density setting
05 Sorter individual load operation check (Buzzer)
13 Warm-up mode setting
Sorter individual load operation check (Alignment
06 18 Toner save mode setting
motor) (SF-S54 only)
20 Rear edge void setting
Sorter individual load operation check (Pinch
07 29 AC power voltage setting
hold motor) (SF-S54 only)
01 Operation panel display check 30 01 Copier sensor check (paper sense)
02 Heater lamp check 42 — Developer counter (counter clear)
5 03 Copy lamp check 43 01 Fusing temperature setting
04 DL lighting check 01 Process control operation setting
05 BL lighting check 05 Grid voltage correction test
6 01 PSPS operation check 06 Grid voltage correction compulsive execution
01 Warm-up time display and aging 07 Image density/drum mark sensor operation test
04 Warm-up omitting 44 08 Process control data display
7
06 Intermittent aging 09 Process control data display (Latest value)
08 Warm-up time display Grid voltage correction (Drum surface/patch)
10
data display
01 Developing bias output
11 Initial grid bias setting
02 Main/transfer charger output/grid check (ME)
8 12 Copy operation check with process control OFF
03 Main/transfer charger output/grid check (PE)
46 01 Exposure adjustment
04 Main/transfer charger output/grid check (T/S)
AE sensor characteristics measurement (AE
07 Separation charger output 47 —
sensor gain automatic adjustment)
10 — Toner motor aging
01 Front/rear magnification ratio adjustment
14 — Trouble cancel (Excluding U2 trouble) 48 Paper transport direction magnification ratio
15 — Waste toner full (blinking) cancel 02
adjustment (Mirror speed correction)
16 — U2 trouble cancel 01 Copy lead edge adjustment
50
20 — Maintenance counter clear 02 Lead edge adjustment (Simple type)
21 01 Maintenance cycle setting 51 02 Resist amount adjustment
ADF stop position adjustment value (normal
01
paper) setting
53
04 ADF resist sensor, width sensor adjustment
06 ADF timing sensor adjustment
54 03 Take-out buzzer setting

8–2
5. Details of simulations
Simulation input procedure: C → ë → 0 → ë

Main code Sub code Content

01 01 Mirror operation check

When the print button is pressed, the mirror is scanned at a speed corresponding to the currently set copy
magnification ratio.
The copy magnification ratio can be arbitrarily set.
02 Optical system sensors (MHPS, LHPS) state display
ON/OFF state of the optical system sensor can be monitored by the LED on the operation panel.

Sensor name Operation panel LED

MHPS Paper empty lamp (ç)
LHPS JAM lamp (ê)

03 Lens operation check

The lens unit moves to the following positions of the magnification ratios continuously.
AB series: 100% → 115% → 122% → 141% → 200% → 86% → 81% → 70% → 50% → 100%
Inch series: 100% → 121% → 129% → 141% → 200% → 95% → 77% → 64% → 50% → 100%

04 Lens aging
The operation of SIM 1-3 is repeated continuously.

02 01 ADF aging
The ADF original transport operation is performed.
02 ADF sensors states display
The ADF sensors ON/OFF states can be monitored with the LED on the operation panel.
When the third digit of the multi display is “0” the following display is made.

Sensor name Operation panel LED

Original set sensor JAM lamp (ê)
Resist sensor Paper empty sensor (ç)
Timing sensor Drum position jam lamp (▼)
Repulsion sensor Resist position jam lamp (▼)
ADF open/close sensor ADF position jam lamp (▼)
Paper feed cover sensor Paper exit position jam lamp (▼)

If, at that time, the magnification ratio display key is pressed, the third digit of the multi display is changed to “1”
and the following display is made.

Sensor name Operation panel LED

Tray width sensor (297mm, 11")
Tray width sensor (257mm)
Tray width sensor (210mm, 8.5")
Tray width sensor (182mm)
Tray vertical sensor (240mm)
Tray vertical sensor (300mm)
Original width size sensor
First step paper size lamp
Second step paper size lamp
Third step paper size lamp
Fourth step paper size lamp
Resist position jam lamp (▼)
Paper exit position jam lamp (▼)
Manual feed selection lamp

03 ADF individual load operation check (paper feed motor forward rotation)
04 ADF individual load operation check (paper feed motor reverse rotation)

05 ADF individual load operation check (transport motor forward rotation)

06 ADF individual load operation check (transport motor reverse rotation)

08 ADF individual load operation check (Paper feed solenoid)

10 ADF individual load operation check (paper feed motor + paper feed solenoid)

8–3
manuals4you.com
Main code Sub code Content

03 02 Sorer sensor state display

The ADF sensor ON/OFF states can be monitored with the LED on the operation panel.
When the third digit of the multi display is “0” the following display is made.

Sensor name Operation panel LED

Entrance sensor Jam lamp (ê)
Tray paper presence/empty sensor Paper empty sensor (ç)
Upper limit sensor Manual feed selection lamp
Lower limit sensor Resist position jam lamp (▼)
Bin home position sensor Drum position jam lamp (▼)
Take-out sensor Paper exit jam lamp (▼)
Alignment bar home sensor ADF section jam lamp (▼) SF-S54 only

If, at that time, the magnification ratio display key is pressed, the third digit of the multi display is changed to “1”
and the following display is made.

Sensor name Operation panel LED

Pinch (hold) home sensor Jam lamp (ê) SF-S54 only
Stapler home sensor Paper exit position jam lamp (▼) SF-S54 only
Stapler paper sensor Paper empty jam lamp (ç) SF-S54 only
Stapler near end sensor Resist position jam lamp (▼) SF-S54 only

03 Sorter individual load operation check (Transport motor)

04 Sorter individual load operation check (Bin motor)

05 Sorter individual load operation check (Buzzer)

06 Sorter individual load operation check (Alignment motor)

07 Sorter individual load operation check (Pinch hold motor)

05 01 Operation panel display check

All the LED’s on the operation panel are lighted for 5 sec.
When the automatic original feed unit is installed, the original feed lamp and the original remaining lamp are also
lighted for 5 sec.

02 Heater lamp lighting check

The heater lamp is turned on/off in the following sequence.

PR

HL

0.5s 0.5s 0.5s

03 Copy lamp lighting check

The copy lamp is turned on/off in the following sequence.

PR

CL

0.5s 1s 5s

Full power ON Data ON (Can be set by the exposure key arbitrarily

04 DL lamp lighting check

The discharge lamp is lighted for 30 sec.
05 BL lamp lighting check
The blank lamp is turned on/off every 0.5 sec.

8–4
Main code Sub code Content

06 01 PSPS operation check

The separation pawl is turned on/off 30 times in the following sequence.

PSPS

0.5s 0.5s

07 01 Warm-up time display and aging

After execution of the simulation, warm-up is started, and the swarm-up time is displayed every second on the
copy quantity display. When warm-up is completed (RPL ON), count adding of the display is stopped.
Press the CA key to clear warm-up time display, set the copy quantity and press the PRINT button to make the set
number of copies repeatedly.

04 Warm-up omitting
After completion of the simulation, the machine goes to the ready state. (RPL ON)
06 Intermittent aging
After execution of the simulation, the machine starts warm-up. After completion of warm-up, press the CA key to
clear warm-up time display, set the copy quantity and press the PRINT button to make the set number of copies
repeatedly.
After the interval time (2 min) from completion of making the set number of copies, the machine resumes copying.
08 Warm-up time display
Aging function is deleted from SIM 7-1.

08 01 DVBIAS check
The developing bias is turned on for 30 sec.
02 MTHV (main, transfer), grid check (ME)
The main/transfer charger is turned on for 30 sec.
For the grid bias, the ME value is outputted.

03 MTHV (main, transfer), grid check (PE)

The main/transfer charger is turned on for 30 sec.
For the grid bias, the PE value is outputted.
04 MTHV (main, transfer), grid check (T/S)
The main/transfer charger is turned on for 30 sec.
For the grid bias, the T/S value is outputted.

07 SHV (separation) check

The separation charger is turned on for 30 sec.

10 — Toner motor aging

The toner motor is turned on.

14 — Cancel of troubles (except for U2)

Troubles (except for U2) are canceled and the simulation is also canceled automatically.

15 — Cancel of waste toner full (è blinks)

The waste toner full indication (è blinks) is canceled, and the simulation is also canceled automatically.

16 — U2 trouble cancel
U2 trouble is canceled, and the simulation is automatically canceled.

20 (Note) Maintenance counter clear

The maintenance counter is cleared and the maintenance counter value is displayed on the copy quantity display.
(“000” is displayed because the counter value is cleared.)
(Note) Cleared by entering the sub code “01.”

8–5
manuals4you.com
Main code Sub code Content

21 01 Maintenance cycle setting

Used to set the lighting cycle of the maintenance lamp (è).
When this simulation is executed, the currently set maintenance cycle is displayed on the copy quantity display.
After setting the number, press the print button to memory the value.

Set value Maintenance cycle

0 60,000 sheets ← Initial value
1 30,000 sheets
2 10,000 sheets
3 5,000 sheets
4 2,500 sheets
5 Free (Not lighted.)

22 01 Maintenance counter display

The maintenance counter value is displayed on the copy quantity display.

02 Maintenance preset counter display

The maintenance cycle set with SIM 21-1 is displayed on the copy quantity display.
03 Jam memory display
The cause (position) of the jam occurred in copying is displayed.
When this simulation is executed, the jam cause (jam position) is displayed on the jam cause display. By pressing
the magnification ratio key, the history of jam causes can be checked sequentially.
04 Total jam counter display
The total number of jams occurred in copying is displayed on the copy quantity display.

05 Total counter display

The total counter value is displayed on the copy quantity display.
06 Developer counter display
The counter value of the developer which is installed is displayed on the copy quantity display.

07 Developer preset counter display

The developer replacement cycle (mini maintenance cycle for Japan) of the developer which is installed is
displayed on the copy quantity display.

08 ADF counter display

The number of originals transported by the ADF is displayed on the copy quantity display.
10 Staple counter display
The number of stapling is displayed on the copy quantity display.

15 Trouble memory display

“A” is displayed on the third digit of the copy quantity display, and the latest trouble code (main code) is displayed
on the second and the third digit.
When the PRINT button is pressed at that time, the sub code of the corresponding trouble is displayed during the
PRINT button is being pressed.
When the magnification ratio key is pressed while the main code is displayed, the previous trouble is displayed.
Maximum 20 recent troubles are stored.

24 01 Jam memory/total jam counter clear

The cause (position) of a jam which occurred during copying and the jam total counter are cleared, and the jam
total counter value is displayed on the copy quantity display. (“000” is displayed because the counter is cleared.)

02 Trouble memory clear

The main code and the sub code of a trouble is cleared.
(“000” is displayed because the memory is cleared.)
04 ADF counter clear
Used to clear the ADF counter and to display the ADF counter value on the copy quantity display.
(“000” is cleared because the counter is cleared.)

05 Staple counter clear

Used to clear the staple counter and to display the staple counter value on the copy quantity display.
(“000” is displayed because the counter is cleared.)

8–6
Main code Sub code Content

25 01 Drive system check

Used to turn on the main motor, the developing bias, and the discharge lamp for 3 min.
The input value of the toner density is displayed on the second digit of the copy quantity display during the main
motor is rotating.

Copy quantity display

Color of developer
Third digit Second, first digit
A 1 ∼ 99 Black

02 Automatic developer adjustment

Same as SIM 25-1. The average value of toner density sensor inputs is stored as the toner density adjustment
value after 3 min from starting the main motor rotation.
The display on the copy quantity display is same as SIM 25-1.

26 05 Count mode setting

Used to set the count mode of the total counter, the developer counter (mini maintenance counter for Japan), and
the maintenance counter in A3/WLT copy.
When this simulation is executed, the currently set count mode is displayed on the copy quantity display.
Enter the set value and press the PRINT button to store it.

Set value Total/Developer counter Maintenance count

0 Double count Double count ← Initial value
1 Single count Double count
2 Double count Single count
3 Single count Single count

06 Destination setting
Used to set the destination (Japan, SEC, etc.).
When this simulation is executed, the currently set destination is displayed on the copy quantity display.
Enter the set value and press the PRINT button to store it.

Set value Destination

0 Japan
1 SEC
2 SECL
3 SEEG
4 SUK
5 SCA
6 EX inch series
7 EX AB series
8 EX inch series (FC)
9 EX AB series (FC)
10 Taiwan/China

07 Drum sensitivity setting

Used to set the drum sensitivity.
When this simulation is executed, the currently set drum sensitivity is displayed on the copy quantity display.
Enter the set value and press the PRINT button to store it.
Set value Drum sensitivity
1 1
2 2 ← Initial value
3 3

8–7
manuals4you.com
Main code Sub code Content

26 10 AE original density setting

Used to set the original density.
When this simulation is executed, the currently set original density is displayed on the copy quantity display.
Enter the set value and press the PRINT button to store it.

Set value Original density

0 Normal ← Initial value
1 Thin original

When a dark original is copied in the AE mode, the lead edge (about 4mm) is not copied. If it is necessary to copy
the lead edge, set this simulation to “1.”

13 Warm-up mode setting

Used to set the main motor operation mode during warm-up.
When this simulation is executed, the currently set warm-up mode is displayed on the copy quantity display.
Enter the set value and press the PRINT button to store it.

Set value Warm-up mode

0 Normal mode ← Initial value
1 The main motor rotates until warm-up is completed.

18 Toner save mode setting (Japan/SUK only)

Used to set ON/OFF of the toner save mode.
When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed on the copy quantity display.
Enter the set value and press the PRINT button to store it.

Set value Toner save mode

0 ON ← Initial value
1 OFF

20 Rear edge void setting

Used to set YES/NO of the paper rear edge void.
When this simulation is executed, the currently set rear edge void mode is displayed on the copy quantity display.
Enter the set value and press the PRINT button to store it.

Set value Rear edge void

0 Yes ← Initial value
1 No

29 AC power voltage setting

Used to set the AC power voltage to 100V or 200V.
(For compliance with the CE mark)

Set value Power voltage

0 100V series ← Initial value
1 200V series

8–8
Main code Sub code Content

30 01 Paper sensor state display

Used to monitor the ON/OFF state of the sensors in the main body with the LED on the operation panel.

Sensor name Operation panel LED

PID Manual feed tray selection lamp
PPD Drum position jam lamp (▼)
DPPD1 Resist position jam lamp (▼)
POD Paper exit position jam lamp (▼)
PED1 Body upper step tray selection lamp (▼)

42 (Note) Developer counter clear

Used to clear the currently installed developing unit counter and to display the developer counter value on the
copy quantity display.
(“000” is displayed because the counter is cleared.)
(Note) The counter is cleared by entering the sub code “01.”

43 01 Fusing temperature setting

Used to set the fusing control temperature.
When this simulation is executed, the currently set fusing temperature is displayed on the copy quantity display.
The set value is changed by pressing the magnification ratio display key.
Select the fusing temperature and press the PRINT button to store it.
The setting range is 160 ∼ 205°C (in the increment of 5°C).

44 01 Process control operation setting

Used to set valid/invalid of the grid voltage correction, optical dirt correction, and drum membrane decrease
correction.
When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed on the copy quantity display.
To make each correction mode valid, enter the sum of the codes of the correction modes, and press the PRINT
button to store it.

Code Correction mode

+1 Grid voltage correction
+2 Optical dirt correction
+4 Drum membrane decrease correction

The initial value is “7.” (All corrections are valid.)

The grid voltage correction is always valid regardless of set value. (Even if it is set to “0,” the grid voltage
correction is not canceled.)

8–9
manuals4you.com
Main code Sub code Content

44 05 Grid voltage correction operation test

Used to perform the grid voltage correction and to display the measure data on the copy quantity display.
When this simulation is executed, the grid voltage correction is automatically performed. The image density
sensor is read when -30V, 0V, and +30V are applied to the latest patch forming grid voltage.
After completion of the operation, the measure data are displayed on the copy quantity display.
Since there are two or more display items, the third digit is used to make distinction between the light reception
level and the original judgment level, and the lower two digits are used to display the data.
The display is selected by the magnification ratio key.
Copy quantity display
Display data (Image density sensor A/D input value)
3rd digit 2nd, 1st digits
A Measured Drum surface data (patch forming grid voltage) –30V is applied.
b data Drum surface data (patch forming grid voltage) is applied.
C Drum surface data (patch forming grid voltage) is applied.
d Patch data (patch forming grid voltage) -30V is applied.
E Patch data (patch forming grid voltage) is applied.
F Patch data (patch forming grid voltage) +30V is applied.
The data displayed by the lower two digits are A/D input values of the original sensor, and is expressed in
decimal. (Display range: 0 ∼ 99)
The patch forming grid voltage after execution of this simulation can be checked with SIM 44-9.
06 Grid voltage correction compulsory execution
The grid voltage correction is forcibly executed during the simulation.
When the operation is completed, the patch forming grid voltage after grid voltage correction is displayed on the
copy quantity display. The relationship between the display value and the patch forming grid voltage value is as
shown below.
Display value Patch forming grid voltage
8 200 V Display range: 8 ∼ 99
50 410 V When the display is
changed by 1, the
99 655 V voltage is changed by 5V.

The drum surface data and the patch data after execution of this simulation can be checked with SIM 44-10.
(Note) When this simulation is executed, the patch forming grid voltage is stored, and the grid voltage amount may
be changed from the patch forming grid voltage before and after execution.

07 Image density sensor, drum mark sensor operation test

Used to read the light reception level for the light emitting amount of the image density sensor and the drum mark
sensor and to display on the copy quantity display.
When this simulation is executed, the light emitting levels of the image density sensor and the drum mark sensor
are changed in 5 steps and each light reception level is read.
After completion of operation, the measured data are displayed on the copy quantity display.
Since there are two or more display items, the third digit is used to make distinction between the light reception
level and the original judgment level, and the lower two digits are used to display the data.
The display is selected by the magnification ratio key.
Copy quantity display
Display data
3rd digit 2nd, 1st digits
A Measured Image density sensor input value, when light emitting 1V
b data Image density sensor input value, when light emitting 2V
C Image density sensor input value, when light emitting 3V
d Image density sensor input value, when light emitting 4V
E Image density sensor input value, when light emitting 5V
F Judgement Drum mark sensor level, when light emitting 1V
G data Drum mark sensor level, when light emitting 2V
H Drum mark sensor level, when light emitting 3V
I Drum mark sensor level, when light emitting 4V
J Drum mark sensor level, when light emitting 5V
The data displayed with the lower two digits:
“A” ∼ “E”: Image density sensor A/D input value. Converted into a decimal number and displayed. (Display range:
0 ∼ 99)
“F” ∼ “J”: Drum mark sensor level is displayed with 0 and 1.
“0”: Drum mark sensor sensing impossible
“1”: Drum mark sensor sensing possible

8 – 10
Main code Sub code Content

44 08 Grid voltage correction, optical dirt correction, drum membrane decrease correction data display
Used to display each correction data of the grid voltage correction, the optical dirt correction, and the drum
membrane decrease correction on the copy quantity display.
Since there are two or more display items, the third digit is used to make distinction between the light reception
level and the original judgment level, and the lower two digits are used to display the data.
The display is selected by the magnification ratio key.

Copy quantity display

Display data
3rd digit 2nd, 1st digits
A 8 ∼ 99 Patch forming grid voltage (initial value)
Gird voltage when the display value is 50 = 410V
When the display value is decreased by 1, the grid voltage is decreased
by 5V.
When the display value is increased by 1, the grid voltage is increased by
5V.
b 1 ∼ 99 Normal mode grid voltage (initial value)
Display value × 10V is the grid voltage output.
C 0 ∼ 99 Optical dirt correction reference value
The AE sensor input value measured after execution of SIM 46-1.
(Converted into a decimal number and displayed.)
d 0 ∼ 99 Drum rotating time (accumulated value)
When the display value is increased by 1, it corresponds to one hour.
E 0 ∼ 99 DV unit (black) rotating time (accumulated value)
When the display value is increased by 1, it corresponds to one hour.

09 Grid voltage correction, optical dirt correction, drum membrane decrease correction data display (the newest value)
Used to display each correction data of the grid voltage correction, the optical dirt correction, and the drum
membrane decrease correction on the copy quantity display.
Since there are two or more display items, the third digit is used to make distinction between the light reception
level and the original judgment level, and the lower two digits are used to display the data.
The display is selected by the magnification ratio key.

Copy quantity display

3rd digit 2nd, 1st digits
A 8 ∼ 99
b 1 ∼ 99
C 0 ∼ 10
d 0 ∼ 20
E 0
31 ∼ 35
Display data
Patch forming grid voltage (latest value)
Gird voltage when the display value is 50 = 410V
When the display value is decreased by 1, the grid voltage is
decreased by 5V.
When the display value is increased by 1, the grid voltage is
increased by 5V.
Normal mode grid voltage (latest value)
Display value × 10V is the grid voltage output.
Optical dirt correction reference value
Display value × 0.7V = Copy lamp voltage correction value
Drum membrane decease correction value
Drum membrane decease correction value when normal mode exp. 1
Trouble data display when the grid voltage correction is performed.
0 - ---- ---- No trouble
31 ∼ 35 --- Trouble (The sub code is displayed.)

8 – 11
manuals4you.com
Main code Sub code Content

44 10 Drum voltage correction drum surface data, patch data display

Used to display the drum surface data and the patch data after execution of the grid voltage after simulation 44-5,
6 or during normal operation is displayed on the copy quantity display.
Since there are two or more display items, the third digit is used to make distinction between the light reception
level and the original judgment level, and the lower two digits are used to display the data.
The display is selected by the magnification ratio key.

Copy quantity display Display data

3rd digit 2nd, 1st digits (Image density sensor A/D input value)
A Measured Drum surface data (patch forming grid voltage) –30V is applied.
b data Drum surface data (patch forming grid voltage) is applied.
C Drum surface data (patch forming grid voltage) is applied.
d Patch data (patch forming grid voltage) –30V is applied.
E Patch data (patch forming grid voltage) is applied.
F Patch data (patch forming grid voltage) +30V is applied.

The data displayed by the lower two digits are A/D input values of the original sensor, and is expressed in
decimal.
11 Initial grid bias setting
Used to set the initial grid bias in the normal mode, the photo mode, the toner save mode, and the patch
measurement mode.
When this simulation is executed, war-up is started and the currently set normal mode initial grid bias is displayed
on the copy quantity display.
Since there are two or more display items, the third digit is used to make distinction between the light reception
level and the original judgment level, and the lower two digits are used to display the data.
The display is selected by the magnification ratio key.

Copy quantity display

Display data
3rd digit 2nd, 1st digits
A 1 ∼ 99 Initial grid bias data (normal mode)
Set the grid voltage to 750V.
When the grid voltage is decreased by 1, the voltage is decreased by
5V. When the grid voltage is increased by 1, the voltage is increased
by 5V.
b Initial grid bias data (Photo mode)
Set the grid voltage to 750V.
When the grid voltage is decreased by 1, the voltage is decreased by
5V. When the grid voltage is increased by 1, the voltage is increased
by 5V.
C Initial grid bias data (Toner save mode)
Set the grid voltage to 750V.
When the grid voltage is decreased by 1, the voltage is decreased by
5V. When the grid voltage is increased by 1, the voltage is increased
by 5V.
d 41 Initial grid bias data (Patch measurement mode)
Display value “41” : Set to 410V.
Setting cannot be changed.

Enter the set value and press the PRINT button to store the value and start copying. After completion of setting,
press the CA key to cancel the adjustment mode.

12 Copying without grid bias correction

Used to make copying without grid bias correction and drum mark check.
When this simulation is executed, warm-up is started and “A 1” is displayed on the copy quantity display (for
identification of execution of this simulation.)
During warm-up, drum mark check is not performed.
After completion of warm-up, press the PRINT button to start copying.
After starting copying, the grid bias correction is not performed.
The number of multi copy cannot be set. (Single copy only)
After checking the operation, press the CA key to cancel the mode.
(Note) This simulation is used to judge whether the F2 trouble is caused by the grid bias correction or by the
process or the high voltage section trouble.

8 – 12
Main code Sub code Content

46 01 Exposure level adjustment

Used to set the copy density (copy lamp output voltage) in each exposure mode.
When this simulation is executed, warm-up is started and the currently set manual (ME) upper limit value is
displayed on the copy quantity display.
When warm-up is completed, the ready lamp lights up. When the PRINT button is pressed, copying is performed
in the currently set exposure mode.
Since there are two or more display items, the third digit is used to make distinction between the light reception
level and the original judgment level, and the lower two digits are used to display the data.
The display is selected by the magnification ratio key, the exposure key, or the density select key.

Copy quantity display Exposure section

Display data
3rd digit 2nd, 1st digits display

A 1 ∼ 99 ME exp. 1 Manual (ME) upper limit value

b ME exp. 5 Manual (ME) lower limit value
C ME + PE exp. 1 Manual (ME) toner save upper limit value
d ME + PE exp. 5 Manual (ME) toner save lower limit value
E PE exp. 1 Photo (PE) upper limit value
F PE exp. 5 Photo (PE) lower limit value
G AE exp. 1 Auto (AE) slant
H AE exp. 5 Auto (AE) lower limit value
I AE + PE exp. 1 Auto (AE) toner save slant
J AE + PE exp. 5 Auto (AE) toner save lower limit

The setting range is 1 ∼ 99. The greater the set value is, the brighter the copy density is.
After completion of setting, press the CA key to cancel the adjustment mode.
(Note) Auto (AE) slant and auto (AE) toner save slant must be set to 0.

47 — AE sensor characteristics measurement

Used to read the E sensor input value when the copy lamp is lighted at the specified voltage and to set the AE
sensor gain.
When this simulation is executed, the mirror base is initialized and fed to the measurement position. After
completion of feeding, the previously measured AE sensor input value is displayed on the copy quantity display
and the ready lamp is lighted.
Press the PRINT button, and the copy lamp is lighted at the specified voltage interval. The AE sensor input value
at that time is read and stored. After completion of reading, the copy lamp is turned off and the measured AE
sensor is displayed on the copy quantity display.
At that time, the AE sensor gain is automatically adjusted.
(Note) Place 4 or 5 white sheets on the table glass during execution of this simulation.

48 01 Front/rear direction magnification ratio adjustment

Used to set the vertical (front/rear direction) copy magnification ratio.
When this simulation is executed, warm-up is started and the currently set normal correction value is displayed on
the copy quantity display.
Since there are two or more display items, the third digit is used to make distinction between the light reception
level and the original judgment level, and the lower two digits are used to display the data.
The display is selected by the magnification ratio key.

Copy quantity display

Display data
3rd digit 2nd, 1st digits
A 1 ∼ 99 Normal correction value
b Zooming correction value (reduction)
10 ∼ 90
C Zooming correction value (enlargement)

The setting range is:

normal correction range; 1 ∼ 99 (initial value: 50)
zooming correction value; 10 ∼ 90 (initial value: 50)
After completion of setting, press the CA key to cancel the adjustment mode.

8 – 13
manuals4you.com
Main code Sub code Content

48 02 Paper transport direction magnification ratio adjustment

Used to set the horizontal (paper transport direction) magnification ratio.
When this simulation is executed, warm-up is started and the currently set mirror speed correction value is
displayed on the copy quantity display.
When warm-up is completed, the ready lamp is lighted. Press the PRINT button to start copying.
After completion of setting, press the CA key to cancel the adjustment mode.

50 01 Lead edge image position adjustment

Used to set the lead edge image position (RRC ON timing), the lead edge void position (blank lamp ON timing),
and the rear edge void position (grid output timing).
When this simulation is executed, warm-up is started and the currently set resist adjustment A is displayed on the
copy quantity display.
Since there are two or more display items, the third digit is used to make distinction between the light reception
level and the original judgment level, and the lower two digits are used to display the data.
The display is selected by the magnification ratio key.

Copy quantity display

Display data
3rd digit 2nd, 1st digits
A 1 ∼ 99 Resist adjustment A
b Resist adjustment B
C Lead edge void adjustment
d Rear edge void adjustment

Set range: 1 ∼ 99
After completion of setting, press the CA key to cancel the adjustment mode.
(Lead edge adjustment procedure)
1 Set resist adjustment A and B to 0. Make 100% and 200% copy.
2 Measure the distance between the paper lead edge and the image lead edge in each copy mode.
3 Enter the measured value in the following formula to obtain resist adjustment A and B.
200% lead edge shift : L1
100% lead edge shift : L2
(Resist adjustment A) = 6.151 × (L1 – L2)
(Resist adjustment B) = (15.385 × L2) – (7.692 × L1)
4 Set the obtained values.
02 Lead edge image position adjustment (measurement value substitution formula)
Used to set the lead edge image position and the lead edge void position similarly with SIM 50-1.
This simulation allows to directly enter the measured values L1 and L2 for setting of the lead edge image position.

Copy quantity display

Display data
3rd digit 2nd, 1st digit
A 1 ∼ 99 L1
b L2
C Lead edge void adjustment
d Rear edge void adjustment

(Example)
When L1 = 24.5mm, enter 2 4 5 .
After entering, the copy quantity display shows “A45.”
Note for entering L1 and L2 values
• The significant digits of L1 and L2 are 3 digits. (Only lower two digits are displayed. The top digit is not
displayed.)
• Enter L1 and L2 to one decimal place. (If the first decimal place is 0, enter 0 at the end.)
• If four digits is entered for L1 or L2, the last three digits are effective. If only two digits is entered, the lowest
digit (1st digit) of the previous input is used as the top digit (3rd digit) of this time.
(Example) If the previous input is 245, and the current input is 24, the stored value is 524.
• Only when the PRINT button is pressed after setting L1 and L2, resist adjustment A and B in SIM 50-1 are
calculated and revised (stored). Pressing the magnification ratio key or the CA key cannot revise the resist
adjustment A and B.

8 – 14
Main code Sub code Content

51 02 Resist amount adjustment

Used to set the warp amount of paper in the resist section.
When this simulation is executed, warm-up is started and the currently set tray resist amount is displayed on the
copy quantity display.
After completion of warm-up, the ready lamp is lighted. Press the PRINT button to start copying.
Since there are two or more display items, the third digit is used to make distinction between the light reception
level and the original judgment level, and the lower two digits are used to display the data.
The display is selected by the magnification ratio key.

Copy quantity display

Display data
3rd digit 2nd, 1st digits
A 1 ∼ 99 Tray resist amount ← Initial set value: 45
b Manual feed resist amount ← Initial set value: 50

The details of the adjustment are as follows.

This adjustment is used to set the time (resist amount) from the paper transport sensor (PPD) ON to paper feed
operation OFF. The set range is 1 ∼ 99.
Set value × 1 msec + 70 msec = Resist amount
• A ... Cassette (Initial set value 40)
• B ... Manual feed
For WLT, A3, LG, B4, foolscap, LTR, or A4R, however, +15 is added to the simulation set value by the software.
(Example) When the simulation set value is 40, +15 is added to 40 by the software and the actual value is 55.

53 01 ADF (single) stop position setting

Used to set the original stop position in ADF (single) transport.
When this simulation is executed, the currently set stop position data is displayed on the copy quantity display.
Enter the set value and press the PRINT button to store it.
Setting range: 0 ∼ 15
04 ADF resist sensor adjustment
Used to adjust the ADF resist sensor original judgement level.
When this simulation is executed, the resist sensor original judgement level is adjusted. After completion of
adjustment, the original judgement level is displayed on the copy quantity display.
Display range: 0 ∼ FFh (hexadecimal)
06 ADF timing sensor adjustment
When this simulation is executed, the paper exit reverse sensor original judgement level is adjusted. After
completion of this adjustment, the original judgement level is displayed on the copy quantity display.
Display range: 0 ∼ FFh (hexadecimal)

54 03 Sorter buzzer setting

Used to adjust the sound volume of the sorter removal buzzer and the staple warning buzzer.
(When the SF-S54 is installed)

Set value Buzzer setting

0 Volume Large ← Initial setting
1 Volume Middle
2 Volume Small
3 OFF

(When the SF-S17N is installed)

Set value Buzzer setting

0 ON ← Initial setting
3 OFF

8 – 15
manuals4you.com
6. User simulation
This simulation allows to change and set the following setting which has been set when shipping from the factory.

(1) Functions which can be set and canceled by the user simulation
Function name Function and setting content Factory setting
• After completion of copying, when a certain time is passed, the machine returns to the initial state
Auto clear automatically. The time to return to the initial state is set in the range of 30 - 120 sec in increment of 60 sec
30 sec. This function can be cleared.
• When the copier is left without copying with the power ON, the power consumption is automatically
lowered to 60Wh. The time to start this function is set in the range of 1 min - 120 min.
• When this function operates, the pre-heat lamp on the operation panel is lighted.
Pre-heat To return to the initial state: Cancel
Press any key on the operation panel. (If the COPY button is pressed, the machine returns to the
initial state and performs copying.)
If also the original is set or the tray is pulled out, the machine returns to the initial state.
• When the copier is left without copying with the power ON, the power consumption is automatically
lowered to 10Wh. The time to start this function is set in the range of 5 min - 120 min.
Auto power shut off • When this function operates, al the lamps on the operation panel except for the pre-heat lamp are 30 min
turned off.
To return to the initial state:
Press the COPY button. The machine returns to the initial state.
• This function learns the use conditions of the copier to automatically control the time to start the
pre-heat function and the auto power shut off function to the optimum level. This function can be
Auto pre-heat control activated or inactivated. Setting
• When this function is activated, the time settings in the pre-heat function and the auto power shut off
function are ignored.
• When the copier is left without copying for a certain period, this function is used to enable or disable
Auto shut OFF Cancel
the function of lowering the power consumption.
Auto document • By use of the auto document feeder (option), originals of different sizes are fed manually.
feeding unit manual • When this function is activated, set an original during the original feed lamp blinks after completion of Cancel
document feed mode copying of the previous original, and the original is fed automatically.

Sorter take-out mode

• When the sorter (option) is installed, the interval between bins can be extended to facilitate to take
Setting
out the copy by pressing the copy take-out key.

* Note: The value of power consumption in pre-heat or in auto power shut off may vary according to the use conditions.

(2) User simulation

Paper jam/Maintenance/
Copy Copy
Mini maintenance/
Simulation procedure State quantity button
Paper supply/Toner supply/
display LED
Warning LED
1. Press the tray selection User simulation input is allowed.
Blink OFF
key for 5 sec or more.
2. Enter the simulation code Selection of simulation code No.
Blink 1 ON
No. with the10-key pad.
3. Press the COPY button. Determination of simulation code
Blink 1 1 ON

4. Enter the selection code Selection of simulation code menu

Blink 1 2 ON
No. with the 10-key pad.
5. Press the COPY button. Determination of simulation code menu 1 2
Blink OFF

6. Press the tray selection Escape from user simulation. Returns to

key. • When this key is pressed during selection of user the copy
OFF —
simulation, the mode returns to 1 (User simulation is quantity
allowed.). display.
* Press the clear key. (Use this key in case of erroneous input)
• After setting the program, when this key is pressed, the Blink OFF
next program input is allowed.
( : Blink)

8 – 16
(3) User simulation code table
Sim. Selection code:
Program Factory setting
code Set content
Auto clear passing time setting [0]: Cancel
[1]: 30 sec
[1] [2]: 60 sec 2
[3]: 90 sec
[4]: 120 sec
Pre-heat mode setting and passing time [0]: Cancel
setting [1]: 1 min
[2] [2]: 15 min 0
[3]: 60 min
[4]: 120 min
Auto power shut off mode setting and passing [1]: 5min
time setting [2]: 15 min
[3]: 30 min
[3] 3
[4]: 60 min
[5]: 120 min
[6]: 240 min
Auto pre-heat control mode setting and cancel [0]: Cancel
[4] 1
[1]: Setting
Auto document feeder manual document feed [0]: Cancel
[5] 0
mode setting [1]: Setting
Sorter take-out mode [0]: Cancel
[7] 1
[1]: Setting
Auto power shut OFF setting [0]: Cancel
[20] 0
[1]: Setting

(4) Department counter setting content (Set with user program P10 ∼ P15)
Function name Setting content Factory setting
P10 Department counter The department counter is set or canceled.
Cancel
setting/cancel
P11 Department No. registration The department number is registered. Up to 20 departments can be
No setting
registered.
P12 Department No. change The registered department number is changed. No change allowed.
P13 Department No. delete The registered department numbers are deleted.
No delete allowed.
One department number or all the department numbers can be deleted.
P14 Copy quantity display (Total) The copy quantity of each department is displayed.
No display allowed.
The count is made up to 50,000. After that, the count starts from 0 again.
P15 Copy quantity delete (Total delete) The counted copy quantity is deleted.
No display allowed. (*)
One department or all the department can be deleted.
(*): Because of no registration of department No. at all.

8 – 17
manuals4you.com
[9] SELF DIAGNOSTICS

1. Summary/purpose
This model has the self diag function for the following purposes:
1) When a trouble occurs in the machine, the machine detects the
trouble and displays the trouble content on the copy quantity dis-
play to alert the customer and the serviceman.
2) When any abnormality is detected, the power supply line is cut off
immediately for safety and to protect the machine from damage.

2. Operation
The self diag content is displayed in the following procedure.

A trouble occurs

The abnormality is detected

by sensors and detectors

The main trouble code is

displayed on the copy
quantity display

Is there YES
Press the print key
sub code?

NO

The sub trouble code

is displayed on the copy
quantity display

Check the trouble position

(Use the suitable simulation)

Repair

Turn off/on the power or

cancel the self diag with
simulation 14 or 16

3. Clearing the self diag display

After repairing the trouble section, clear the self diag display accord-
ing to the table below:
Clearing the self diag display

Self diag display Display clearing procedure

L1, L3, L4, L5, Turn off/on the power.
L8, U5, F1, F2,
EE, P
H2, H3, H4 Execute simulation 14.
U2 Execute simulation 16.
When the trouble is cancelled, the display is
CH, PC
cleared.

9–1
Trouble code Sub code Content Condition
L1 00 Mirror feed trouble • When initializing, MHPS is not turned off within 1.5 sec from
starting feeding of the mirror.
• When copying, MHPS is not turned off within 0.5 sec from
starting feeding of the mirror.
• When feeding the mirror is started during copying, the
mirror is not at the home position (MHPS is turned off).
L3 00 Mirror return trouble • When initializing, MHPS is not turned on within 2.5 sec from
starting returning of the mirror.
• When copying, MHPS is not turned on within 2 sec from
starting returning of the mirror.
L4 01 Main motor trouble • During rotation of the main motor, MMRE (encoder) pulse is
not sensed for more than 0.05 sec.
L5 02 Lens trouble • The lens shift operation is not completed within 10 sec from
starting.
• When the lens is moving to the home position (normal
position), LHPS is not sensed even though the lens is
shifted by the specified steps.
L8 01 Zero cross pulse (FW) trouble • The zero cross pulse width is shifted more than 10%.
03 AE sensor trouble • When the AE sensor characteristics measurement
(simulation 47) is executed, the AE sensor input does not
change.
H2 00 Fusing thermistor open detection • The thermistor (TH) input value exceeds 4.07V.
H3 00 Fusing high temperature trouble • The fusing temperature is sensed as abnormally high as
240 degrees C (thermistor input value 0.38V or less).
H4 00 Fusing low temperature trouble • When warming up, the ready temperature is not reached
within 90 sec.
• When controlling the temperature after completion of warm
up, the fusing temperature (set temperature) is sensed as
–40°C or less.
U2 01 Backup memory trouble • The counter addition value and the check sum value are
different from each other.
04 Backup IC (EEPROM) access error • Data read/write to the backup IC (EEPROM) cannot be
performed.
U5 00 ADF communication error • An error occurred in communication of the ADF and the
main unit.
01 Resist sensor, resist width sensor • When executing the resist sensor and the resist width
adjustment trouble sensor adjustment (simulation 53-4), the adjustment value
is outside the specified range.
02 Paper exit/reverse sensor adjustment • When executing the paper exit/reverse sensor adjustment
trouble (simulation 53-5), the adjustment value is outside the
specified range.
05 Timing sensor adjustment trouble • When the timing sensor adjustment (SIM 53-6) is executed,
the adjustment value is outside the adjustment range.
11 Paper feed motor trouble • During rotation of the paper feed motor, the rotation pulse is
not sensed for 0.1 sec or more.
16 ADF fan motor • The ADF fan motor lock signal is sensed continuously for 2
sec.
F1 00 Sorter communication error • An error occurred in communication between the sorter and
the main unit.
02 Transport motor trouble • During rotation of the transport motor, the rotation pulse is
not sensed for 0.5 sec or more.
04 Bin upper limit/lower limit trouble • When shifting the bins, the upper limit or the lower limit is
erroneously sensed.
05 Bin home sensor trouble • When initializing the bins, the bin home sensor is not
sensed within 1 sec.
06 Bin motor trouble • During rotation of the bin motor, the rotation pulse is not
sensed for 0.5 sec or more.
14 Take-out sensor trouble • When the take-out sensor A/D input value is 3V or more.
16 Grasping motor trouble • During rotation of the grasping motor, the rotation pulse is
not sensed for 0.05 sec.

9–2
manuals4you.com
Trouble code Sub code Content Condition
F2 31 Image density sensor trouble • When the light emitting quantity of the image density
sensor is increased to the maximum level, the input value
does not reach 3.75V.
• When the light emitting quantity of the image density
sensor is decreased to the minimum level, the input value
does not fall below 4.5V.
• During execution of the grid voltage correction, the element
level is 3V or lower.
32 Drum mark sensor trouble • During one and a quarter rotations of the drum, the drum
mark is not sensed (the sensor input does not become
HIGH).
• The drum mark sensor input level is not in the specified
range.
33 Grid voltage correction trouble (Limit • When obtaining the grid voltage correction value, the result
over) of the patch voltage is not in the range of 200 ∼ 650V.
35 Grid voltage correction trouble • When obtaining the grid voltage correction value, the patch
voltage is not in the range of 200 ∼ 650V.
• The grid voltage correction cannot be performed properly.
(The correction value cannot be obtained.)
37 Drum mark sensor gain adjustment • Though the drum mark sensor light emitting quantity is
trouble increased to 1.45V, the sensor input level does not become
LOW.
EE EU Auto developer adjustment under • After completion of the auto developer adjustment
toner detection (simulation 25-2), the toner density sensor input voltage is
over the specified range. (Under toner)
EL Auto developer adjustment over • After completion of the auto developer adjustment
toner detection (simulation 25-2), the toner density sensor input voltage is
under the specified range. (Over toner)

9–3
[10] SERVICING AT MEMORY TROUBLE AND MAIN CONTROL PWB RE-
PLACEMENT
1. General
The EEPROM in the control PWB and the EEPROM are storing
various set values, adjustment values, and counter values.
These data are very important and used for operating the machine
properly and for service control.
In the following cases, therefore, various set values, adjustment
values and counter values must be set again.
* When a memory trouble (U2) occurs.
* When the EEPROM in the main control PWB is replaced.
* When the main control PWB is replaced.
When "U2" trouble occurs, the data cannot be relied upon, and they
must be set properly.
2. Purpose
The purpose is to reset the memory data to operate the machine
properly.
Use the attached service memory data recording sheet to memorize
the newest data when servicing in order to cope with the above
situations. This improves efficiency in servicing and realizes quick
recovery.
3. Remedies
Perform the procedures according to the following flowcharts.
"Sim" in the flowchart means "Simulation."

Memory trouble
Procedures for memory trouble, main control PWB replacement,
and main control PWB EEPROM replacement

"U2" trouble
occurs

NO Do you replace
Repair the
the main control
defective section
PWB?

YES

Replace the main

control PWB

Cancel "U2" trouble

with simulation 16

Replace the
Replace the main
EEPROM in the
control PWB
main control PWB

Is the
NO Mount the EEPROM of
EEPROM in
the main control the old main control to Replace the EEPROM
PWB defective? the new main control

YES

End

Replace the main

control PWB

10 – 1
manuals4you.com
 1
Is the toner
density reference value
recorded?
YES
Use Sim 43-01 to set the
fusing temperature
Use Sim 22-07 to set the
developer replacement cycle
counter to the specified value
Use Sim 22-06 to set the
developer counter
Use Sim 21-01 to set the
maintenance cycle to the
specified value
Use Sim 26-06 to set the
desitination specifications
Use Sim 26-13 to set the
operation mode in warm-up
Is the copy
density adjustment
value recorded?
YES
Use Sim 47 to set the AE
sensor gain is auto-matically
adj
Use Sim 46-01 to set the copy
density adjustment value
Is the vertical
copy magnification
ratio adjustment value
recorded?
YES
Use Sim 48-01 to the
vertical copy magnification
ratio adjustment value
Is the
horizontal copy magnification
ratio adjustment value
recorded?
YES
Use Sim 48-02 to set the
horizontal copy magnification
ratio adjustment value
NO Use Sim 25-2 to set the
Is the adjustment Make a copy and adjust the
toner density reference value value of contact pressur NO contact pressure between
between the main body resist
roller and the copy paper the main body resist roller
and the copy paper
recorded?
YES
Use Sim 51-02 to set the adjustment
value of contact pressure between
the main body resist roller and the
copy paper
*1) For setting, refer to the service
memory data recoding sheet Are the image
lead edge position Make a copy and adjust the
adjustment value and NO
image lead edge position and the
the resist roller ON resist roller ON timing
timing adjustment value
recorded?
YES
Use Sim 50-01,50-02 to set the image
lead edge position adjustment value and
the resist roller ON timing adjustment
value
Is the void NO Make a copy and adjust the
amount adjustmant
void amount
Make a copy and value recorded?
NO
adjust the copy
density
YES
Use Sim 50-02 to set the void amount
adjustment value
Make a copy and
NO End
adjust the vertical
magnification ratio
NO Make a copy and
adjust the horizontal
copy magnification ratio
.com
manuals4you
10 – 2
4. Set value recording sheet
Contents
Purpose/kind Section
Main code Sub code Set value Description
51 02 Adjustment value of contact pressure of the paper on the main
Paper feed section
body resist roller
50 01 Copy paper lead edge void amount adjustment
(Resist adjustment A)
Copy paper lead edge void amount adjustment
(Resist adjustment B)
Copy paper lead edge void amount adjustment
(Lead edge void adjustment )
Copy paper lead edge void amount adjustment
(Rear edge void adjustment)
46 01 Adjustment value of copy density (exposure level) in each copy
mode and of copy density gradient (exposure gradient)
Manual copy mode density level 1
Adjustment Manual copy mode density level 5
Optical unit
Manual copy mode density level 1 (Toner save mode)
Manual copy mode density level 5 (Toner save mode)
Auto copy mode density level 1 (Not toner save mode)
Auto copy mode density level 5 (Not toner save mode)
Auto copy mode density level 1 (Toner save mode)
Auto copy mode density level 5 (Toner save mode)
Photo copy mode density level 1 (Not toner save mode)
Photo copy mode density level 5 (Not toner save mode)
47 The AE sensor and the optical section characteristics memory
data for the change in the copy lamp application voltage
48 01 The vertical copy magnification ratio adjustment value
02 The horizontal copy magnification ratio adjustment value (when
the document table is used)
Developing unit 25 02 Toner density initial set value
Specifications 26 06 Destination specifications
26 13 Setting of the main motor operation mode in warming up
Setting Fuser unit
43 01 The set value of fusing temperature
Maintenance counter 21 01 Setting of the maintenance cycle
22 06 The developer count of the installed developer unit can be
checked.
Counter Developing unit
07 The developer replacement cycle of the installed developer unit
can be checked.
Memorize set values in the column of "Set value" for efficient servicing when the memory trouble occurs and the EEPROM is replaced.
Make a copy of this sheet and use with the service sheet.

10 – 3
manuals4you.com
5. Memory simulation list
Contents
Purpose/kind Section Main Sub Default Ref. page
Description
code code value
Paper feed 51 02 50 Adjustment value of contact pressure of the paper on the main 8-12
section body resist roller
50 01 Copy paper lead edge void amount adjustment 8-11
(Resist adjustment A)
Copy paper lead edge void amount adjustment
(Resist adjustment B)
Copy paper lead edge void amount adjustment
(Lead edge void adjustment )
Copy paper lead edge void amount adjustment
(Rear edge void adjustment)
46 01 Adjustment value of copy density (exposure level) in each copy 8-10
mode and of copy density gradient (exposure gradient)
Manual copy mode density level 1 (Not toner save mode)
Adjustment Manual copy mode density level 5 (Not toner save mode)
Optical unit
Manual copy mode density level 1 (Toner save mode)
Manual copy mode density level 5 (Toner save mode)
Auto copy mode density level 1 (Not toner save mode)
Auto copy mode density level 5 (Not toner save mode)
Auto copy mode density level 1 (Toner save mode)
Auto copy mode density level 5 (Toner save mode)
Photo copy mode density level 1 (Not toner save mode)
Photo copy mode density level 5 (Not toner save mode)
47 The AE sensor and the optical section characteristics memory data 8-11
for the change in the copy lamp application voltage
48 01 50 The vertical copy magnification ratio adjustment value 8-11
02 50 The horizontal copy magnification ratio adjustment value (when the 8-11
document table is used)
Developer unit 25 02 Toner density initial set value 8-5
Setting Specifications 26 06 Specifications setting by destination 8-6
Code No. Destination
0 Japan
1 U.S.A.
2 Canada
3 Europe except U.K.
4 U.K.
5 Australia
6 Inch series outside Japan
7 AB series outside Japan

Fuser unit 26 13 0 Setting of the main motor operation mode in warming up. 8-6

Code Operation
Operation
No. mode
Normal When the fusing temperature reaches
0
mode the specified level, the main motor stops.
Long The main motor keeps rotating until the
1
mode completion of the warming up.

43 01 185°C Fusing temperature set value 8-7

Maintenance 21 01 Maintenance cycle setting 8-5
counter 02 Mini maintenance cycle setting 8-5
Developer unit 22 06 Used to confirm the developer counter value of the installed 8-5
developer unit.
07 Used to confirm the developer replacement cycle of the installed 8-5
developer unit.

10 – 4
[11] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance cycle and maintenance items
Maintenance of this model should be performed at every 60K.
<Content> ★ = Lubricate, F = Clean, v = Adjust, b = Replace/attach, ê = Shift position
✕ = Check (Clean, replace, or adjust if necessary.)
* The toner consumption and the waste toner bottle replacement cycle are those when the reference chart is used.

Section Parts 60K 120K 180K 240K 300K Remark

Developer b b b b b
Developing DV blade F b F b F
DV side seal (F/R) F b F b F
Drum b b b b b
Cleaner blade b b b b b
Toner reception seal b b b b b
Drum separation pawl b b b b b
Charging plate (saw teeth) F b F b F
MC case F F F F F
Process peripheral Screen grid F b F b F
Discharge lamp F F F F F
Blank lamp F F F F F
Drum mark sensor F F F F F
Drum density sensor F F F F F
Waste toner bottle F F F F F
TC/SC case F F F F F
TC/SC wire F b F b F
Suction Suction belt F F F F F
Ozone filter Ozone filter ✕ F ✕ F b
Upper heat roller ✕ b ✕ b ✕
Lower heat roller ✕ b ✕ b ✕
Fusing Upper separation pawl F b F b F
Lower separation pawl ✕ b ✕ b ✕
Thermistor F F F F F
Heat roller gear ★ b ★ b ★
Mirror/lens/reflector F F F F F
Drive wire/pulley ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Optical Rails ✕ ★ ✕ ★ ✕
Table glass/OC cover F F F F F
Dust-proof glass/Sensor F F F F F
Pick-up roller F (✕) F (✕) F (✕) b F (✕)
Paper feed
(including multi paper Paper feed roller F (✕) F (✕) F (✕) b F (✕)
feed section) Do not use alcohol. Wipe
Separation roller F (✕) F (✕) F (✕) b F (✕)
with water.
PC roller pair F F F F F
Transport roller pair F F F F F
Transport
Transport paper guides F F F F F
Transport system sensors F F F F F
At 300K
Main motor F F F F b
maintenance, replace
Drive
Gears
★ ★ ★ ★ ★
(specified gears only)
Image v v v v v

11 – 1
manuals4you.com
 LM

VD2 GND
VFM
O M M PODPWB OP PWB
C KOUGAKU TH
M H
S PWB R P
W O C T P E S
LR F F S M ORS PWB
MIRM D P M ADF SOTER
ES M S
D VB1 GND
VB1
VCL BL PWB
VHM GND VB1 VB1 GND VB1 VD1 GND VD1 GND GND
VB1 GND GND VB1 VD1 GND
VD1 VD1 GND DMS
1. System block diagram

DL

PROCON
VCL
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION

VHM
DV VH1
VB1
GND VB1
VD1
VD2 GND
VD2
GND
VB1 GND V UN CSD PWB
VH1
GND
M uN VB1
PID PWB

12 – 1
MAIN PWB
TM SFM

RRC VB1
VB1 GND

KT PWB

PPD1
CP
PWB FC1 TRC

VH1
VB1:24V
MAIN VCL:8V
VB1 GND VD2:5V
VH1 VD2 DC PWB VD1:5V
VC GND
FW

MOTOR SUB
CSD
PWB2 PWB2 DC PWB

POWER HL
TRANSE
AC PWB CL
CPFC2 DH
DPPD2 CM PWB
PWB CSM2 MS2
System operation when the power is turned on:

Power ON

Initial setting

Memory transfer

No
Trouble

No
JAM

Warm up Heater lampp ON

Mirror initial operation
Lens initial operation
End of
warm up
Racing

Process contorol
Toner density control
End of racing

RPL ON

PSW ON

RPL OFF

Copy cycle

End of copying

12 – 2
manuals4you.com
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

2.Main circuit
(1) Block diagram

DMS BL
D DC PWB RTH MM AE PROCON PWB LM CFMPWM D

PCG

FW
PDA
MCS
MCG

RTH
MM
VREF
BL-DATA
FET1
PR PR CFMPWM TM0,TM1 TMa,TMb
PR Q5 IC20 OFF
IC14 IC21 IC17 IC2 LM-A,/LM-A IC5 TM
Q8 LM-B,/LM-B
13
16
TC 15
TRC

H3
14
IC9 PR-OFF Q2
RRC

AES
MPFC 10 ULN2004

MCS
VREF
PSPS
IC15

BL-DATA

FWS, RTH
16

PROCON
CPFC1

PCG MCG
AEG0,AEG1

AEG0, AEG1
DL 15
15

MMPWM
SFM 14 VFMPWM VFM

DATA0
13 IC19
C MHPS,LHPS IC10 C
ULN2004 AEG0,AEG1
TC,TRC,RRC,PR,MPFC MHPS
LHPS
11 PSPS,CPFC1,DL,SFM,DC-OFF
VMF2
OP-CLK OP-CLK
SRES ICA1 IC10
IC18
OP-CLK
OP
A-RES,S-RES ICA2~4
SEL OP-LATCH,OP-DATA,PFMCLK IC3 PWB
S-DTR
ADF A-TXD A-TXD IC12 /RESET
TXD,DTR
SORTER S-TXD S-TXD KI0,KI1,KI2,KI3

/CS2
IC18

AD0-1
A-RXD IC11 RXD
S-RXD TD82504

12 – 3
TFD,MMRE
A-DSR IC3 TFD, MMRE

A0-A2
D0-D7
S-DSR

/RESET
DATA1

RXD
DATA1,DATA2,S0,S1,S2 SINPUT
IC21 S0
S2
A0-A16
SELA
/RESET SELB
B D0-D7 IC13 SELC B
12 5 DVBIAS /RD SELA,SELB,SELC
11 ULN2004 6 THV/MHV
ROM /CS1
CPU
IC9
DVBIAS OP-LATCH
THV/MHV IC20
5 SHV
SHV 12
10
IC19 7 MIR-A,/MIR-A,MIR-B,/MIR-B
GBPWM GBPWM IC1 MIR
ULN2004

SCL
EEPROM SDA
2
13
11 SELA
IC15 10 SELB
MPS
14 LS151 9 SELC
5 DATA0 DATA3 PPD IC18 5 PPD
IC23
11
10

3
15
ADFD ADFD,SORTD
SORTD

GND +5V1 +5V2 +VCL +24V +VH

A A

DC PWB

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(2) CPU (IC6) SC3041K12F
1 General
The CPU controls the loads of the main body and controls the system
in synchronization with data transmission and reception through the
optional controllers and serial data communication line.

2 Features
The SC3041K12F is a high performance single-chip micro computer
which is integrated with the necessary peripheral devices as well as
the main core of 32-bit H8/300H CPU.
The 32-bit H8/300H CPU is of internal 32-bit composition, and is
provided with simple and optimum commands designed for high
speed operations with 16 bit x 16 general-purpose registers. It hand-
les 16MB linear address space.
As the peripheral devices, included are the ROM, the RAM, the 16-bit
integrated timer unit (ITU), the programmable timing pattern controller
(TPC), the watch dog timer (WDT), the serial communication interface
(SCI), the A/D convertor, the D/A convertor, the I/O port, the MDA
controller (DMAC), and the refresh controller.

3 Pin arrangement

P61/BREQ
P62/BACK

P60/WAIT
P65/HWR
P66/LWR

P53/A19
P52/A18
P51/A17
P50/A16
P27/A15
P26/A14
P64/RD
P63/AS

EXTAL

STBY
XTAL
MD2
MD1
MD0

RES
NMI
Vcc

Vss

Vss
Φ
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
A Vcc 76 50 A13/P25
Vref 77 49 A12/P24
P70/AN0 78 48 A11/P23
P71/AN1 79 47 A10/P22
P72/AN2 80 46 A9/P21
P73/AN3 81 45 A8/P20
P74/AN4 82 44 Vss
P75/AN5 83 43 A7/P17
P76/AN6/DA0 84 42 A6/P16
P77/AN7/DA1 85 41 A5/P15
A Vss 86 40 A4/P14
P80/RFSH/IRQ0 87 39 A3/P13
P81/CS3/RAS/IRQ1 88 SC3041K12F 38 A2/P12
P82/CS2/IRQ2 89 37 A1/P11
P83/CS1/IRQ3 90 36 A0/P10
P84/CS0 91 35 Vcc
Vss 92 34 D15/P37
PA0/TP0/TEND0/TCLKA 93
JAPAN 33 D14/P36
PA1/TP1/TEND1/TCLKB 94 32 D13/P35
PA2/TP2/TIOCA0/TCLKC 95 31 D12/P34
PA3/TP3/TIOCB0/TCLKD 96 30 D11/P33
PA4/TP4/TIOCA1/A23 97 29 D10/P32
PA5/TP5/TIOCB1/A22 98 28 D9/P31
PA6/TP6/TIOCA2/A21 99 27 D8/P30
PA7/TP7/TIOCB2/A20 100 26 D7/P47
14
15
10
11
12
13

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Vcc

Vss

Vss
RES0

TXD0/P90
TXD1/P91
RXD0/P92
RXD1/P93
IRQ4/SCK0/P94
IRQ5/SCK1/P95
D0/P40
D1/P41
D2/P42
D3/P43

D4/P44
D5/P45
D6/P46
DREQ0/TP14/PB6
TIOCA3/TP8/PB0
TIOCB3/TP9/PB1
TIOCA4/TP10/PB2
TIOCB4/TP11/PB3
TOCXA4/TP12/PB4
TOCXB4/TP13/PB5

ADTRG/DREQ1/TP15/PB7

12 – 4
manuals4you.com
4 Internal block diagram

P37/D15
P36/D14
P35/D13
P34/D12
P33/D11
P32/D10
P31/D9
P30/D8

P47/D7
P46/D6
P45/D5
P44/D4
P43/D3
P42/D2
P41/D1
P40/D0
Vss
Vss
Vss
Vss
Vss
Vss
Vcc
Vcc
Vcc
Port 3 Port 4

Address bus

Address bus (Upper)

MD2 Address bus (Lower)

PS3/A19

Port 5
MD1 PS2/A18
MD0 PS1/A17
EXTAL
oscillator
PS0/A16
XTAL
Clock

Φ HS/300H CPU
STBY
RES
RES0
NMI

Bus contoller
Interruption P27/A15
P26/A14
controller P25/A13

Port 2
P66/LWR DMA P24/A12
P65/HWR contorller P23/A11
Port 6

P64/RD
(DMAC) P22/A10
P63/AS
ROM* P21/A9
P62/BACK
P20/A8
P61/BREQ (Mask ROM)
P60/WAIT

Refresh
controller
P17/A7
RAM P16/A6
P15/A5

Port 1
Watchdog timer P14/A4
P13/A3
P12/A2
P84/CS0 16-bit integrated P11/A1
P10/A0
Port 8

P83/CS1/IRQ3 timer pulse unit serial communication

P82/CS2/IRQ2 interface
P81/CS3/IRQ1
(ITU)
(SCI) x 2ch
P80/RFSH/IRQ0

Programmable A/D convertor

timing pattern P95/SCK1/IRQ5
controller (TPC) D/A convertor P94/SCK0/IRQ4
Port 9

P93/RXD1
P92/RXD0
P91/TXD1
P90/TXD0

Port B Port A Port 7

P77/AN7/DA1
P76/AN6/DA0
P75/AN5
P74/AN4
P73/AN3
P72/AN2
P71/AN1
P70/AN0
Vref
A Vcc
A Vss
PA1/TP1/TEND1/TCLKB
PA0/TP0/TEND0/TCLKA
PB6/TP14/DREQ0
PB5/TP13/TOCXB4
PB4/TP12/TOCXA4
PB3/TP11/TIOCA4
PB2/TP10/TIOCB4
PB1/TP9/TIOCB3
PB0/TP8/TIOCA3

PA7/TP7/TIOCB2/A20
PA6/TP6/TIOCA2/A21
PA5/TP5/TIOCB1/A22
PA4/TP4/TIOCA1/A23
PB7/TP15/DREQ1/ADTRG

PA3/TP3/TIOCB0/TCLKD
PA2/TP2/TIOCA0/TCLKC

*ROM capacity
H8/3042 64KByte
H8/3041 48KByte
H8/3040 32KByte

12 – 5
5 CPU SC3041K12F (IC1) pin signal
Pin No. Port Signal name IN/OUT H/L Specifications
1 VCC VCC Power (+5V)
2 P60 CVFMPWM OUT Fan motor (PWM output) signal
3 PB1 SCL OUT Serial clock signal for EEPROM
4 PB2 MMPWM OUT Main motor (PWM output) signal
5 PB3 SDA OUT Serial data for EEPROM
6 PB4 /MIR-A OUT H Mirror base motor drive signal -A
7 PB5 MIR-A OUT H Mirror base motor drive signal A
8 PB6 /MIR-B OUT H Mirror base motor drive signal -B
9 PB7 MIR-B OUT H Mirror base motor drive signal B
10 /RES0 /RES0 OUT H Reset signal for external device (fixed to HIGH)
11 VSS VSS Power (GND)
12 P90 DATA OUT Operation panel serial data signal
13 P91 TXD OUT Option UART input signal
14 P92 HL OUT L Heater lamp control signal (ON at LOW)
15 P93 RXD IN Option UART input signal
16 P94 OP-CLK OUT Operation panel serial clock input signal
17 P95 OP-LATCH OUT Operation panel data latch signal
18 P40 KI0 IN Key input 0 signal
19 P41 KI1 IN Key input 1 signal
20 P42 KI2 IN Key input 2 signal
21 P43 KI3 IN Key input 3 signal
22 VSS VSS Power (GND)
23 P44 S0 IN Matrix input 0 signal
24 P45 S1 IN Matrix input 1 signal
25 P46 SINPUT IN Matrix input 2 SINPUT (MOI51)
26 P47 MFD IN L Multi manual feed unit sensing signal (Low when the unit is sensed.)
27 P30 D0 Data signal
28 P31 D1 Data signal
29 P32 D2 Data signal
30 P33 D3 Data signal
31 P34 D4 Data signal
32 P35 D5 Data signal
33 P36 D6 Data signal
34 P37 D7 Data signal
35 VCC VCC
36 P10 AD0 Address signal
37 P11 AD1 Address signal
38 P12 AD2 Address signal
39 P13 AD3 Address signal
40 P14 AD4 Address signal
41 P15 AD5 Address signal
42 P16 AD6 Address signal
43 P17 AD7 Address signal
44 VSS VSS Power (+5V2)
45 P20 AD8 Address signal
46 P21 AD9 Address signal
47 P22 AD10 Address signal
48 P23 AD11 Address signal
49 P24 AD12 Address signal
50 P25 AD13 Address signal
51 P26 AD14 Address signal

12 – 6
manuals4you.com
Pin No. Port Signal name IN/OUT H/L Specifications
52 P27 AD15 Address signal
53 P50 AD16 Address signal
54 P51 LHPS IN L Lens home position signal (LOW at 100%)
55 P52 PPD IN H Transport pass sensor signal (HIGH when paper is sensed.)
56 P53 MCS IN H Drum marking sensor signal
57 VSS VSS Power (GND)
58 P60 BACK IN H Back signal (fixed to H)
59 P61 BREQ IN H Break signal (fixed to H)
60 P62 WAIT IN H Wait signal (fixed to H)
61 S-CLK S-CLK OUT H System clock (Fixed to HIGH)
62 /STBY /STBY IN H Standby signal (Fixed to HIGH)
63 /RES /RESET IN L Reset at LOW.
64 NMI NMI Non-maskable interruption (Fixed to LOW.)
65 VSS VSS Power (GND)
66 EXTAL EXTAL IN Clock (8MHz)
67 XTEL XTEL IN Clock (8MHz)
68 VCC VCC Power (+5V2)
69 P63 /AS OUT H Address strobe signal (Fixed to HIGH.)
70 P64 /RD OUT L ROM. I/O data read signal
71 P65 /HWR OUT L I/O data write signal
72 P66 /LWR OUT H Lower write signal (Fixed to HIGH.)
73 MD0 MD0 IN H Mode set signal (Fixed to HIGH.)
74 MD1 MD1 IN L Mode set signal (Fixed to LOW.)
75 MD2 MD2 IN H Mode set signal (Fixed to HIGH.)
76 AVCC AVCC A/D, D/A convertor power
77 VREF VREF A/D, D/A convertor reference voltage
78 P70 AES IN AE sensor signal (Analog input signal)
79 P71 TH IN Thermistor signal (Analog input signal)
80 P72 TCS IN Toner density sensor signal (Analog input signal)
81 P73 PROCON IN Process control signal (Analog input signal)
82 P74 DVC IN Developing unit color detection signal (Analog input signal)
83 P75 PD IN Original sensor signal (Analog input signal)
84 P76 BLDATA OUT Blank lamp data signal (Analog input signal)
85 P77 PCG OUT Process control gain signal
86 AVSS GND
87 P80 MHPS IN H Mirror home position sensor signal
88 P81 FWS IN Zero cross detection signal
89 P82 /CS2 OUT L Chip select signal (I/O) (I/O is selected at LOW.)
90 P83 /CS1 OUT L Chip select signal (EPROM) (EPROM is selected at LOW.)
91 P84 TFD IN H Waste toner sensor signal (Toner full at HIGH)
92 VSS GND Power (GND)
93 PA0 LED0 OUT H Original detection LED lighting signal 0 (ON at HIGH)
94 PA1 LED1 OUT Original detection LED lighting signal 1 (ON at HIGH)
95 PA2 CLPWM OUT Copy lamp control signal (PWM signal)
96 PA3 MMRE IN Main motor rotary encoder detection signal
97 PA4 GBPWM OUT Grid bias control signal (PWM signal)
98 PA5 PFMCLK OUT Paper feed motor clock signal
99 PA6 TM0 OUT H Toner supply motor drive signal 0 (ON at HIGH)
100 PA7 TM1 OUT H Toner supply motor drive signal 1 (ON at HIGH)

12 – 7
(3) Detector circuit of sensor signal
The LS151 selects one signal of D0 ∼ D7 according to the combina-
+5V
SEL B
tion of SEL A ∼ C signals (H, L) and outputs it to Y. +5V
Selection of D0 ∼ D7 for SEL A ∼ C is made as shown in the table CSD1
below. I/O
SW602
S2

HC04
SEL C SEL B SEL A Y 24K

0 0 0 0 +5V

0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2 4.7K
S0
0 1 1 3 24K HC04

1 0 0 4
+5V
1 0 1 5
1 1 0 6
4.7K
1 1 1 7 S1

10K 24K HC04

IC15 22K 2.2K

DTA123YS
4
D0
3 5 POD
D1 Y CPU GP1S53
2 MAIN LS151
D2 TMOTOR2 LS151
1 TMOTOR3 LS151
D3
15
D4
14
D5 +5V
13 SEL C
D6
12 +5V
D7 1K
4.7K
11 I/O S0
SEL A A HC04
10K 24K
10
SEL B B 22K 2.2K
9 DTA123YS
SEL C C
7 +5V
G PPD1
GP1S53

74LS151 4.7K
S1

PNC 24K HC04

The sensor signal is in the following composition with the matrix of
SEL A ∼ C and S0 ∼ 2. +5V

S0 S1 S2
CSD
SEL A PED1 — CSD 0 S2

SEL B SW A⁄B POD CSD 1 24K HC04

SEL C PPD1 PNC CSD 2

+5V
SEL A

+5V (4) Start/stop control circuit

1K
4.7K
I/O S0 This circuit detects ON/OFF of the power and controls start/stop of
10K 24K HC04 the circuits.
22K 2.2K The DC power section provides each power voltage (VH=+32V,
DTA123YS
+24V, VC=+1-V, VD1=5V, VD2=5V).
+5V When the power voltage reaches the specified level, the operation of
PE1 each circuit is started. Before the paper voltage falls below the
EE-SX1042
specified level, the operation of each circuit is stopped to prevent
CSD0
S2
against malfunctions.
SW601
HC04
24K 5V2
RESET 63
CPU
MOTOR PWB 2 LS151 5V2
MOTOR PWB 3 LS151 R8 (IC 6)
IC13 2.7KJ
1
VCC /RESET
2 5
NC GND
4 3
C5 CAP
C42
M51953BL
C4
470µ F 22000PF 1µ F
10V 50V

12 – 8
manuals4you.com
(5) Heater lamp control circuit
+5V1

R67 R71
1KJ 47KJ

11
13 R75
10 Q7 C6
IC20D 75J 2SC945 R83
NJM2901 C7 OP-LATCH
R68 CPU 17PIN
3.9KJ
5.6KJ R84 0.22µ F
0.22µ F 10KJ D47

+5V2 Vref

R91 R87 R89

R34 8.2KJ 1MJ 4.7KF
1KJ
8
14 D38
9
IC20C
D16 D6 C55 MA700
NJM2901
R93
R92
DSM101 680J
22000PF 47KF
PR Q5
8 ~ 20
2SA673
R54 R63
+5V2 IC10 4 5
IC15
1KJ 47KJ
16 1
O1 I1
15 2
O2 I2
14
13
O3 I3
3
4
R32
PR
Heat roller
12
O4 I4
5 CPU
O5 I5 2.7KJ HL
11 6
10
O6 I6
7
AN1
O7 I7
9 8
SK G
TD62504

PR
R35
L2
+5V2
270J
1/4W 10K
2.2K
Q3 GATE T1
DTA123Y5

T2

PR GND
AC PWB AC PWB

200V AREA

THSW
HL
AC

THSW HL

ML : 1KW

N1

1 General
The heater lamp control circuit detects the heat roller surface
temperature with the thermistor, converts it into a voltage, and out-
puts it to the CPU analog input pin.
The CPU converts analog signals into digital signals, compares them
with the value set by test commands to turn on/off the heater lamp,
maintaining the heat roller surface temperature at a constant level.
The higher the heat roller surface temperature is, the greater the
thermistor resistance is, and vice versa.
Therefore, the lower the heat roller surface temperature is, the higher
the thermistor pin voltage is. The thermistor pin voltage is inputted to
the analog port of CPU, which controls ON/OFF of the heater lamp
according to the input voltage level.
[High temperature protect circuit when the CPU is hung up (out
of control)]
1) The IC20 8 pin voltage (reference voltage) is divided by R91 and
R93. The thermistor pin voltage is inputted to the IC20 9 pin.
When the voltage at 9 pin becomes lower than the voltage at 8 pin
(the heat roller surface temperature about 240V), the IC20 14 pin
is driven to LOW, pulling down the PR signal to the GND level,
turning off the AC power of the heater lamp.
2) Since the OP-latch signal is fixed to HIGH or LOW, the collector of
Q7 is open. The voltage at IC20 10 pin is higher than the voltage
at IC20 11 pin (reference voltage), and IC20 13 pin is driven to
LOW.
With the above operations, IC9 13 pin is opened to turn off Q5,
turning off the power relay. As a result, the AC power of the heater
and the copy lamp is turned off.
* The double protection with 1) and 2) is provided.

12 – 9
[When the heat roller surface temperature is lower than the set (7) Stepping motor drive circuit
temperature]
a. Since the thermistor pin voltage is higher then the set level, the 1 General
output signal HL from the CPU is driven to LOW. The driver circuit drives the lens drive motor, the mirror base drive
motor, the automatic duplex copy tray, the side plate motor, and the
b. This HL signal is passed through TR Q3 to the solid state relay
rear plate motor.
(SSR).
When, therefore, the HL signal is LOW, the internal triac turns on. A
c. When the internal triac turns on, a pulse is applied to the gate of Phase A
external triac to flow a current from the power through the heater
lamp to the triac, lighting the heater lamp. +24V

[When the heat roller surface temperature is higher than the set Phase A
level] A Phase B Phase B
a. Since the thermistor pin voltage is lower than the set level, the
output signal HL from the CPU is driven to HIGH.
b. HL is driven to LOW, SSR turns off, the external triac turns off,
and the heater lamp turns off.
[Q3] B +24V B
Prevents the hater lamp from being lighted always by the trouble in
the heater lamp drive signal harness wiring. A: Stepping motor phase A coil drive signal
B: Stepping motor phase B coil drive signal
(6) Driver circuit (Solenoid, electromagnetic clutch) A: Stepping motor phase A coil drive signal
B: Stepping motor phase B coil drive signal
1 General
* Mirror base motor power is Vh.
The control signals of each load outputted from the CPU and I/O
cannot drive the load directly. The output, therefore, is delivered to Stepping motor time chart
the load through the driver IC.

2 Operation A
The drive circuit forms a Darlington circuit with two transistors to
obtain a large drive current (load current) from a small input current B
(I/O output current). When the driver input voltage is HIGh (+5V), the
A
transistor is turned on to flow a current in the arrow direction, operat-
ing the load. When the driver is turned on, the driver output pin B
voltage is 0V.

+24V

I/O
output

LOAD

12 – 10
manuals4you.com
(8) AE (Auto Exposure) sensor circuit
The AE sensor circuit is composed of the AE sensor PWB; which is composed of the photo diode, the I-V convertor circuit, and the amplifier circuit;
and the amplifier circuit on the control PWB.

+24V R50 100KJ

4
CPU R40 2 R53 C48 0.1µ F
AES 1
AN0 3 1KJ
1KJ IC14A 6 PDK
7
C38
ZD2 LM324 11 5 PDA
IC14B
1000PF HZS883 LM324
R48 C49
AEG1 R44 R43 R45 R47 100KJ 2200PF
I/O AE sensor PWB
15KF 750F 75F 270F
AEG1
AEG0 AEG0

Operation amplifier A performs I-V conversion of the original density level (minute current) from the sensor. Operation amplifiers B and C amplify the
output of operation amplifier A to a suitable level for inputting to the CPU.
The amplifying level is automatically set by selecting the AE gain signal (AEG0 ∼ AEG2) outputted from the I/O chip when test command SIM 47 is
executed.
AE operation is performed by the software in the control PWB. When a reflected ray enters the sensor, a voltage corresponding to the light quantity
is inputted to the CPU. The CPU compares the input voltage and the copy lamp application voltage and controls the copy lamp voltage so that the
exposure level corresponds to the original density.

(9) Toner supply motor drive circuit

IC104 is the motor control IC which drives the toner supply motor with Truth value table
the pulse signals (TMa, TMb) outputted from the I/O chip.
Input Output
+24V
Mode
TMa TMb TMa TMb
IC5 C2 L L ∞ ∞ Stop
2 6 +
+5V
TMa 9 8 10UF35V
H L H L CW/CCW
IN1
I/O
TMb 1
IN2
7 TMa L H L H CCW/CW
5 3 TMb
GND H H L L Break
R20 R211 TA7291S
47KJ 47KJ
∞: High impedance
M
Internal circuit

+5V +24V

2 8
(10) Reset IC (IC13)
6 +24V
1 General
The M51953 BL is the semiconductor IC most suitable to detect the
TMa
power voltage and reset the logic circuit of every type including the REG
7
CPU.
It is provided with the built-in delay circuit. Delay time is easily ob- M
tained by adding external capacity. Protection 3
Pin connections (Top view) circuit
TMb
(Heat insulated)

5 Output
9 1 5
BL

4 Delay capacity GND

TMa 4 pin = NC pin
M51953

3 GND TMb

2 NC

1 Power

External view 5P5

12 – 11
2 Operation
• When "td" (= 30msec) passes after the voltage reaches 4.25V by
turning on the power, the output is drive to HIGH.
"td" is set by the external capacitor (C106).
Block diagram

Power

5µA
R1 reference

- Output
-
R2 +

1.25V

GND Delay capacity

Power voltage

4.25V

0.65V t
Output state

ta ta
L
t
Output not constant
ta = 30m sec

(11) Operation panel

1 General
• The operation circuit is composed of the key matrix circuit and the
display matrix circuit.
Key detection: With the signal detected by Q1 ∼ Q7 and KI0 ∼ KI3
signal matrix at LOW (GND) and Q2 ∼ Q7 at HIGH (open), the
level of KI 0 ∼ KI3 is checked to judge whether key matrix 1, 2, and
3 are HIGH or LOW, judging on/off.
For Q2 ∼ Q7, switching is made every 2msec to judge each of
them.

+5V2 +5V1

KI0

KI1

TD62504
CPU KI2

1 2 3

M66313
Q4

12 – 12
manuals4you.com
(12) EnergyStar circuit description
The EnergyStar circuit composition saves power consumption when
the user leaves the machine with the power ON.
Normally in a copy mode or in the standby mode, the main PWB
connector HL signal is HIGH (5V) and the AC PWB relay (TY201) is
turned on to supply power to all the power transformers and the
optional power source.
When the machine is left un-operated with the power ON, the main
PWB connector HL signal level becomes a high impedance to turn off
the AC PWV relay (RY201), stopping power supply to the power
transformers and the optional power source except for the sub DC
PWB PT2 (Ref. t1). As a result, only 5V is supplied to the main PWB
and the operation PWB to reduce the power consumption.
To reset from this energy save mode, press an button on the opera-
tion PWB.

OPTION
AC PWB RY201
DC PWB
PR SORTER
5V2
GND

AC PWB OEG DC PWB +5V1

ILSW POWER OMH-SS-
105LM AC PWB Vcl TM
LI LO L1 SW +5V1
AC IN VH
NI NO +24V
MAIN
N/F N1 MirM VFM CFM LM SFM PWB
JQ1-24V PT1 HV
(AJQ1342) VH

JAPAN ONLY AC
PWB
+24V
DHSW ADF +5V ADF
DCPS GND CONTROL MM
MOTOR
24V CONTROL
OPTION
SUB CS2M PWB
DC PWB ADF OPTION PWB

DH3

DH4

~
- +
DH1 OP PWB
PT3 ~
DH2

GATE T1 GATE T1

200V ONLY T2 T2
HL TRG
CLR
AC PWB

L2 120V DC AC PWB
200V THSW
N1 CIRCUIT
HL AREA 200V
PT1 CL AREA
CLTF

THSW HL
ADF DCPS CL
CLTF CL:100V 275W
HL:1kW 200V 310W
N2

12 – 13
 q
COPYRIGHT  1998 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted.
In any form or by any means,
electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without prior written permission of the publisher.

SHARP CORPORATION
Printing Reprographic Systems Group
Quality & Reliability Control Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-11, Japan
1998 January Printed in Japan S

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

PARTS GUIDE
CODE:00ZSF1118/P1E

Copier

MODEL SF-1118

CONTENTS

1 Exteriors N Main drive unit

2 Operation panel section
3 Original cover
6 Optical unit 1
7 Optical unit 2
8 Lens drive unit
9 Mirror holder unit
F Upper frame 1
G Upper frame 2
H Copy lamp unit
I Toner hopper unit
J Drum frame unit
K Developer unit
L Fusing unit
M Paper feeding unit
O Lower frame 1
P Lower frame 2
Q Manual multi paper feeding unit
R Manual multi paper feeding tray unit
U MC unit
V TC case unit
W 250 Tray
X Packing material & Accessories
Y Main PWB
Z Operation PWB
] AC circuit PWB
^ DC Power supply PWB
_ Sub DC PWB
■ Index

This document has been published to be

SHARP CORPORATION used for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without
notice.
 SF-1118

DEFINITION
The definition of each Rank is as follows and also noted in the list
A : Parts necessary to be stocked as High usage parts.
B : Parts necessary to be stocked as Standard usage parts.
C : Low usage parts.
D : Parts necessary for refurbish.
E : Unit parts recommended to be stocked for efficient after sales service.
Please note that the lead time for the said parts may be longer than normal parts.
S : Consumable parts.
Please note that the following parts used in Copier under the same description are classified into A or B Rank depending
upon the place used.
Example : Gear made of Metal, Sprocket, Bearing, Belt made of Rubber, Spring clutch mechanism.
A Rank : The parts which may be with the revolution or loading.
B Rank : Parts similar to A Rank parts, but are not included in Rank A.
Because parts marked with “! ” is indispensable for the machine safety maintenance and operation, it must be replaced with
the parts specific to the product specification.
Other than this Parts Guide, please refer to documents Service Manual and Circuit Diagram of this model.
Please use the 13 digit code described in the right hand corner of front cover of the document, when you place and
order.
For U.S. only-Use order codes provided in advertising literature.
Do not order from parts department.

1 Exteriors
PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 CCAB-0876FC09 BB N D Front exterior
2 GCAB-0877FCZ1 AX N D Left exterior
3 XHBSE40P10000 AA C Screw (M4´10)
4 GCAB-0747FCZZ AN D Upper exterior left
5 GCAB-0820FCZZ AZ D Rear exterior
6 GCAB-0818FCZZ AY D Right exterior
7 GCAB-0746FCZZ AN D Upper exterior right
8 PCOVP1271FCZZ AZ D Front frame cover
9 PMAGT0015FCZZ AD B Magnet catch (10P)
10 LPLTM2573FCZ1 AD C ADF MG plate
11 XBSSE30P10000 AA C Screw (M3´10)
12 PCOVP1273FCZZ AM D AC cover
13 TCAUA0770FCZZ AB C Service caution label
14 XHBSE40P08000 AA C Screw (M4´8)
15 GCAB-0748FCZ2 AU D Upper exterior rear
16 HPNLC0236FCZ1 AW N D Operation panel
17 XEBSE40P10000 AA C Screw (M4´10)
18 CGIDM1338FC12 AR C OR guide L
19 PGLSP0074FCZ3 AZ B Table glass
20 PGIDM1337FCZZ AK C OR guide R
21 XBTSE40P04000 AA C Screw
23 NSFTZ2499FCZZ AD N C Front exterior fulcrum shaft
26 PCOVP1272FCZ1 AH N C Front connector cover
27 PCOVP1327FCZZ AF C Rear connector cover
28 XEBSE30P10000 AA C Screw (M3´10)
29 PRNGP0040FCZZ AA C Grip ring (f3)
35 PTPE-0226FCZZ AC C Hook tape
36 PSPAZ1393FCZZ AC C MG catch spacer
38 TLABH4084FCZZ AE C Label
51 PCOVP0911FCZZ AB C Upper exterior rear cover R
52 PCOVP0941FCZZ AB C Upper exterior rear cover L

–1–

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

1 Exteriors

5 1

3
2 1

1 5
3 2 0 2 1
5 2

3 8

2 1
3
7 3
1 9
1 3 1 4
2 1
1 8 3

1 2 3 6
2 7
2 8
3 1 1 1 0
3

1 1 1 7
1 0
5
3 5 9
4 1 6
2 3
3 3 6 1 7 3
9
3

8
3
3

3 2 9
3 2 3
1 7
1
3 2 6
F C P 0 2 6 8 5

–2–
 SF-1118

2 Operation panel section

PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 HINDP0770FCZZ AX N D Key sheet (AB series)
2 PSHEZ4364FCZZ AK N D Sheet
3 HPNLC0236FCZ1 AW N D Operation panel
4 CBTN-0199FC01 AL C Clear all key
5 CBTN-0197FC32 AL E Start key unit
7 CBTN-0198FC01 AL C Clear key
8 CBTN-0196FC01 AR C Ten key
10 CBTN-0201FC01 AK C Cassette key
11 CBTN-0237FC02 AN C Operation key A
12 CBTN-0200FC01 AL C Zoom key
13 CPWBF1303FC51 BN N E Operation PWB
15 XEPSD20P08000 AA C Screw (M2´8)
16 XEPSD30P08000 AA C Screw (M3´8)
17 DHAI-2496FCZZ AH C OP joint harness
18 DHAI-2404FCZZ AY C Operation main harness
19 CBTN-0236FC01 AK C Operation key A
20 JBTN-0238FCZZ AD C Clear key
21 PCOVP1398FCZZ AN C Oparation rear cover

2 Operation panel section

3
1 6

2 0
7
1 6 4
8 5
1 6
1 0

2 1 1 1
1 6 1 9
1 2
1 6
1 3 1 5
1 6
1 5
1 6
1 7 1 6
1 6
1 6
1 6
1 8 1 6 F C P 0 2 6 8 6
1 6 1 6

–3–

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

3 Original cover
PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 GCOVH0194FCZ2 BB D Original cover
2 MHNG-0096FCZZ AL C OC hinge R
3 MHNG-0086FCZZ AL C OC hinge L
4 XJBSD40P12000 AA C Screw (M4´12)
5 PSHEZ2715FCZZ AU D OC sheet

3 Original cover

4
3

5 4

2 4

F C P 0 2 6 8 7

–4–
 SF-1118

6 Optical unit 1
PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 NSFTZ2131FCZ1 AS C Winder drive shaft
2 XRESP70-08000 AA C E type ring (7mm)
3 NPLYZ0172FCZ1 AL C Winder pulley
4 LX-BZ0032FCZZ AB C Screw (M4´6)
5 LPINS0288FCZZ AB C Pin (f3´10.6)
6 NGERH1071FCZZ AG C Winder drive gear
7 LX-BZ0324FCZZ AA C Screw
8 PWIR-0173FCZZ AS C MB wire
! 9 CREFL0145FC36 BP E Copy lamp unit
10 XBBSD40P10000 AA C Screw (M4´10)
11 LPLTM4054FCZZ AB C Wire fixing plate
12 CHLDZ1234FC31 BH E 2nd, 3rd mirror holder unit
13 PRNGP0025FCZZ AA C G type ring (GTW-5)
14 NPLYZ0340FCZZ AC C L pulley
15 NPLYZ0292FCZZ AH C Pulley
16 LX-WZ0017FCZZ AA C Washer (f8´T0.5)
17 CPLTM4599FC01 AE C Pulley fixing plate
18 PCOVP1276FCZZ AR C Dark box cover upper
19 LX-BZ0320FCZZ AA C Screw (M4´6)
20 RMOTN0768FCZZ AZ B Mirror motor
22 PGUMS0228FCZZ AA C Table glass rubber
23 LPLTM4046FCZZ AD C Glass holding plate R
24 XBPSD40P06K00 AA C Screw (M4´6K)
25 LPLTM4766FCZZ AN C OC fixing plate
26 XHPSD40P08000 AA C Screw (M4´8)
27 PFTA-0110FCZZ AF C Conector cover
28 XBBSD30P06000 AA C Screw (M3´6)
29 PGUMS0147FCZZ AA C Table glass rubber (small)
30 LPLTM4047FCZZ AD C Glass holding plate L
31 LPLTM5471FCZZ AH N C Sub DC PWB fixing plate
32 CPLTM4532FC02 AP C Tip sheet fixing plate
36 LX-BZ0335FCZZ AA C Screw (M4´6)(Red)
37 LRALM0116FCZZ AE C MB-B rail
39 DHAI-2400FCZZ BE C Optical main harness
40 PGIDM1539FCZZ AC C CL guide
41 CDAIU0506FC01 BH C Optical base plate
42 DHAI-2404FCZZ AY C Operation main harness
44 NSFTZ2133FCZZ AH C Blancer shaft
45 XBPSD40P30K00 AA C Screw (M4´30)
46 LHLDW1269FCZZ AC C Wire holder (WWS-A-2-01)
48 XRESP50-06000 AA C E type ring
49 NBRGC0387FCZ1 AC B Bearing
50 NBRGC0504FCZZ AC C Bearing (F8´12´5 16X)
54 XBPSD40P08KS0 AA C Screw (4´8KS)
55 LBNDJ0013FCZ1 AA C Wire band
56 PSHEP3907FCZZ AD C Dark box cover upper sheet
59 TLABH3805FCZZ AF C Electric shock caution label
62 LHLDW2135SCZZ AB C PWB holder (KGLS-6RT)
63 XHBSD30P08000 AA C Screw (3´8)
64 XHBSE40P10000 AA C Screw (4´10)
65 CPWBF1302FC52 BB N E Sub DC PWB

–5–

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

6 Optical unit 1

2 8 6 4
4 0 8
1
1 0 5
1 1 A 7 3 2
4
9 1 0
3
1 1 2
1 2
1 3 7
1 6
1 5
1 4
8

1 3 1 8
1 4 1 9
2 5
2 7 2 2
2 3
1 5 1 6
2 8
3 9 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 0 4 5
4 6 2 8
4 8 4 9
2 6 4 4
2 4 4 1 5 6
2 5
5 9
2 6
2 2 4 4
A 4 5
2 9 2 2 2 6
6 2 2 4
3 0 1 7
5 0
3 7 2
6 2 2 4
6 5 1 7
6 3 2 2
6 4 2 9
2 4
2 4
3 1 4 2
5 4 3 6

3 2 2 4
3 6
2 4 5 5 F C P 0 2 6 8 8

–6–
 SF-1118

7 Optical unit 2
PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 LX-BZ0335FCZZ AA C Screw (M4´6)(Red)
2 LPLTM4562FCZZ AA C Lens drive shaft fixing plate
3 NSFTZ2132FCZZ AF C 4th, 5th drive shaft
4 CHLDZ1235FC31 BF E 4th, 5th mirror holder unit
5 MSPRT2285FCZZ AC C 4th, 5th drive spring
6 CDAIU0506FC01 BH C Optical base plate
7 LX-BZ0753FCZZ AC C Screw
8 NPLYZ0340FCZZ AC C L pulley
11 PSHEP3747FCZZ AE C 6th mirror shield sheet
12 XBTSC40P04000 AA C Screw (M4´4)
13 PCOVP1277FCZZ AN C Dark box cover lower
14 PGLSP0072FCZ1 AN B Protection glass
15 LFIX-0409FCZZ AB C Lens shaft fixing plate
16 NSFTD1597FCZZ AP C Lens drive shaft
! 17 CR-WZ0459FC01 AU B Dry heater
18 PMIR-0127FCZZ AT B 6th mirror
19 LFIX-0408FCZZ AB C 6th mirror fixing plate
20 LFIX-0284FCZZ AC C 4th 5th mirror holder F
21 LX-BZ0637FCZZ AC C Screw (Red)
22 LX-WZ0050FCZ1 AA C Washer (M4)
23 LX-WZ0134FCZZ AA C Washer
24 XNESF40-32000 AA C Nut (M4)
25 LRALM0119FCZZ AK C MB rail R
26 VHPGP1A22LC-1 AK B Photo sensor (GP1A22LC)(MHPD)
27 XBBSD40P10000 AA C Screw (M4´10)
28 PDUC-0061FCZZ AM C CFM duct
29 XBPSD40P06K00 AA C Screw (M4´6K)
30 NFANP0043FCZZ AZ B CFM
31 XEPSD40P30000 AA C Screw (M4´30)
32 PFILD0186FCZZ AF B Fan filter
33 DHAI-2400FCZZ BE C Optical main harness
36 LX-BZ0266FCZZ AB C Screw
37 XHPSD40P08000 AA C Screw (M4´8)
38 DHAI-2404FCZZ AY C Operation main harness

–7–

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

7 Optical unit 2

3 7 1
3 7 2

3 6 3 7 3
3 7

3 2 3 1

4
3 7
3 7 7 5
3 1 3 7 3 7
3 0 8
6
3 7
2 8 7
2 7
3 3
8
2 6
3 8
7
8
3 7 2 9 7
8 1 5

1 7
2 5 1 1

2 4 2 1
2 3 2 2
1 2

1 4
1 6 1 9

1 8 1 3
2 0
F C P 0 2 6 8 9

–8–
 SF-1118

8 Lens drive unit

PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 PLNS-0043FCZ1 BK C Lens
2 PSHEG2817FCZ1 AC C Lens lock sheet
3 NBRGC2029SCZZ AB B Bearing (F3´6´4.7´1)
4 XRESP20-03000 AA C E type ring (2mm)
5 PSHEP2335FCZZ AA C Shield sheet
6 PSHEP2751FCZZ AC C Lens shield sheet side
7 PSHEP4059FCZZ AK C Lens upper sheet
8 MSPRC2704FCZZ AD C SWL Drive wire spring
9 PWIR-0174FCZZ AU C Lens wire
10 LDAIU0507FCZZ AR C Zoom base
11 NPLYZ0340FCZZ AC C L pulley
12 LX-BZ0753FCZZ AC C Screw
13 NPLYZ0298FCZZ AH C L drive pulley
14 NGERH1036FCZZ AF C 4th, 5th drive gear
15 XRESP30-04000 AA C E type ring (3mm)
17 CPWBF1093FC31 AV E Optical PWB
18 RMOTP0766FCZ1 AX N B Lens drive motor
19 XEPSD30P08000 AA C Screw (M3´8)
20 NGERH1037FCZZ AG C Cam drive gear
21 NBRGC0537FCZZ AG C Bearing
22 MCAMM0093FCZZ AF C Cam
23 LX-BZ0713FCZZ AB C Screw (M4´6)
24 LX-BZ0786FCZZ AC C Screw
25 NBRGC0531FCZZ AC C Bearing (B-S6-4)
26 NGERR1038FCZZ AF C Rack gear
27 XBPSD30P06000 AA C Screw (M3´6)
28 LHLDZ1232FCZZ AH C Collar holder
29 PCLR-0351FCZZ AB C MB bearing collar M5
30 NBRGP0426FCZZ AB C MB bearing M5
31 NSFTZ2134FCZZ AG C Collar holder drive shaft
38 NBRGC0307FCZZ AC C Bearing (f10)
39 NBRGC0401FCZZ AC C Bearing
40 LX-WZ0424FCZZ AC C Washer
41 LX-BZ0840FCZZ AC C Screw
42 PSHEP4067FCZZ AD C Zoom base sheet
43 PSHEP4058FCZZ AC C Lens sheet R
44 NGERR1283FCZZ AD C Rack gear

8 Lens drive unit 4 1 2 7

4 4 2 8
2 6 2 7 2 9

3 0
2 9

3 0
2 5 2 3
3 1
2 4
1 9 2 2
1 2
1 8
2 1
1 1
2 0

4 0 9
1 4

1 2 1 3 3 9
1 1
1 7
3 8
1 5

1 0

6
7
1 9 4 2
4 3
8
4
3

1
2
F C P 0 2 6 9 0
–9–

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

9 Mirror holder unit

PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 XEPSD40P06000 AA C Screw (M4´6)
2 CSLI-0103FC31 AF E Slider (4pcs/set)
3 LFIX-0284FCZZ AC C 4th 5th mirror holder F
4 PMIR-0128FCZZ AU B 2nd mirror
5 PMIR-0129FCZZ AY B 3rd mirror
6 NPLYZ0276FCZZ AG C W pulley
7 LX-BZ0618FCZZ AA C Screw (M4´4)
8 PCUSS0201FCZZ AA C MB-B cushion
21 LX-BZ0320FCZZ AA C Screw (M4´6)
22 NGERR1039FCZZ AG C 4th, 5th drive rack gear
23 XBPSD40P06000 AA C Screw (M4´6)
24 LHLDZ1236FCZZ AR C 4th, 5th drive holder
25 LFIX-0284FCZZ AC C 4th, 5th mirror holder F
26 LFIX-0438FCZZ AD C Mirror fixing plate F
27 PMIR-0131FCZZ AS B 5th mirror
28 PMIR-0130FCZZ AW B 4th mirror
29 LX-BZ0725FCZZ AB C Screw
30 PCLR-0402FCZZ AE C Collar
31 LX-WZ0139FCZZ AA C Washer
32 LX-WZ0413FCZZ AA C Washer
33 XNESF40-32000 AA C Nut (M4)
34 LHLDZ1235FCZZ AM C 4th, 5th mirror holder
35 XBPSD30P18000 AC C Screw (M3´18)
36 LPLTM5015FCZZ AE C 4th, 5th, reinforce plate
37 LX-WZ5028BCZZ AA C Washer
41 XWUSD50-06100 AA C Washer
501 CHLDZ1234FC31 BH E 2nd, 3rd mirror holder unit
502 CHLDZ1235FC31 BF E 4th, 5th mirror holder unit

9 Mirror holder unit

6
7
4
3
1

1
5
2

7
3 6
3
2
8

8
2
3 5 0 1
2 1
3 5 2 3
5 0 2
2 2
2 5 2 3
3 6
2 3

2 4 3 4 3 3
3 2
2 5 3 1
2 6

2 8 3 7
2 7 4 1

2 5 3 0
2 9

F C P 0 2 6 9 1
– 10 –
 SF-1118

10 Upper frame 1
PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 XHBSE40P08000 AA C Screw (M4´8)
2 LX-BZ0663FCZZ AD C Screw
3 MSPRC2368FCZZ AP C DV lever spring
4 MLEVP0688FCZZ AH C DV lever (M4´6)
5 JHNDP0128FCZZ AD C Transport handle
6 MLEVF0666FCZZ AF C Lock release lever
7 XRESP70-08000 AA C E type ring (7mm)
8 NSFTZ2186FCZZ AF C Inter lock switch shaft
9 MSPRC2184FCZZ AA C Inter lock switch shaft spring
10 LHLDZ1201FCZZ AE C Inter lock switch shaft holder
11 XHBSE40P10000 AA C Screw (M4´10)
12 CBOSZ1610FC01 AN C Fulcrum boss
13 LFRM-0834FCZ1 AV C Upper frame F
14 QSW-C9170QCZZ AK B Seesaw switch (Power SW)
15 QSW-M0296FCZZ AM B Microswitch (Power SW)
16 DHAI-2918FCZZ AW N C MSW interface harness
17 XEPSD40P35000 AA C Screw (M4´35)
18 RMOTP0764FCZZ AZ B VFM
19 PFILZ0268FCZZ AU N B Delivery filter
20 PDUC-0092FCZZ AS C Fan duct
21 XHBSD30P06000 AA C Screw (M3´6)
22 CPWBF1084FC51 AU E POD PWB
24 LDAIU0505FCZZ AP C Fan fixing base
25 MLEVP0667FCZ1 AD C Delivery actuator
26 LBSHZ0326FCZZ AC C Edge protect bushing (L=100)
27 PRNGP0034FCZZ AA C E type ring (f10)
28 XHPSD30P06000 AA C Screw (M3´6)
29 LANGT1320FCZZ AB C TC control angle
30 LX-BZ0670FCZZ AC C Screw
31 MSPRC2591FCZZ AC C Lock lever spring
32 NSFTZ2120FCZ2 AP C Lock lever shaft
33 MLEVF0374FCZZ AC C Lock lever
34 LFRM-0835FCZ1 AU C Upper frame R
36 NSFTZ1595FCZZ AD C Shaft G
37 XRESP20-03000 AA C E type ring (2mm)
38 XEBSD30P06000 AA C Screw (3´6)
39 PCOVP1301FCZZ AL C DV guide cover A
40 CGIDH1541FC01 AX C DV guide
41 CPLTM2632FC01 AE C DV plate A
42 CPLTM2415FC01 AG C DV plate A
43 XRESP30-05000 AA C E type ring (3mm)
44 XRESP40-06000 AA C 4E-Type ring (4mm)
45 MSPRT1203FCZZ AA C DV spring
46 LPLTM3718FCZZ AG C Plate DVG
47 LPLTP4890FCZZ AL C Plate DVH
48 CPWBF1089FC32 AR E PID PWB
49 XHBSD40P08000 AA C Screw (4´8)
50 DHAI-2414FCZZ AK C PID PWB harness
51 PGIDM1543FCZZ AR C DV lower paper guide
52 MSPRT2277FCZZ AC C PS front collar pressure spring
53 LHLDZ1268FCZZ AE C Collar shaft holder
54 NROLP1060FCZZ AF C U-turn roller
55 NSFTZ2127FCZZ AM C PS front collar shaft
56 XEBSD40P12000 AA C Screw (M4´12)
57 MSPRC2282FCZZ AC C PS roller upper pressure spring
58 NBRGP0509FCZ1 AG C PS bearing
59 NROLM1053FCZ1 AY C PS roller upper
60 PSHEP3741FCZZ AF C PS front guide sheet
61 PSEL-0669FCZZ AD C PG seal 2
62 XBPSD40P08ES0 AA C Screw (4´8ES)
63 LBSHZ0324FCZZ AC C Edge protector
64 PSHEP4068FCZ1 AE C Filter fixing sheet

– 11 –

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

10 Upper frame 1

6 4
1 5
8 1 9
9 2 7 1 4
1 0 1 2 1 8
6 3 1 1 1 1 6
2 1 3
5 1 7
3
1 1
6
1

4
6 2

7 2 2
2 0 2 1
2 8
1 2 4 2 6
1
3 1 2 9
2 5

3 0 3 2 1
3 8 1 2 7

3 8 3 4
3 6 7
4 0 1
1 1
1 2
3 7
3 9 1 6 2
3 3

4 6 4 5
4 2 6 0
4 7
4 4 5 0 4 2
4 8 4 5
5 3 2 1 4 4
5 2 4 3 4 1
5 4
5 2 4 3
5 6 6 1
4 3
4 9 4 4 5 1
5 7 4 9
5 5 4 9

5 8
4 9
5 7
5 9

5 8
F C P 0 2 6 9 2

– 12 –
 SF-1118

11 Upper frame 2
PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 CFRM-0836FC75 BT E Drive frame unit
2 XHBSE40P08000 AA C Screw (M4´8)
3 NBLTH0245FCZZ AN B Paper feeding drive belt
4 LPLTM4757FCZZ AL C Drive assistance plate
5 XRESP70-08000 AA C E type ring (7mm)
6 LPINS0155FCZZ AA C Pin (f3-10)
7 NSFTZ2121FCZ1 AK C Paper feeding drive shaft
8 NPLYZ0285FCZ1 AE C Transport drive pulley 32T
9 NBRGC0133FCZ1 AC C PF bearing (f8)(B-F8-26)
10 NGERH1046FCZZ AE C 27T gear
11 NBRGC0536FCZZ AF C Joint arm bearing
12 XRESP50-06000 AA C E type ring (5mm)
13 NGERH1015FCZZ AD C PS joint gear 25T
14 CARMM0192FC01 AE C Joint arm
15 PRNGP0049FCZZ AA C Ring (f12)
16 NGERH1078FCZZ AD C 21T gear
17 LBSHZ0325FCZZ AD C Edge protect bushing (L=45)
20 LHLDW1269FCZZ AC C Wire holder (WWS-A-2-01)
21 LX-BZ0589FCZZ AA C Screw
22 NCPL-0007FCZZ AC C DV cup ring
23 MSPRC2319FCZZ AC C DV drive spring
24 LX-WZ0186FCZZ AA C Washer (f6)
25 NSFTZ2126FCZZ AN C DV drive shaft
26 NBRGC0080FCZ1 AD B Bearing
27 NGERH0111FCZZ AD C Gear 24T
28 XHPSD30P06000 AA C Screw (M3´6)
29 RMOTD0619FCZZ AR B Main motor
30 CFRM-0687FC02 AL C DV drive frame
31 DHAI-2416FC11 AR N C DV interface harness
32 LX-BZ0583FCZZ AB C Screw
33 MSPRC1534FCZZ AA C DV drive spring
34 LX-BZ0581FCZZ AB C Screw
35 MSPRC1299FCZZ AA C DV drive spring
36 MSPRC2295FCZZ AC C Joint arm spring
37 LX-BZ0771FCZZ AC C Screw
38 LPLTM4759FCZZ AK C Main PWB fixing plate
39 CPWBN1301FC52 BV N E Main PWB
40 XBPSD40P06K00 AA C Screw (M4´6K)
41 DHAI-2400FCZZ BE C Optical main harness
42 DHAI-2404FCZZ AY C Operation main harness
43 DHAI-2905FC12 BA N C Lower unit main harness
44 DHAI-2788FCZZ AS C High voltage harness
45 RTRNZ0535FCZZ BS N B High voltage transformer
46 LSUPP0095FCZZ AC C PWB suppoter (LCBS-22N)
47 LSUPP0086FCZZ AB C PWB suppoter (LCBS-6N)
48 LSUPP0094FCZZ AC C PWB supporter (LCBS-20)
49 LFRM-0835FCZ1 AU C Upper frame R
51 LSTPP0320FCZZ AC C Arm stopper
53 DHAI-2568FCZZ AP C MM interface harness
55 PSHEZ3909FCZZ AE C Insulator sheet
57 LBNDJ0013FCZ1 AA C Wire band
58 LBNDJ0015FCZZ AA C Wire band (N-108)

– 13 –

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

11 Upper frame 2

3 8
5 5

4 2

5 7 4 1 4 0

3 9 4 3
1 7

4 0
4 1
5 3

4 9 1
2

A
2
3 6

5 1 3 2 0
1 5 3 7 1 4 2
9 1 6 2
1 2 4
6 1 0
2
1 1 6 5
9
2 1 2 2 5 1
3
2 3
2 4 1 2
2 5 7
3 2 3 1 2 A
2 6 6
3 0 8 5

2 6 4 5
5
2 1 6 4 6
2 7
2 2 5 4 7
3 3
2 4 3 4 4 8
3 4 3 4 2 9
4 4
3 5
2 8 5 8
4 7
5 7
F C P 0 2 6 9 3

– 14 –
 SF-1118

12 Copy lamp unit

PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 LPLTM4124FCZZ AC C Control plate
2 PREFL0145FCZZ AT C Main reflector
! 3 RLMPU0495FCZ1 BC B Copy lamp
4 MSPRP2354FCZZ AG C Lamp spring F
! 5 CFS-T0104FC31 AQ A Temperature fuse
6 LPLTM4966FCZZ AR C Terminal plate
7 LPLTP4964FCZZ AP C Side plate F
8 PCUSS0327FCZZ AD C Cushion
9 CSLI-0103FC31 AF E Slider unit (4pcs/set)
10 MSPRP2101FCZZ AC C Mirror spring
11 PMIR-0076FCZZ AP B 1st mirror
12 CDAIU0524FC01 AV C Copy lamp base plate
13 LBNDJ0013FCZZ AA C Wire band
14 DHAI-2503FCZZ BA C CL harness
15 LPLTP4965FCZZ AP C Side plate R
16 MSPRP2355FCZZ AL C Lamp spring R
17 PCUSF0334FCZZ AP C Mirror cushion
18 LPLTM4967FCZZ AE C Fixer plate
19 XBPBN30P05K00 AB C Screw (M3´5K)
20 LX-BZ0767FCZZ AB C Screw
21 XHBSD30P06000 AA C Screw (M3´6)
22 XNESD30-24000 AA C Nut
23 XEBSF30P06000 AA C Screw (M3´6)
24 MSPRC2369FCZZ AP C CL lead fixing spring
(Unit)
! 901 C R E F L 0 1 4 5 F C 3 6 BP E Copy lamp unit

– 15 –

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

12 Copy lamp unit

2 3
2 3
1

2 3
1

2 3
2 1
1

2 3
1
1 6

2 1

2 1 9
3
1 3
2 0 2 0
A

2 2 1 9
5
4
1 2

1 5
9

9 A 2 0
6
8 2 1 1 7
1 8 2 2
1 0
2 3 7
2 4
2 1
1 1
1 4 2 1

8
9
1 0 1 8
2 1
F C P 0 2 6 9 4

– 16 –
 SF-1118

13 Toner hopper unit

PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 PCOVP1279FCZZ AT C Hopper cover TA
3 PSEL-0446FCZZ AA C Seal T1
4 PMLT-0834FCZZ AB C Cushion TB
5 LPLTM4762FCZZ AE C Lock base plate
6 XEBSD30P08000 AA C Screw (M3´8)
7 PMLT-0836FCZZ AB C Cushion TD
8 PMLT-0835FCZZ AA C Cushion TC
9 PCOVP1280FCZZ AN C Cover TB
10 PSEL-0660FCZZ AG C Toner hold seal
21 JHNDP0109FCZZ AD C Handle TH
22 LX-WZ0225FCZZ AA C Washer (f5-f16)
23 XUBSD30P05000 AA C Screw (M3´5)
24 XEBSF30P08000 AA C Screw (M3´8)
25 XBBSD40P08000 AA C Screw (M4´8)
26 XEBSD40P08000 AA C Screw (M4´8)
27 PSHEP3955FCZZ AD C DV blade sheet
28 NROLS0848FCZZ AP C Toner roller
29 MARMP0120FCZZ AE C Toner transport arm
30 MSPRT1640FCZZ AC C Toner stirring spring A
31 NSFTZ1628FCZZ AF C Shaft TB
32 MARMP0139FCZZ AE C Arm TA
33 NSFTZ1627FCZZ AG C Shaft TA
34 NBRGP0299FCZZ AC B DV bearing (f5)
35 LPINS0089FCZZ AA C Spring pin
36 NGERH0314FCZZ AC C Toner transport gear 16T
37 XRESP40-06000 AA C 4E-Type ring (4mm)
38 NGERH0623FCZZ AB C Stirring gear
39 XWHSD30-05080 AA C Washer (3W)
40 NGERH0626FCZZ AC C Toner drive gear 16T
41 PSEL-0433FCZZ AB C Seal THB
42 PSEL-0432FCZZ AA C Seal THA
43 PSHEP2917FCZZ AB C Sheet MS
44 PBOX-0086FCZZ AN D Box TH
47 PMLT-1023FCZZ AB C TH side cushion
49 PMLT-1021FCZZ AC C Cushion T1
50 PMLT-1022FCZZ AG C Cushion T2
51 TLABZ3803FCZZ AD C TH Label
52 XEBSD30P08000 AA C Screw
(Unit)
901 C B O X - 0 0 8 6 F C 6 3 BK E Toner box unit

– 17 –

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

13 Toner hopper unit

5 1

2 5
4 7
2 4
1 3
2 6
4 7
4
2 4

2 5
1 0

2 7
4 9 5
2 6 5 0
8
3

5 2

7 8 5 2

2 8
2 2 3 7
3 1 3 6
2 3 2 9 3 5
2 1 3 4
3 8 3 7
2 2 3 2
3 4
2 3
3 3 3 9 6
3 0 3 0 4 0

3 8 3 7
3 0 3 4

4 1 4 2

7
4 1

4 2 7
4 3
3 7 3 4
4 4 F C P 0 2 6 9 5
3 4
om
justmanuals.c
– 18 –
 SF-1118

14 Drum frame unit

PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 LFRM-0844FCZZ AS C DR frame upper
2 PSHEP3824FCZZ AF C Shield sheet DL
3 LX-BZ0300FCZZ AB C Screw
4 CPWBF1098FC51 BB E DL PWB
5 CPWBF1094FC51 BG E BL PWB
6 XEPSD30P08000 AA C Screw (M3´8)
7 LPLTM4765FCZZ AD C BL adjusting plate
8 XBPSD30P06000 AA C Screw (M3´6)
9 LBNDJ0013FCZ1 AA C Wire band
10 CPWBF1092FC51 AS E Mark sensor PWB
11 XUPSD30P04000 AA C Screw (M3´4)
12 LX-BZ0426FCZZ AA C Screw (M4´10)(Blue)
13 PSHEZ4015FCZZ AC C Black sheet A
21 CYOK-0048FC31 AL D Waste toner bottle unit
23 NBRGP0534FCZ1 AD C Waste toner bearing 2
24 NGERH1044FCZZ AF C Gear 87T
25 MSPRC2288FCZZ AC C Waste toner spring
26 LX-BZ0334FCZZ AA C Screw (M4´8KS)(Blue)
27 UCLEZ0108FCZ1 AV C Cleaning blade (FB30N)
28 XEBSD30P08000 AA C Screw (M3´8)
29 LPLTM4764FCZZ AP C Blade fixing plate
30 NGERH1045FCZZ AD C Gear 16T
31 NBRGC0080FCZZ AD B Bearing
32 XRESP70-08000 AA C E type ring (7mm)
33 MSPRC1811FCZZ AA C Separator lever spring
34 MLEVP0672FCZZ AH C Separator pawl lever
35 XRESP40-06000 AA C 4E-Type ring (4mm)
36 XEBSD30P20000 AA C Screw (M3´20)
37 NGERH1043FCZZ AF C Gear 44T
38 PRNGP0025FCZZ AA C G type ring (GTW-5)
39 NGERH1074FCZZ AD C Waste toner gear
40 LPINS0297FCZZ AB C Pin (f2´6)
41 NBRGY2122SCZZ AB C Bearing
42 LPLTM4763FCZZ AC C Screw reinforce plate
43 NGERH1042FCZZ AD C Gear 19T
44 PMLT-0999FCZZ AC C Blade sheet
45 PMLT-0985FCZ1 AF C Toner cushion R
46 PMLT-0984FCZ1 AF C Toner cushion F
47 CPLTM4903FC02 AU C Toner sheet plate
48 NBRGP0535FCZZ AD C Pipe bearing
49 NSRW-0023FCZZ AS C Toner transport screw
50 MSPRC2287FCZ2 AL C Waste toner transport spring
51 CPIPP0182FC04 AM C Toner transport pipe
52 NBRGP0533FCZZ AG C Waste toner bearing 1
53 XEBSD40P10000 AA C Screw (M4´10)
54 PGIDM1602FCZZ AG C Waste toner guide
55 XEBS230P08000 AA C Screw (M3´8)(Blue)
56 LFRM-0843FCZZ AY C DR frame lower
57 LHLDZ1274FCZZ AF C Sensor holder
58 CPWBF0976FC53 AR E Process control PWB
59 PCOVP1184FCZ1 AC C DR sensor cover
60 LX-WZ0310FCZZ AB C Washer
61 MSPRC2025FCZZ AA C Separator pawl spring
62 PTME-0211FCZ1 AG C DR separator pawl
63 LPINS0298FCZZ AA C Pawl shaft pin
64 LX-WZ0285FCZZ AA C Washer
65 LPLTM4982FCZZ AC C Tap plate
66 PRNGP0026FCZZ AA C G type ring (GTW-3)
68 PSHEP3929FCZZ AD C Blade sheet
69 PSHEZ3899FCZ1 AC C Pipe sheet
70 LX-BZ0656FCZZ AD C Screw
71 XRESP50-06000 AA C E type ring (5mm)
72 PSHEP3930FCZ1 AD C Blade sheet F
73 PMLT-0991FCZZ AA C Side cushion
74 PSHEP3931FCZZ AD C Blade sheet R
75 PMLT-1012FCZZ AA C Screw cushion
76 DHAI-2508FCZZ AP C Process interface harness
77 PMLT-1025FCZZ AE C Waste toner cushion A
78 PMLT-1026FCZZ AF C Waste toner cushion B
79 PSHEP4019FCZZ AC C Process sheet
81 CPLTM4027FC09 AL C Drum control plate F A
82 CCOVP1281FC01 AQ D Process cover(This includes NO84)
83 TCAUH0821FCZZ AA C High voltage caution label
84 PMLT-1005FCZZ AC C Pipe fixing cushion

– 19 –

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

14 Drum frame unit

2 6 1

2 6
2 6
9 2 5
4
6

1 3 2 6

1 2 4 4
7
8 4 3
B
8 2 8
2 6 2 7
A 1 0

1 1
2 8
8 2
2 9
2 1 3 1
8 3
3 2
3 7
2 5 3 0 3 1 2 8
2 4 6 6
3 6 4 3 3 9
2 3 7 5 4 0
3 8 3 4
4 1 3 5
4 2
4 5

7 8 5 6 7 6 7 9
B 4 8
7 7 6 0 7 4
5 7 5 8
3 3 4 9
2 8
5 2
5 9 7 3
2 8
5 1 7 1 4 6
7 0 5 5 A
7 2 2 8
7 1
5 5 6 8
7 0 4 7
7 3
5 3 8 1 6 1
5 4 6 3 6 2
6 1
6 9 5 0 6 4
2 8

2 8 6 5 6 3 F C P 0 2 6 9 6
6 4 6 2

– 20 –
 SF-1118

15 Developer unit
PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 LPLTM3772FCZ1 AU C Plate DN
2 PSHEZ3910FCZZ AB C Doctor sheet
3 XBPSD30P08KS0 AA C Screw (M3´8KS)
4 NGERH1040FCZZ AD C Gear DV1
5 CCLR-0403FC01 AH C DSD collar
6 XRESP50-06000 AA C E type ring (5mm)
7 NBRGC0136FCZ1 AC B Toner box bearing (f6)
8 PRNGP0050FCZZ AE C V ring (f6)
9 PSEL-0443FCZZ AA C Seal MF
10 NROLM1061FCZZ BD C Magnet roller
11 PRNGP0019FCZZ AA C G ring (GTW-6)
12 LPLTM3877FCZZ AD C Plate DVR
13 XRESP40-06000 AA C 4E-Type ring (4mm)
14 LX-WZ0294FCZZ AA C Washer
15 CGERH1041FC01 AG C Gear DVA
16 NGERH1056FCZZ AE C Gear DV2
17 NGERH1057FCZZ AE C Gear DV3
18 XEBSD30P10000 AA C Screw (M3´10)
19 DHAI-2417FCZZ AQ C DV harness
20 XBBSD30P18000 AA C Screw (M3´18)
21 NROLP0845FCZ1 AR C Roller MX
22 PSEL-0676FCZZ AC C Seal DER
23 PSEL-0675FCZZ AC C Seal DEF
24 PSEL-0652FCZZ AC C AG seal
25 LHLDZ1237FCZZ AC C Holder
26 LPLTM2430FCZZ AC C Magnet adjusting plate
27 LX-BZ0529FCZZ AA C Screw
28 LSTPF0262FCZZ AC C Stopper DV
29 CBOX-0085FC02 AY C DV box
30 RDTCT0117FCZZ AZ B ATC
31 XEBSD30P08000 AA C Screw (M3´8)
32 PSHEP2713FCZZ AC C Sheet TB
33 LPLTM4984FCZZ AP C DV scraper
34 XBPBW30P06000 AA C Screw (M3´6)
35 PSEL-0670FCZZ AC C AG seal 2
36 NBRGC0580FCZZ AG B Bearing (f6)
(Unit)
901 C B O X - 0 0 8 5 F C 6 8 BU E Developer unit

– 21 –

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

15 Developer unit

3
4
5
1
2 6
7 1 2 1 1
1 3
1 4
1 5
3 4
3 3
1 0 9
8 1 3 1 6
1 4 3
8 1 5

3 4 8 1 7
1 3

2 2 0 3 6
1 9
8 2 0 1 8
9
2 1
2 2
2 4
3 5

1 9
8
3 1

3 0
2 3
5 2 0 3 1
6 2 5
6 3 2
2 0
2 6 1 3 2 8
2 9
3 6 2 7 F C P 0 2 6 9 7

3 1 3

– 22 –
 SF-1118

16 Fusing unit
PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 XHBSD30P06000 AA C Screw (M3´6)
2 PCOVQ1278FCZZ BA D Fusing cover
3 TCAUH1000FCZZ AE C High temperature caution label
4 XHBSD30P04000 AA C Screw (M3´4)
5 XWHSD30-05080 AA C Washer (3W)
! 6 RTHM-0009FCZZ AK B Thermostat
7 XHBSD30P10000 AA C Screw (M3´10)
8 RDTCT0116FCZZ AR B Thermistor
9 MSPRT1324FCZ1 AA C Delivery spring
10 NROLR1112FCZZ AG C Delivery upper roller A
11 LHLDZ1191FCZZ AC C Lamp holder
12 XEPSD30P08X00 AA C Screw (M3´8X)
13 LFRM-0842FCZ1 AP C Fusing upper frame
14 PBRSR0140FCZ1 AH B Discharge brush
15 MSPRC2348FCZZ AB C Separator pawl spring
16 PTME-0168FCZZ AF S Upper separator pawl
17 LDAIU0488FCZZ AB C Paper guide block R
18 MSPRT2286FCZZ AC C Fusing front paper guide spring
19 PGIDH1548FCZZ AG C Fusing front paper guide
20 LDAIU0487FCZZ AB C Paper guide block F
21 LX-BZ0342FCZZ AB C Screw
22 CBRGP0525FC02 AN B Fusing bearing F
23 NROLT1063FCZ2 BD C Upper heat roller
24 LSTPF0172FCZ1 AA C Roller stopper
25 CBRGP0528FC02 AN B Fusing bearing R
26 NGERH1214FCZZ AP C Fusing gear
! RLMPU0551FCZZ BD B Heater lamp (220V)
27
! RLMPU0553FCZZ BD B Heater lamp (230V/240V)
28 PTUBG0100FCZZ AC C Fusing protect tube
29 LPLTM5010FCZZ AD C Delivery guide plate
30 PWIR-0176FCZZ AP C Fusing wire
31 NROLR1113FCZZ AG C Delivery upper roller B
32 LPLTM5036FCZZ AD C Delivery coller guide plate
33 LPLTM5156FCZZ AE C PG height adjustment plate
34 XXXSP30L15000 AB C Screw
35 PGIDH1765FCZZ AD C Fusing actuator guide
36 PSHEZ4449FCZZ AC C Fusing guide sheet
37 PSHEP4400FCZZ AD C Fusing sheet
38 LSTPP0279FCZZ AB C Stopper
(Unit)
! DUNTW6740FC65 BU E Fusing unit (220V)
901
! DUNTW6740FC67 BU E Fusing unit (240V)

– 23 –

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

16 Fusing unit

2
1
3 0

3 5
3 6
4
3 7 3 1
1 5
1 1 7 6
1 0 3
9 8
1 2 9 3 1

1 5 2 8 9 3 7
a

4
2 8
1 5 1 3
1 4
2 9 1 6
1 6
1 5
2 1 3 2
1 5
4 1 6
3 3
4 1 4 1 2
1 6 3 8
2 4 4
2 9
2 6 1 7 3 4
2 5 1 9
2 4

1 8

2 3
2 0

2 7
2 2 2 1

a '
F C P 0 2 6 9 8

– 24 –
 SF-1118

17 Paper feeding unit

PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 XRESP70-08000 AA C E type ring (7mm)
2 PSHEP2348FCZZ AB C Flange sheet DL
3 NPLYZ0295FCZ1 AM C Transport roller pulley
4 NBRGP0510FCZZ AC C Roller bearing
5 NROLR1059FCZ1 AS C PS front roller
6 MLEVP0669FCZZ AE C PPD actuator
7 CPWBF1086FC32 AP E DPPD1 PWB
8 CPWBF1088FC31 AU E Paper feeding interface PWB
9 XEPSD40P10000 AA C Screw (M4´10)
10 CGERH0406FC01 AE C DV idler gear 24T
11 PCLC-0270FCZZ AW B 22T electromagnetic spring clutch
12 PCLR-0401FCZZ AD C Joint collar 25.3
13 NBRGC2019SCZZ AC C Bearing (f8)
14 PCLC-0237FCZ1 AX B 30T electromagnetic spring clutch
15 NBRGP0191FCZZ AB C PF bearing (f8)
16 CFRM-0841FC01 AL C Paper feeding drive frame
17 LFRM-0840FCZ1 AT N C Paper feeding frame
18 MLEVP0670FCZZ AE C PID actuator
19 LSTPP0314FCZZ AA C E3 stopper
20 NROLP1060FCZZ AF C U-turn roller
21 NSFTZ2130FCZZ AF C U-turn roller shaft
22 LHLDZ1204FCZZ AG C Paper feeding collar holder 250
23 NSFTZ2206FCZZ AK C Roller shaft
24 NROLR1049FCZ1 AU C Paper feeding roller
25 LPINS0133FCZZ AA C Pin (f2-10)
26 NBLTH0235FCZZ AF B Belt (80MXL3.2)
27 NPLYZ0106FCZZ AC C Pulley 22
28 MSPRC2336FCZZ AC C Roller release arm spring
29 MARMP0187FCZZ AC C Roller release arm
30 MSPRC2335FCZZ AK C Limiter spring
31 PCLR-0230FCZZ AD C Collar
32 LPINS0134FCZZ AB C Pin (f2-12)
33 NSFTZ2129FCZZ AP C Paper feeding roller shaft
34 LSTPP0279FCZZ AB C Stopper
35 NROLR0878FCZZ AM C Roller
36 LBNDJ0043FCZZ AA C Snap band
41 PSHEP3906FCZZ AD C Edge protect sheet
42 PMLT-1001FCZZ AC C Cushion
43 NBRGC0584FCZZ AD C Clutch bearing
44 XRESP50-06000 AA C E type ring
46 LX-BZ0193FCZZ AB C Screw
(Unit)
901 C F R M - 0 8 4 1 F C 3 1 BS E Paper feeding unit

– 25 –

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

17 Paper feeding unit

1 5
2
3
1
4

6
4 2

8
9
1 9
4 1
2 0
9
2 1 1
1 8 1 0
2 0 1

1 7
4 3
1 6 4 4
1 3 1
3 6 1 2
9 9
1 1
2 2
3 5

2 4 4 6
2 5 1
1 3
3 4 2 6 1
2 7 1 2 8 2 3 1 4
1 5
2 9
3 0
3 1
3 2 1
3 3

F C P 0 2 6 9 9

– 26 –
 SF-1118

18 Main drive unit

PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 XHPSD30P06000 AA C Screw (M3´6)
2 MSPRP1293FCZZ AB C Electrode spring
3 LX-NZ0089FCZZ AA C Nut
4 LPLTM4778FCZZ AD C Spring plate for AC
5 LPLTM4777FCZZ AD C Spring plate for TC
7 DHAI-2788FCZZ AS C High voltage harness
8 LHLDZ1229FCZZ AN C High voltage holder
9 XHBSE40P08000 AA C Screw (M4´8)
10 RPLU-0304FCZZ AN B Separator solenoid
11 MLEVP0668FCZZ AE C Separator solenoid lever
12 XBPSD20P03000 AA C Screw (M2´3)
13 RMOTN0765FCZZ BL B Main motor
14 PSHEG3831FCZ1 AF C Motor protection sheet
15 XRESP70-08000 AA C E type ring (7mm)
16 NGERH0457FCZZ AC C DV drive gear R 22T
17 PCLR-0401FCZZ AD C Joint collar 25.3
18 LPINS0155FCZZ AA C Pin (f3-10)
19 NBRGC0133FCZ1 AC C PF bearing (f8)
20 XBBSD30P08000 AA C Screw (M3´8)
21 XRESP50-06000 AA C E type ring (5mm)
22 NGERH1031FCZZ AD C 20T gear H
23 LPINS0094FCZZ AB C Pin (f3´8)
24 LFRM-0837FCZZ AH C Drive frame 2
25 NBRGC0136FCZZ AC B Toner box bearing (f6)
26 NGERH0740FCZZ AB C Gear 20T
27 NSFTZ2124FCZ1 AL C DR drive shaft
28 CGERH0754FC01 AK C 28/17T gear
29 CGERH0406FC01 AE C DV idler gear 24T
30 CGERH0267FC01 AF C DV joint gear 19T
31 NGERH0739FCZZ AB C Gear 27T
32 NGERH1030FCZZ AE C 18/28T gear H
33 LX-WZ0314FCZZ AA C Washer
34 MSPRC2276FCZZ AB C Spring
35 PSPAZ0363FCZZ AA C Spacer
36 NGERH0742FCZZ AB C Gear 36T
37 XRESP40-06000 AA C 4E-Type ring (4mm)
38 NGERH1029FCZZ AD C Gear 20T
39 NSFTZ2122FCZZ AL C Main drive shaft 1
40 NGERH1033FCZZ AF C 24/50T gear H
41 NGERH0349FCZZ AC C Gear 28T
42 LX-WZ0421FCZZ AA C Washer
43 CGERH0268FC01 AE C Idle gear 27T
44 NSFTZ2123FCZZ AK C Main drive shaft 2
45 CGERH1032FC01 AT C 32/71T gear H
46 NSFTZ2125FCZZ AK C Fusing drive shaft
47 NGERH0070FCZZ AD C DV gear 36T
48 XBPSD40P12000 AA C Screw (M4´12)
49 VHPGP1A22LC-1 AK B Photo sensor (GP1A22LC)(MHPD)
50 CFRM-0836FC01 AW C Drive frame 1
51 XBPSD40P06000 AA C Screw (M4´6)
52 NPLYZ0258FCZZ AC C Pulley 30P-B
53 PCLR-0367FCZZ AC C Pulley collar
54 QSW-M0431FCZZ AF B Microswitch
55 XHPSD23P10000 AA C Screw (M2.3´10)
56 DHAI-2413FCZZ AD C TFD harness
57 XBBSD40P08000 AA C Screw (4´8)
(Unit)
901 C F R M - 0 8 3 6 F C 7 5 BT E Drive frame unit

– 27 –

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

18 Main drive unit

1 5
1 3
1 6 1 5
1 9 2 1
1 8 5 7 2 0
2 2
1 7 1
9 2 3
1 5 1 2
2 4 1
1 9
2

1 2 1 9 1 4
8
1 5
9
2 6 1 0
1
3 9

5 1 3 7 1 1 5
4 4
3 5 1 8 1 5 3 4
1 9 3 8
4 5 2 1 2 9
1 8 2 1 2 1 1 5 7
3 7 2 5
1 8 3 5 3 6
3 0
4 6 1 5
2 8 2 1
3 5 1 8 4 0 2 7
3 5 3 3
2 6 4 0 1 5 2 1 3 1
4 1 3 4 2 1
1 5 1 8 3 3
3 3 3 3
1 8 1 5 1 9 3 2
2 1 4 2 2 1
3 0
3 1

4 8 1 5 4 3
4 7

4 9

5 4

5 0 5 6 5 5
1 8
4 2
2 5
1 9 5 2
1 5 2 1
5 3

1 5 F C P 0 2 7 0 0

– 28 –
 SF-1118

19 Lower frame 1
PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 NBRGP0593FCZZ AD N C Suction bearing (B-F8-65)
2 NBLTH0170FCZZ AH B Suction belt
3 NROLP1054FCZ1 AF C Suction roller A
4 NBLTH0246FCZZ AK B PS front drive belt
5 XRESP70-08000 AA C E type ring (7mm)
6 PSHEP2348FCZZ AB C Flange sheet DL
7 NPLYZ0297FCZZ AD C Transport roller pulley
8 LPINS0155FCZZ AA C Pin (f3-10)
9 NBRGP0510FCZZ AC C Roller bearing
10 NROLR1055FCZ1 AY C PS roller lower
11 NBRGC0133FCZ1 AC C PF bearing (f8)
12 PCLC-0250FCZ1 AX B PS roller clutch
13 CFRM-0841FC31 BS E Paper feeding unit
14 XHBSE40P10000 AA C Screw (M4´10)
15 XRESP50-06000 AA C E type ring (5mm)
16 NBRGC0188FCZZ AB B PF bearing
17 NROLR1056FCZ3 AY C Delivery roller
18 LPINS0133FCZZ AA C Pin (f2-10)
19 NGERH0866FCZZ AC C Gear (22T)
20 XEBSD40P08000 AA C Screw (M4´8)
21 PTME-0244FCZZ AG C Lower separator pawl
22 MSPRT2521FCZZ AC C Lower separator pawl spring
23 PGIDH1718FCZZ AM C Derivery guide PG
24 NBRGY0513FCZZ AK C Pressure roller bearing
25 NROLR1058FCZ3 BH C Pressure roller
26 CFRM-0839FC01 AZ C Lower frame F
27 CLEVF0766FC01 AG N C Pressure lever F
28 MSPRC2416FCZZ AD C Pressure spring
29 CLEVF0767FC01 AG N C Pressure lever R
30 XEPSD30P08000 AA C Screw (M3´8)
31 LSTPP0274FCZZ AA C Reversing roller stopper
32 NGERH1034FCZZ AF C Suction roller gear 25T
33 CFRM-0838FC01 BC C Lower frame R
34 MSPRC2281FCZZ AC C AC earth spring
35 MSPRC2280FCZZ AC C TC pressure spring
36 PSHEP4594FCZZ AD N C PS front sheet F
37 PSHEP4595FCZZ AD N C PS front sheet R
38 CROLR1052FC33 AX E Reversing roller unit
39 LPLTM4887FCZZ AY C W base reinforce plate
41 XHBSD40P12000 AA C Screw (M4´12)
42 MARMP0190FCZ1 AG C Separator roller release arm
43 MSPRC2367FCZZ AK C Separator roller pressure spring 2
44 LHLDZ1238FCZ1 AE C Separator arm holder
45 LDAIU0515FCZZ AG C Tray lock block base
46 LPLTM4885FCZZ AG C W base PF reinforce plate
47 GLEGG0063FCZZ AE C Rubber foot
48 PSHEP4116FCZZ AF C PS lower sheet
52 GDAI-0166FCZ1 BN D Base plate
53 LSTPP0260FCZZ AB C Blancer stopper
54 MSPRB2278FCZZ AY B Blancer spring
55 MSPRB2350FCZZ AY B Blancer spring
56 NSFTZ2133FCZZ AH C Blancer shaft
57 XBPSD40P30K00 AA C Screw (M4´30)
59 XHBSE40P10000 AA C Screw (4´10)
60 PMLT-0995FCZZ AC C Suction cushion A
61 PDUC-0093FCZZ AL C Suction duct
62 RMOTE0700FCZZ AX B Suction Fan
63 PFILZ0267FCZZ AU B Suction filter
67 LPLTM4980FCZZ AK C Suction duct plate
68 XEBSD40P30000 AA C Screw (M4´30)
69 NBRGP0547FCZZ AD C Suction bearing
70 PSHEP3827FCZZ AE C Suction lower sheet
71 XBBSD40P14000 AA C Screw (4´14)
72 MSPRC2370FCZZ AK C Separator roller pressure spring 3
73 LX-BZ0193FCZZ AB C Screw (3´4)
74 MSPRC2417FCZZ AD C TC pressure spring F
75 XEPSD30P08X00 AA C Screw (3´8X)
76 PSPAZ0695FCZZ AC C Base plate frame spacer
77 XBPSD30P08K00 AA C Screw (3´8K)
78 XNESD30-24000 AA C Nut
79 LBNDJ0013FCZ1 AA C Wire band
80 DHAI-2511FCZZ AF C Upper lower joint harness
83 PMLT-1153FCZZ AC C Protect cushion
86 XHBSD40P14000 AA C Screw (4´14)
87 LBSHZ2029SCZZ AB C Bushing (LCBS-3NS)

– 29 –

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

19 Lower frame 1

1 2
4 5
6 7
8 3
5
1 4
2
3
9

1 3
1
1 0

1 7
2 4
5 9 2 0 2 2
5 7
5 3 1 4 2 1 2 1 1 8
2 0 2 1 1 9
7 9 2 2
2 2
1 5 2 0 6 9
1 5 2 3
5 6 2 0 7 0
1 6
5 5 5 6 2 5
2 0 1 5 2 4
2 0 2 0 3 0
2 9
5 3 2 0
2 8 2 8 1 1 7 3
2 7 3 1 5
3 0 8 7
5 3 2 6 5 7
2 0 3 3
5 4
8 0 1 5 1 2
2 0
2 0 1 6
7 4 1 1 5
2 0
7 6 7 5
2 0 2 0
7 7 3 4 3 2
5 2 3 5
6 9
4 5 5 3
2 0 7 8
3 8
8 3
7 1
4 2 2 0
3 6 4 7
4 3
4 7 6 1
7 2 3 7 8 3
4 4 6 2

6 0
3 9
2 0
8 6
4 7 4 1 6 8
2 0
4 6 2 0
4 7
2 0
6 3
8 6 4 1 4 8
6 7
F C P 0 2 7 0 1
2 0

– 30 –
 SF-1118

20 Lower frame 2
PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 LPLTP4760FCZZ AQ C AC PWB fixing plate
2 CPWBF1215FC53 BN E AC circuit PWB
3 XEPSD40P08000 AA C Screw (M4´8)
4 XBPSD40P25XS0 AA C Screw (M4´25XS)
5 XBPSD40P10KS0 AA C Screw (M4´10KS)
6 LFIX-0016FCZZ AD C AC cord holder
7 XBPSD40P08K00 AA C Screw (M4´8K)
8 XBPSD40P06000 AA C Screw (M4´6)
9 LPLTM4761FCZZ AF C AC PWB plate
10 XHPSD40P08000 AA C Screw (M4´8)
11 XBPSD30P16000 AA C Screw (M3´16)(200V series)
12 QTANN0015FCZZ AG C 3P terminal base (200V series)
13 DHAI-2424FCZZ AH C 3P terminal base harness (200V series)
! QACCV6420QCN2 AU B AC cord(f 4.8-2P) (Thailand)
! 14 QCNW-0001QCZZ AN B AC wire (Singapore,Malaysia)
! QPLGA0003QCZZ AN B AC plug (Singapore,Malaysia)
15 RCILF0045FCZZ AN C Earth inductor coil (200V series)
! RTRNP0540FCZZ BD N B Power transformer (220V)
16
! RTRNP0542FCZZ BF B Power transformer (230V/240V)
! 17 CPWBF1216FC52 BL E DC power supply PWB
18 LSUPP0084FCZZ AB C PWB supporter (LCBS-5)
19 CPWBF1315FC51 AT N E CSD PWB
21 DHAI-2905FC12 BA N C Lower unit main harness
22 XHBSD40P08000 AA C Screw (M4´8)
23 CFRM-0838FC01 BC C Lower frame R
24 NGERH0515FCZZ AC C 27T gear
25 XRESP70-08000 AA C E type ring (7mm)
26 MSPRT2283FCZZ AC C Joint arm spring
27 CARMM0192FC01 AE C Joint arm
28 NGERH1015FCZZ AD C PS joint gear 25T
29 NGERH0205FCZZ AC C Fusing knob gear 20T
30 NGERH0147FCZZ AF C Gear 56T
31 NGERH1035FCZZ AE C 20/40T gear
32 XHBSD40P08000 AA C Screw (M4´8)
33 PSHEZ3908FCZZ AF C AC PWB protect sheet (200V series)
34 XHBSD40P06000 AA C Screw (4´6)(200V series)
35 PSHEP3953FCZZ AD C Lower harness protect sheet
36 LBSHC0335FCZZ AC C Edge protect
37 LHLDW1013FCZZ AB C Cable holder
38 PSHEP4047FCZZ AD C DC PWB protect sheet
39 PSHEP4109FCZZ AD C AC fixing plate sheet
40 PTPE-0217FCZZ AC C Harness fixing tape
41 LBNDJ0013FCZ1 AA C Wire band

– 31 –

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

20 Lower frame 2

2 0 0 V S e r ie s
1 3 1 5
3 9

1 1 4
1 1
2

1 2

4 5
8
7
1 0 3 3
9 6

1 6
1 0
4 1
1 4

3 4
1 7

3 8
2 3 3 5

1 8
2 2 3 7
2 1
2 9
3 6 2 4
2 7
3 0
2 6
2 8 2 5
1 9

2 5
2 1
4 0
3 1
3 2
2 5

2 1
3 2 F C P 0 2 7 0 2

– 32 –
 SF-1118

21 Manual multi paper feeding unit

PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 DHAI-2415FCZZ AH C Manual feed multi harness
2 LX-BZ0771FCZZ AC C Screw
3 XEPSD40P08000 AA C Screw (M4´8)
4 PGIDH1581FCZZ AN C Manual feed multi upper paper guide
5 NBRGP0302FCZZ AB C Bearing C
6 XRESP40-06000 AA C 4E-Type ring (4mm)
7 MARMP0116FCZZ AC C Manual paper feed arm A
8 LSTPP0278FCZZ AC C Manual feed stopper
9 MARMP0117FCZ1 AD C Manual paper feed arm B
10 PRNGP0081FCZZ AA C E4 ring
11 NSFTZ2183FCZ1 AM C Manual paper feeding shaft
12 MSPRT2320FCZZ AC C Manual feed arm spring
13 CROLP0921FC01 AM C Manual feed take-up roller
14 MARMP0194FCZZ AG C Manual paper feed arm
15 NGERH0892FCZZ AB C 16T gear
16 LPINS0165FCZZ AB C Pin (f2-8)
17 NGERH0495FCZZ AC C Gear 20T
18 NROLR1051FCZZ AT C Manual paper feed roller
19 CROLR1048FC51 AV E Reversing roller unit
20 PGIDM1582FCZ1 AV N C Manual feed lower paper guide
21 MSPRC2366FCZZ AC C Separator roller spring 2
22 MSPRT2321FCZZ AB C Separator roller spring
23 PSHEP3903FCZZ AC C Manual feed sheet 1
24 PSHEZ3945FCZZ AD C Manual feed sheet
25 PSHEP3904FCZZ AC C Manual feed sheet 2
26 XHBSD30P08000 AA C Screw (M3´8)
27 LFRM-0745FCZZ AE C Manual feed solenoid frame
28 MSPRC1317FCZZ AA C Spring A
29 MLEVP0739FCZZ AD C Manual paper feeding lever N2
30 MLEVP0738FCZZ AC C Manual paper feeding lever N
32 RPLU-0279FCZZ AN B Manual feeding solenoid
33 MSPRC1318FCZZ AA C Spring B
34 LBOSZ0979FCZZ AF C Manual feed clutch boss A
35 PPIPP0109FCZZ AB C Pipe A
36 MSPRC1315FCZZ AD C Manual feed clutch spring A
37 LBOSZ1124FCZZ AF C Manual feed CL boss 36T
38 MSPRC1544FCZZ AE C Manual feed clutch spring
39 PPIPP0124FCZZ AB C Manual feed CL sleeve
40 LBOSZ1125FCZZ AC C Manual feed clutch boss
41 XHBSD40P08000 AA C Screw (M4´8)
42 CPLTM4896FC01 AN C Manual feed drive plate
43 LBSHC0327FCZZ AC C Multi bush
44 NGERH1060FCZZ AE C 15T gear
45 NGERH1079FCZZ AE C 41T gear
46 XRESP50-06000 AA C E type ring (5mm)
47 LBNDJ0043FCZ1 AA C Snap band
48 PSHEP3905FCZZ AE C Manual feed sheet 3
49 LPLTM5008FCZZ AE C Manual feed sub plate
50 PSPAZ0679FCZZ AC C Manual feed spacer
51 XRESP70-08000 AA C E type ring
52 PSHEP4345FCZZ AC C Manual guide sheet

– 33 –

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

21 Manual multi paper feeding unit

1
2

4
5 1 5
B
3 6
A
4 3
4 8
4 2
4 4 7
4 7 2 5
4 5
4 1 4 6 9 8
4 9 4 0
3 9
3 8
3 7 1 2
6 4 8
1 0 1 1 1 3 1 5
A
6 4 1
1 7 1 6
3 5 1 7
3 4 6 1 4
6 3 4
1 6 5 2
3 6 5 6
3 3 1 8
B 1 9 6

2 4
3 2 2 9
2 3
2 0
3 0
5 0

2 8

2 6
2 7

2 1
2 2

F C P 0 2 7 0 3

– 34 –
 SF-1118

22 Manual multi paper feeding tray unit

PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 PGIDM1584FCZZ AF C Manual feeding guide R
2 PGIDM1583FCZZ AF C Manual feeding guide F
3 MARMP0195FCZZ AD C Tray arm
4 TLABZ4011FCZZ AE C Manual feed size label
5 XEBSE30P08000 AA C Screw (M3´8)
6 LSOU-0141FCZ1 AR D Manual feeding tray upper
7 NGERR0878FCZZ AD C Manual feeding gear
8 XWHSD30-05070 AA C Washer (3HW)
9 XEBSD30P06000 AA C Screw (3´6)
10 PSHEZ1760FCZZ AB C Manual feed gear brake sheet
11 NGERH0193FCZZ AB C UC manual feed gear
12 XWHSD30-08100 AA C Washer (f3)
13 LSOU-0142FCZZ AQ D Manual feeding tray lower
14 LPLTP4897FCZ1 AK C Manual feeding slide plate
15 LSOU-0144FCZZ AL D Manual feeding tray inner
21 LSTPP0315FCZZ AD C Tray arm stopper
22 XHBSE40P08000 AA C Screw (M4´8)
23 LX-WZ0256FCZZ AA C Washer
24 PGIDM1582FCZ1 AV N C Manual feed lower paper guide
25 CPLTP5276FC01 AG C Manual feeding
26 PSHEP4026FCZ1 AC C Name plate sheet

22 Manual multi paper feeding tray unit

2 1

2 5 2 2
2

4 3 2 6
5
5
6

2 2 7
2 3
2 1
5 5 1 0 7
2 4 8
1 1 8
9
9
3 1 2
9

1 4
1 3
1 5 F C P 0 2 7 0 4

– 35 –

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

25 MC unit
PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 LPLTZ5474FCZZ AH C Grid
2 XEPSD30P06000 AA C Screw (M3´6)
3 QSLP-0158FCZ1 AE C MC grid electrode
4 PCOVP1130FCZZ AB C MC cover R
5 XBPSD30P10000 AA C Screw (M3´10)
6 LHLDZ1095FCZZ AD C MC holder R
7 QSLP-0157FCZZ AE C MC electrode
8 LPLTM4067FCZZ AN C MC plate R
9 CPLTM4129FC01 AS C Plate
10 LHLDZ1094FCZZ AD C MC holder F
11 LPLTM4068FCZZ AM C MC plate L
12 LHLDZ0932FCYZ AD C Grid holder
13 LX-BZ4008SC0M AA C Screw (M4´8)
14 XBPSD30P20000 AA C Screw (M3´20)
15 XBPSD30P04000 AA C Screw (M3´4)
16 XBBSD40P12000 AA C Screw (M4´12)
(Unit)
901 C P L T M 4 0 6 7 F C 7 3 BC E MC unit

25 MC unit

F C P 0 2 7 0 5

– 36 –
 SF-1118

26 TC case unit
PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 PGIDM1547FCZ3 AK C TC transport guide
2 DWIR-0466CSZZ BG B Charger wire
3 MSPRT1395FCZZ AA C Spring M
4 XEPSD30P06000 AA C Screw (M3´6)
5 LPLTM3749FCZZ AC C TC fixing plate
6 PCOVP1275FCZ1 AC C TC holder cover R
7 LHLDZ1231FCZ2 AH N C TC holder R
8 MSPRP1550FCZZ AA C TC spring
9 PCOVP1274FCZ1 AC C TC holder cover F
10 LHLDZ1230FCZ1 AG C TC holder F
11 PCASZ0271FCZZ AH C TC case
12 PGIDH1546FCZZ AH C TC paper guide
13 PSHEP3832FCZZ AE C TC sheet
14 PGIDM1597FCZZ AP C TC joint guide
15 PSPAZ0674FCZZ AC C TC PG lower spacer
(Unit)
901 C C A S Z 0 2 7 1 F C 7 1 BB E TC case unit

26 TC case unit

4
3 6
3 5
1 4
3
3 5
2
7

9 8
4
4
4
1 5
1 2
1 0 1 1

1 3

1 1
4

1 4

F C P 0 2 7 0 6
4

– 37 –

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

27 250 Tray
PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 GCASP0167FCZ1 BB N D 250 Tray
2 LPLTP5028FCZZ AE C Tray rear plate
4 LPLTP3757FCZ2 AK N C Side plate R
7 XEPSD40P08000 AA C Screw (M4´8)
8 MSPRC1873FCZZ AB C Return spring 250
9 PCUSF0319FCZZ AE C Tray cushion
10 LPLTP3756FCZ1 AG C Side plate F
11 MSPRC1804FCZZ AA C Side plate ST spring
12 LSTPP0255FCZ1 AD C Side plate stopper
13 LPLTM3909FCZZ AD C Side plate sub plate
14 LX-WZ2028SCZZ AA C Washer
15 XEPSD30P08000 AA C Screw (M3´8)
16 XEBSD40P12000 AA C Screw (M4´12)
17 LDAIU0509FCZZ AD C Off center adjusting block
18 JKNBP0126FCZZ AT C Tray handle
19 LPLTP4782FCZZ AH C Size display plate
20 NGERR1048FCZZ AG C Tray rack gear R
21 NGERR1047FCZZ AF C Tray rack gear F
22 NGERH0193FCZZ AB C UC manual feed gear
23 MLEVP0671FCZZ AE C PE actuator
28 XWVSD40-05000 AA C Washer
29 XEBSD40P08000 AA C Screw (4´8)
(Unit)
901 C C A S P 0 1 6 7 F C 4 5 BG N E Tray unit(Not this includes NO19)

27 250 Tray 7

4
9

8 7
1 1
1 0 1 2

2 1 3
1 4
1 1 5

2 9

2 9

2 3
2 1 1 6
2 9 2 8
2 2
2 0
1 4

1 5
1 9 1 8

2 9

1 7

F C P 0 2 7 0 7

– 38 –
 SF-1118

28 Packing material & Accessories

PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 SPAKA5626FCZZ AE D Top fixing cushion
2 SPAKA5524FCZZ AT D Top packing cushion A
3 CSOU-0090FC01 AS D Delivery tray
5 CPAKA5181FC05 BB D Bottom case
6 SPAKC5770FC18 BB N D Packing case
7 TINSE1653FCZZ AX N D Operation manual (English)
8 SPAKA5317FCZZ AF D OC packing cushion L
9 SPAKA5318FCZZ AD D OC packing cushion R
10 SSAKA3001CCZZ AA D Vinyl bag (140´360 ço)
11 PSHEZ4024FCZZ AE D Operation protect sheet
12 SPAKA5559FCZZ AR D Top packing cushion AR
101 LX-BZ0578FCZZ AC C Lens fixing screw
102 LX-BZ0649FCZZ AB C 2nd,3rd mirror fixing screw
103 LX-BZ0772FCZZ AD C 4th,5th mirror lock screw
104 LX-WZ0075FCZZ AA C Washer
105 SPAKA4693FCZZ AE D Packing cushion
106 TCADZ1178FCZZ AB D Caution card
107 CCASZ0067FC01 AD D Maintenance card
109 SSAKA2440QCZZ AB D Vinyl bag for accessories (280´410mm)
114 TCADZ1300FCZZ AB D Caution card
115 PCUSF0338FCZZ AC C 2nd,3rd mirror lock cushion
116 PSHEZ4137FCZZ AC D Cabinet protect sheet
117 SPAKA5377FCZZ AE D 4th,5th mirror fixing cushion
119 TCADZ1159FCZZ AA D Caution card
120 TLABZ3996FCZZ AD C Size label 13
123 TCADZ1354FCZZ AF N D Advise card
125 LHLDW0544FCZZ AC C Crip (FCA-10)
126 LPLTP5324FCZZ AQ C Rear plate
127 PSHEZ0287FCZZ AG D Body vinyl sheet

28 Packing material & Accessories

1 2
2

6 7
1 1

3 9

1 0 8

F C P 0 2 7 0 8

– 39 –

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

29 Main PWB
PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 PRDAR0069FCZZ AG C Heat sink (DPS25-30)
2 PSHEP3223FCZZ AB C IC socket protect sheet
3 QCNCM0877FCZZ AF C Connector (20Pin) [CN1]
4 QCNCM0878FCZZ AF C Connector (30Pin) [CN4,5]
5 QCNCM0879FCZZ AF C Connector (28Pin) [CN2]
6 QCNCM7014SC0D AB C Connector (4pin) [CN3]
! 7 QFS-D1328QCZZ AE A Fuse (1.6A 125V) [F1]
8 QFSHA0025FCZZ AA C Fuse holder (S-N5057-01)
9 QSOCZ2051SC32 AC C IC socket (32pin)
10 QSOCZ6408ACZZ AB C IC socket (8pin)
11 RC-AZ0358FCZZ AE B Capacitor [C58]
12 RCRM-0001FCZZ AD B Ceramic oscilator (8.00MHz) [X1]
13 RH-DZ0016FCZZ AB B Diode (MA700) [D38,Da2]
14 RMPTC4103QCJB AD B Block resistor (10KW´4 1/8W ±5%) [BR4,BR5]
15 RMPTC5102QCJB AB B Block resistor (1.0KW´5 1/8W ±5%) [BR9]
16 RMPTC5103QCJB AD B Block resistor (10KW´5 1/8W ±5%) [BR8]
17 RMPTC6223QCJB AB B Block resistor (22KW´6 1/8W ±5%) [BR7,10]
18 RMPTC6272QCJB AC B Block resistor (2.7KW´6 1/8W ±5%) [BR6]
19 RMPTC8103QCJB AC B Block resistor (10KW´8 1/8W ±5%) [BR1,2,3]
20 VCEAGU1AW476M AA C Capacitor (10WV 47mF) [C1,56,Ca16]
21 VCEAGA1AW477M AB C Capacitor (10WV 470mF) [C5,11]
22 VCEAGU1HW105M AA C Capacitor (50WV 1.0mF) [C4]
23 VCEAGA1HW224M AA C Capacitor (50WV 0.22mF) [C6,7]
24 VCEAGU1HW476M AB C Capacitor (50WV 47mF) [C3]
25 VCEAGA1VW106M AA C Capacitor (35WV 10mF) [C2]
26 VCEAGU1CW477M AC C Capacitor (16WV 470mF) [C9]
27 VCEAGU1VW477M AD C Capacitor (35WV 470mF) [C10]
Capacitor (50WV 1000PF)
28 V C K Y T Q 1 H B 1 0 2 K AA C
[Ca15,C13~15,18~20,24,25,28,34~35,38~40,43,50~53,57]
29 V C K Y T Q 1 H B 2 2 2 K AA C Capacitor (50WV 2200PF) [C17,29,49]
Capacitor (50WV 0.022mF)
30 V C K Y T Q 1 H B 2 2 3 K AB C
[Ca1~a5,a10~a14,C12,21~23,27,30,31,33,37,41,42,44~47,54,55,60]
31 VCKYTQ1HB471K AB C Capacitor (50WV 470PF) [C16,26]
32 VCQYNU1HM103K AA C Capacitor (50WV 0.010mF) [C8]
33 VCQYNU1HM104K AB C Capacitor (50WV 0.1mF) [C48]
34 VCQYNU1HM224K AC C Capacitor (50WV 0.22mF) [Ca17]
35 VHDDAN202K/-1 AB B Diode (DAN202K) [D3,8,9,12,17,19,27,36,39,55~57,61,73]
36 VHDDAP202K/-1 AB B Diode (DAP202K) [D11,13,18,20,24,29,34,43,45,47,63,64,68]
37 VHDDSM1D1//-U AB B Diode (DSM1D1) [D1,2,16,48~54]
38 VHDDSS133//-1 AA B Diode (DSS133) [D23]
39 VHDRU3M////-1 AC B Diode (RU3M) [D4,5]
40 VHEHZS5B3//-1 AB B Zener diode (HZS5B3) [ZD2]
41 VHERD18EL3/-1 AB B Zener diode (RD18EL3) [ZD3]
42 VHERD22FB//-1 AD B Zener diode (RD22FB) [ZD1]
43 VHIH83041K12F BB B IC (H83041K12F) [IC6]
44 VHILM324N//-1 AK B IC (LM324N) [IC14,17]
45 VHIM51953BL-1 AF B IC (M51953BL) [IC13]
46 VHINJM2901N-1 AK B IC (NJM2901N) [IC20]
47 VHISLA7024MT/ AS B IC (SLA7024MT) [IC1]
48 VHISN74HC151N AG B IC (SN74HC151N) [IC15,23]
49 VHISN74HC373S AG B IC (SN74HC373S) [ICA2~4]
50 VHISN74LS138N AG B IC (SN74LS138N) [ICA1]
51 VHIST25C04FB6 AM B IC (ST25C04FB6) [IC4]
52 VHITA7291S/-1 AF B IC (TA7291S) [IC5]
53 VHITD62504/-1 AG B IC (TD62504) [IC3,10,11,18]
54 VHIULN2004AN1 AE B IC (ULN2004AN1) [IC2,9,19]
55 VHI27C010D3FC AX N B IC (27C010D3FC) [IC7]
56 VHI74F02SJ/-1 AF B IC (74F02SJ) [ICA5]
57 VHI74HC04//-1 AE B IC (74HC04) [IC21]
58 VHI74HC139/-1 AG B IC (74HC139) [IC12]
59 VRD-HT2EY103J AA C Resistor (1/4W 10KW ±5%) [R96,97]
60 VRD-HT2EY271J AA C Resistor (1/4W 270W ±5%) [R25,35]
61 VRD-HT2EY621J AA C Resistor (1/4W 620KW ±5%) [R64]
62 VRNHT2HK1000F AC C Resistor (1/2W 200W ±1%) [R45,52]
63 VRS-HT3DA1R0J AB C Resistor (2W 1.0W ±5%) [R1,2]
64 VRS-HT3LAR22J AC C Resistor (3.0W 0.22W ±5%) [R3]
65 VRS-ST3AB180J AA C Resistor (1W 18W ±5%) [R4]
66 VRS-TS2AD101J AA C Resistor (1/10W 100W ±5%) [R37,42]
67 VRS-TS2AD102J AA C Resistor (1/10W 1.0KW ±5%) [R28,34,40,51,53,54,61,67,70,72,77,99]
Resistor (1/10W 10KW ±5%)
68 V R S - T S 2 A D 1 0 3 J AA C
[Ra1,a5,a6,a9~a10,R18,19,22,24,26,30,31,38,65,66,78,84,85,88,103]
69 VRS-TS2AD104J AA C Resistor (1/10W 100KW ±5%) [R48,50,60]
70 VRS-TS2AD105J AA C Resistor (1/10W 1.0MW ±5%) [R87]
71 VRS-TS2AD152J AA C Resistor (1/10W 1.5KW ±5%) [R94]
72 VRS-TS2AD153F AA C Resistor (1/10W 15KW ±1%) [R44]
73 VRS-TS2AD162J AA C Resistor (1/10W 1.6KW ±5%) [R86]
74 VRS-TS2AD202J AA C Resistor (1/10W 2KW ±5%) [R6,69,73]
75 VRS-TS2AD222J AA C Resistor (1/10W 2.2KW ±5%) [R90]
76 VRS-TS2AD242D AA C Resistor (1/10W 2.4KW) [R57,58]
77 VRS-TS2AD242J AA C Resistor (1/10W 2.4KW ±5%) [R15,23]

– 40 –
 SF-1118

29 Main PWB
PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
78 VRS-TS2AD243F AB C Resistor (1/10W 24KW ±1%) [R74,76]
79 VRS-TS2AD243J AA C Resistor (1/10W 24KW ±5%) [R21,79]
80 VRS-TS2AD271F AA C Resistor (1/10W 270W ±1%) [R47]
81 VRS-TS2AD272J AA C Resistor (1/10W 2.7KW ±5%) [R8,12,29,32]
82 VRS-TS2AD392J AA C Resistor (1/10W 3.9KW ±5%) [R83]
83 VRS-TS2AD472F AA C Resistor (1/10W 4.7KW ±1%) [R89]
84 VRS-TS2AD472J AA C Resistor (1/10W 4.7KW ±5%) [R62]
85 VRS-TS2AD473F AA C Resistor (1/10W 47KW ±1%) [R92]
86 VRS-TS2AD473J AA C Resistor (1/10W 47KW ±5%) [R5,17,20,27,63,71,98]
87 VRS-TS2AD561J AA C Resistor (1/10W 560W ±1%) [Ra2~4]
88 VRS-TS2AD562J AA C Resistor (1/10W 5.6KW ±5%) [R7,13,36,39,41,55,68,Ra8]
89 VRS-TS2AD621J AA C Resistor (1/10W 620W ±5%) [R14,16]
90 VRS-TS2AD622F AA C Resistor (1/10W 6.2KW ±1%) [R49]
91 VRS-TS2AD622J AA C Resistor (1/10W 6.2KW ±5%) [R10]
92 VRS-TS2AD681J AA C Resistor (1/10W 680W ±5%) [R11,93]
93 VRS-TS2AD682J AA C Resistor (1/10W 6.8KW ±5%) [R95]
94 VRS-TS2AD750F AA C Resistor (1/10W 75W ±1%) [R46]
95 VRS-TS2AD750J AA C Resistor (1/10W 75W ±5%) [R75]
96 VRS-TS2AD751F AA C Resistor (1/10W 750W ±1%) [R43]
97 VRS-TS2AD752D AA C Resistor (1/10W 7.5KW) [R56,59]
98 VRS-TS2AD822J AA C Resistor (1/10W 8.2KW ±5%) [R91]
99 VSDTA123YS/-1 AB B Transistor (DTA123YS) [Q1~3]
100 VS2SA673-C/-1 AE B Transistor (2SA673) [Q5]
101 VS2SC945///-1 AD B Transistor (2SC945) [Q4,6~8]
102 VS2SK1286//-1 AH B Transistor (2SK1286) [FET1]
103 XBPSD30P08K00 AA C Screw (M3´8K)
(Unit)
901 C P W B N 1 3 0 1 F C 5 2 BV N E Main PWB

30 Operation PWB
PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 DHAI-2496FCZZ AH C OP joint harness
2 QCNCW0892FCZZ AD C Connector (6pin) [CN A]
3 QCNCW0893FCZZ AE C Connector (10pin) [CN B]
Tact switch (SKHVPB) [0~9,C,CA,JOB SW,MSK,EX L,EX R,HE SW,INTERRUPT,
4 QSW-P0465FCZZ AC B
RATIO H,RATIO L,DPC,SORTER,CS,100%,EXPOSURE,ZOOM L,ZOOM H]
5 QSW-P0469FCZZ AD B Push switch (SKHWAC) [R]
6 VCEAJU1CW476M AB C Capacitor (16WV 47mF) [C5,10]
7 VCKYPU1HB331K AA C Capacitor (50WV 330PF) [C1~4,6~9]
8 VCKYPU1HF223Z AA C Capacitor (50WV 0.022mF) [C11]
9 VHDDSS133//-1 AA B Diode (DSS133) [D1~17]
10 VHIM66313FP-1 AN B IC (M66313FP) [IC1]
11 VHPLB603MF/-1 AQ B LED (LB603MF) [LED1]
12 VHPSEL2213C// AB B Photo transistor (SEL2213C) [M,D,T]
LED (SLR322MC3F) [SORT,GROUP,DUAL,HE,AUTO,MANUAL,PHOTO,EX1~5,
13 V H P S L R 3 2 2 M C 3 F AC B
PS1~7,P1,4,D200,141,122,115,100,86,81,70,50,ZOOM,I,SSORT,MSL,PS,P]
14 VHPSLR322VC3F AC B LED (SLR322VC3F) [P2,3,5,P,J3,5]
15 VRD-HT2EY102J AA C Resistor (1/4W 1KW ±5%) [R42~45]
16 VRD-HT2EY103J AA C Resistor (1/4W 10KW ±5%) [R1,16~19,24~27]
17 VRD-HT2EY123J AA C Resistor (1/4W 12KW ±5%) [R3]
18 VRD-HT2EY513J AA C Resistor (1/4W 51KW ±5%) [R2]
19 VRD-HT2EY561J AA C Resistor (1/4W 560W ±5%) [R20~23]
20 VRD-HT2EY562J AA C Resistor (1/4W 5.6KW ±5%) [R4,28~30]
21 VRD-HT2EY750J AA C Resistor (1/4W 75W ±5%) [R5~15,31~41,46,47,]
22 VS2SB1240-/-1 AD B Transistor (2SB1240) [TR2~5]
23 VS2SD1991A/-1 AD N B Transistor (2SD1991A) [TR1]
(Unit)
901 C P W B F 1 3 0 3 F C 5 1 BN N E Operation PWB

33 AC circuit PWB
PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 DHAI-2408FCZZ AD C AC PWB harness [FG]
2 PRDAR0066FCZZ AH C AC PWB heat sink
3 PSHEZ3777FCZZ AD C Insulator sheet
5 QCNCM0883FCZZ AD C Connector (4pin) [CN203]
6 QCNCM0882FCZZ AD C Connector (2pin)(Red) [CN202]
7 QCNCM7014SC0D AB C Connector (4pin) [CN204]
8 QCNCW0690FCZZ AB C Connector (2pin) [CN201]
! 9 QFS-C1500QCZZ AF A Fuse (10A 240V) [F201]
! 10 QFS-D1326QCZZ AD A Fuse (T3.15A 250V) [F203]

– 41 –

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

33 AC circuit PWB
PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
12 QFSHA0025FCZZ AA C Fuse holder (S-N5057-01) [for F203]
13 QFSHD0001QCZZ AA C Fuse holder (C2680R-H) [for F201]
14 QTANP0115FCZZ AB C Tab terminal (T86032) [L,N]
15 RC-KZ472ANC3A AD C Capacitor (1KV 4700pF) [C201,202]
16 RCILF0043FCZ1 AL C Coil [L202]
18 RMPTA0031FCZZ AE B CR mix part (ECQ-J0186X) [CR201,202]
! 20 RR-XZ0338FCZZ AC B Fuse resistor (1W 820W) [FR201]
21 RRLYJ3100QCZZ AN B Relay [RY201]
22 VCEAGU1VW107M AB C Capacitor (35WV 100mF) [C209]
23 VCFYEG2EA224M AE C Capacitor (250WV 0.22mF) [C203,204]
24 VCQYNU1HM104K AB C Capacitor (50WV 0.10mF) [C205,210]
25 VCQYNU1HM473K AB C Capacitor (0.047mF) [C208]
26 VCQYNU1HM474K AD C Capacitor (50WV 0.47mF) [C206,207]
27 VHDD1N60///-1 AC B Diode (D1N60) [D201]
28 VHDS1WBA60S-1 AD B Diode (S1WBA60S) [BD201]
29 VHIHS4602//-1 AT B IC (HS4602) [IC201]
30 VHPPC112LY2-1 AF B Photo transistor (PC112LY2) [PC201]
31 VHRS21MD3V/-1 AE B Photo thyristor (S21MD3V) [SSR201,202]
32 VHSTM1661P-LF AQ B Thyristor (TM1661P) [TD201]
33 VHSTM1661S-LF AK B CL triac (TM1661S) [TD202]
34 VRD-HT2EY474J AA C Resistor (1/4W 470KW ±5%) [R203]
35 RR-NZ0442FCZZ AB C Resistor (1/2W 412KW ±5%) [R209,210]
36 VRS-HT2HA101J AA C Resistor (1/2W 100W ±5%) [R204,206]
37 VRS-HT2HA201J AA C Resistor (1/2W 200W ±5%) [R205,211]
38 VRS-RE3LA103J AB C Resistor (3W 10KW ±5) [R207,208]
39 XBPSD30P06000 AA C Screw (3´6)
40 XBPSD30P08K00 AA C Screw (3´8K)
41 XBPSD30P10K00 AA C Screw (3´10K)
42 RCILF0082FCZZ AP C Coil (8mF) [L201]
(Unit)
901 C P W B F 1 2 1 5 F C 5 3 BN E AC circuit PWB

34 DC Power supply PWB

PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 DHAI-2746FCZZ AH C DC I/F harness [CN301]
2 LPLTM4981FCZZ AG C DC protect plate
3 PRDAR0078FCZZ AK C DC PWB heat sink A
4 PRDAR0079FCZZ AL C DC PWB heat sink B
5 PRDAR0080FCZZ AK C Heat sink (DPS25-30)
6 QCNCW0903FCZZ AF C Connector (22Pin) [CN302]
! 7 QFS-D1326QCZZ AD A Fuse (T3.15 250V) [F303]
! 8 QFS-D1328QCZZ AE A Fuse (T1.6A 250V) [F302]
! 9 QFS-D1423QCZZ AE A Fuse (T6.3A 250V) [F301]
10 QFSHB0024FCZZ AB C Fuse holder [for F301,302,303]
11 VCEAAL1HC822M AK C Capacitor (50WV 8200pF) [C301]
13 VCEAEW1EC222M AF C Capacitor (25WV 2200pF) [C310]
14 VCEAGA1AW107M AB C Capacitor (10WV 100mF) [C311,315]
15 VCEAGU1CW476M AB C Capacitor (16WV 47mF) [C306]
16 VCEAGU1EW476M AB C Capacitor (25WV 47mF) [C313]
17 VCEAGU1VW476M AB C Capacitor (35WV 47mF) [C304]
18 VCKYPU1HF223Z AA C Capacitor (50WV 0.022mF) [C302,303,305,307,308,312,314,316]
19 VHDDSS131//-1 AA B Diode (DSS131) [D302,303]
20 VHDD10SC6MR-1 AL B Diode (D10SC6MR) [BD301]
21 VHDD4SBS6//-1 AN B Diode (D4SBS6) [BD303]
22 VHDRU3M////-1 AC B Diode (RU3M) [D301,304]
23 VHDSF10SC6/-1 AK B Diode (SF10SC6) [BD302]
24 VHEMTZJ10A/-1 AC B Zener diode (MTZJ10A) [ZD301]
25 VHERD13EB1/-1 AB B Zener diode (RD13EB1) [ZD302,303]
26 VHIPQ05RF2/-1 AK B IC (PQ05RF2) [IC301,302]
27 VRD-HT2EY101J AA C Resistor (1/4W 100W ±5%) [R302]
28 VRS-HT2HA271J AB C Resistor (1/2W 270W ±5%) [R301]
29 VS2SD1207-T-1 AD B Transistor (2SD1207-T) [Q302]
30 VS2SD2045-/-1 AH B Transistor (2SD2045) [Q301]
31 XBPSD30P08KS0 AA C Screw (3´8KS)
32 XHBSD30P08000 AA C Screw (3´8)
33 PSHEP4404FCZZ AE C DC protective sheet
(Unit)
! 901 C P W B F 1 2 1 6 F C 5 2 BL E DC Power supply PWB

– 42 –
 SF-1118

35 Sub DC PWB
PRICE NEW PART
NO. PARTS CODE RANK MARK RANK DESCRIPTION
1 QCNCM0672FCZZ AB C Connector (2Pin) [CN-C]
2 QCNCM1005MCZZ AB C Connector (2Pin) [CN-D]
3 QCNCM7014SC0C AA C Connector (3Pin) [CN-B]
! 4 QFS-D1328QCZZ AE A Fuse (1.6A 250V) [Fa1]
5 QFSHB0001GCZZ AB C Fuse holder (S-N5057-01)
6 QPIN-0009FCZZ AC C Earth pin
7 RRLYD3222QCZZ AL B Relay (AJQ13-42 G94) [PRa1]
8 RTRNZ0530FCZZ AT B Power transformer [Ta1]
9 VHDDSS133//-1 AA B Diode (DSS133) [Da1]
10 VHDS1WBA60S-1 AD B Diode (S1WBA60S) [BDa1]
(Unit)
901 C P W B F 1 3 0 2 F C 5 2 BB N E Sub DC PWB

– 43 –

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

■ Index PARTS CODE NO.

PRICE NEW PART
RANK MARK RANK
PRICE NEW PART CPWBF1303FC51 2- 13 BN N E
PARTS CODE NO. RANK MARK RANK " 30-901 BN N E
[C] CPWBF1315FC51 20- 19 AT N E
CARMM0192FC01 11- 14 AE C CPWBN1301FC52 11- 39 BV N E
" 20- 27 AE C " 29-901 BV N E
CBOSZ1610FC01 10- 12 AN C CR-WZ0459FC01 7- 17 AU B
CBOX-0085FC02 15- 29 AY C CREFL0145FC36 6- 9 BP E
CBOX-0085FC68 15-901 BU E " 12-901 BP E
CBOX-0086FC63 13-901 BK E CROLP0921FC01 21- 13 AM C
CBRGP0525FC02 16- 22 AN B CROLR1048FC51 21- 19 AV E
CBRGP0528FC02 16- 25 AN B CROLR1052FC33 19- 38 AX E
CBTN-0196FC01 2- 8 AR C CSLI-0103FC31 9- 2 AF E
CBTN-0197FC32 2- 5 AL E " 12- 9 AF E
CBTN-0198FC01 2- 7 AL C CSOU-0090FC01 28- 3 AS D
CBTN-0199FC01 2- 4 AL C CYOK-0048FC31 14- 21 AL D
CBTN-0200FC01 2- 12 AL C [D]
CBTN-0201FC01 2- 10 AK C DHAI-2400FCZZ 6- 39 BE C
CBTN-0236FC01 2- 19 AK C " 7- 33 BE C
CBTN-0237FC02 2- 11 AN C " 11- 41 BE C
CCAB-0876FC09 1- 1 BB N D DHAI-2404FCZZ 2- 18 AY C
CCASP0167FC45 27-901 BG N E " 6- 42 AY C
CCASZ0067FC01 28-107 AD D " 7- 38 AY C
CCASZ0271FC71 26-901 BB E " 11- 42 AY C
CCLR-0403FC01 15- 5 AH C DHAI-2408FCZZ 33- 1 AD C
CCOVP1281FC01 14- 82 AQ D DHAI-2413FCZZ 18- 56 AD C
CDAIU0506FC01 6- 41 BH C DHAI-2414FCZZ 10- 50 AK C
" 7- 6 BH C DHAI-2415FCZZ 21- 1 AH C
CDAIU0524FC01 12- 12 AV C DHAI-2416FC11 11- 31 AR N C
CFRM-0687FC02 11- 30 AL C DHAI-2417FCZZ 15- 19 AQ C
CFRM-0836FC01 18- 50 AW C DHAI-2424FCZZ 20- 13 AH C
CFRM-0836FC75 11- 1 BT E DHAI-2496FCZZ 2- 17 AH C
" 18-901 BT E " 30- 1 AH C
CFRM-0838FC01 19- 33 BC C DHAI-2503FCZZ 12- 14 BA C
" 20- 23 BC C DHAI-2508FCZZ 14- 76 AP C
CFRM-0839FC01 19- 26 AZ C DHAI-2511FCZZ 19- 80 AF C
CFRM-0841FC01 17- 16 AL C DHAI-2568FCZZ 11- 53 AP C
CFRM-0841FC31 17-901 BS E DHAI-2746FCZZ 34- 1 AH C
" 19- 13 BS E DHAI-2788FCZZ 11- 44 AS C
CFS-T0104FC31 12- 5 AQ A " 18- 7 AS C
CGERH0267FC01 18- 30 AF C DHAI-2905FC12 11- 43 BA N C
CGERH0268FC01 18- 43 AE C " 20- 21 BA N C
CGERH0406FC01 17- 10 AE C DHAI-2918FCZZ 10- 16 AW N C
" 18- 29 AE C DUNTW6740FC65 16-901 BU E
CGERH0754FC01 18- 28 AK C DUNTW6740FC67 16-901 BU E
CGERH1032FC01 18- 45 AT C DWIR-0466CSZZ 26- 2 BG B
CGERH1041FC01 15- 15 AG C [G]
CGIDH1541FC01 10- 40 AX C GCAB-0746FCZZ 1- 7 AN D
CGIDM1338FC12 1- 18 AR C GCAB-0747FCZZ 1- 4 AN D
CHLDZ1234FC31 6- 12 BH E GCAB-0748FCZ2 1- 15 AU D
" 9-501 BH E GCAB-0818FCZZ 1- 6 AY D
CHLDZ1235FC31 7- 4 BF E GCAB-0820FCZZ 1- 5 AZ D
" 9-502 BF E GCAB-0877FCZ1 1- 2 AX N D
CLEVF0766FC01 19- 27 AG N C GCASP0167FCZ1 27- 1 BB N D
CLEVF0767FC01 19- 29 AG N C GCOVH0194FCZ2 3- 1 BB D
CPAKA5181FC05 28- 5 BB D GDAI-0166FCZ1 19- 52 BN D
CPIPP0182FC04 14- 51 AM C GLEGG0063FCZZ 19- 47 AE C
CPLTM2415FC01 10- 42 AG C [H]
CPLTM2632FC01 10- 41 AE C HINDP0770FCZZ 2- 1 AX N D
CPLTM4027FC09 14- 81 AL C HPNLC0236FCZ1 1- 16 AW N D
CPLTM4067FC73 25-901 BC E " 2- 3 AW N D
CPLTM4129FC01 25- 9 AS C [J]
CPLTM4532FC02 6- 32 AP C JBTN-0238FCZZ 2- 20 AD C
CPLTM4599FC01 6- 17 AE C JHNDP0109FCZZ 13- 21 AD C
CPLTM4896FC01 21- 42 AN C JHNDP0128FCZZ 10- 5 AD C
CPLTM4903FC02 14- 47 AU C JKNBP0126FCZZ 27- 18 AT C
CPLTP5276FC01 22- 25 AG C [L]
CPWBF0976FC53 14- 58 AR E LANGT1320FCZZ 10- 29 AB C
CPWBF1084FC51 10- 22 AU E LBNDJ0013FCZ1 6- 55 AA C
CPWBF1086FC32 17- 7 AP E " 11- 57 AA C
CPWBF1088FC31 17- 8 AU E " 14- 9 AA C
CPWBF1089FC32 10- 48 AR E " 19- 79 AA C
CPWBF1092FC51 14- 10 AS E " 20- 41 AA C
CPWBF1093FC31 8- 17 AV E LBNDJ0013FCZZ 12- 13 AA C
CPWBF1094FC51 14- 5 BG E LBNDJ0015FCZZ 11- 58 AA C
CPWBF1098FC51 14- 4 BB E LBNDJ0043FCZ1 21- 47 AA C
CPWBF1215FC53 20- 2 BN E LBNDJ0043FCZZ 17- 36 AA C
" 33-901 BN E LBOSZ0979FCZZ 21- 34 AF C
CPWBF1216FC52 20- 17 BL E LBOSZ1124FCZZ 21- 37 AF C
" 34-901 BL E LBOSZ1125FCZZ 21- 40 AC C
CPWBF1302FC52 6- 65 BB N E LBSHC0327FCZZ 21- 43 AC C
" 35-901 BB N E LBSHC0335FCZZ 20- 36 AC C

– 44 –
 SF-1118

PRICE NEW PART PRICE NEW PART

PARTS CODE NO. RANK MARK RANK PARTS CODE NO. RANK MARK RANK
LBSHZ0324FCZZ 10- 63 AC C LPLTM4777FCZZ 18- 5 AD C
LBSHZ0325FCZZ 11- 17 AD C LPLTM4778FCZZ 18- 4 AD C
LBSHZ0326FCZZ 10- 26 AC C LPLTM4885FCZZ 19- 46 AG C
LBSHZ2029SCZZ 19- 87 AB C LPLTM4887FCZZ 19- 39 AY C
LDAIU0487FCZZ 16- 20 AB C LPLTM4966FCZZ 12- 6 AR C
LDAIU0488FCZZ 16- 17 AB C LPLTM4967FCZZ 12- 18 AE C
LDAIU0505FCZZ 10- 24 AP C LPLTM4980FCZZ 19- 67 AK C
LDAIU0507FCZZ 8- 10 AR C LPLTM4981FCZZ 34- 2 AG C
LDAIU0509FCZZ 27- 17 AD C LPLTM4982FCZZ 14- 65 AC C
LDAIU0515FCZZ 19- 45 AG C LPLTM4984FCZZ 15- 33 AP C
LFIX-0016FCZZ 20- 6 AD C LPLTM5008FCZZ 21- 49 AE C
LFIX-0284FCZZ 7- 20 AC C LPLTM5010FCZZ 16- 29 AD C
" 9- 3 AC C LPLTM5015FCZZ 9- 36 AE C
" 9- 25 AC C LPLTM5036FCZZ 16- 32 AD C
LFIX-0408FCZZ 7- 19 AB C LPLTM5156FCZZ 16- 33 AE C
LFIX-0409FCZZ 7- 15 AB C LPLTM5471FCZZ 6- 31 AH N C
LFIX-0438FCZZ 9- 26 AD C LPLTP3756FCZ1 27- 10 AG C
LFRM-0745FCZZ 21- 27 AE C LPLTP3757FCZ2 27- 4 AK N C
LFRM-0834FCZ1 10- 13 AV C LPLTP4760FCZZ 20- 1 AQ C
LFRM-0835FCZ1 10- 34 AU C LPLTP4782FCZZ 27- 19 AH C
" 11- 49 AU C LPLTP4890FCZZ 10- 47 AL C
LFRM-0837FCZZ 18- 24 AH C LPLTP4897FCZ1 22- 14 AK C
LFRM-0840FCZ1 17- 17 AT N C LPLTP4964FCZZ 12- 7 AP C
LFRM-0842FCZ1 16- 13 AP C LPLTP4965FCZZ 12- 15 AP C
LFRM-0843FCZZ 14- 56 AY C LPLTP5028FCZZ 27- 2 AE C
LFRM-0844FCZZ 14- 1 AS C LPLTP5324FCZZ 28-126 AQ C
LHLDW0544FCZZ 28-125 AC C LPLTZ5474FCZZ 25- 1 AH C
LHLDW1013FCZZ 20- 37 AB C LRALM0116FCZZ 6- 37 AE C
LHLDW1269FCZZ 6- 46 AC C LRALM0119FCZZ 7- 25 AK C
" 11- 20 AC C LSOU-0141FCZ1 22- 6 AR D
LHLDW2135SCZZ 6- 62 AB C LSOU-0142FCZZ 22- 13 AQ D
LHLDZ0932FCYZ 25- 12 AD C LSOU-0144FCZZ 22- 15 AL D
LHLDZ1094FCZZ 25- 10 AD C LSTPF0172FCZ1 16- 24 AA C
LHLDZ1095FCZZ 25- 6 AD C LSTPF0262FCZZ 15- 28 AC C
LHLDZ1191FCZZ 16- 11 AC C LSTPP0255FCZ1 27- 12 AD C
LHLDZ1201FCZZ 10- 10 AE C LSTPP0260FCZZ 19- 53 AB C
LHLDZ1204FCZZ 17- 22 AG C LSTPP0274FCZZ 19- 31 AA C
LHLDZ1229FCZZ 18- 8 AN C LSTPP0278FCZZ 21- 8 AC C
LHLDZ1230FCZ1 26- 10 AG C LSTPP0279FCZZ 16- 38 AB C
LHLDZ1231FCZ2 26- 7 AH N C " 17- 34 AB C
LHLDZ1232FCZZ 8- 28 AH C LSTPP0314FCZZ 17- 19 AA C
LHLDZ1235FCZZ 9- 34 AM C LSTPP0315FCZZ 22- 21 AD C
LHLDZ1236FCZZ 9- 24 AR C LSTPP0320FCZZ 11- 51 AC C
LHLDZ1237FCZZ 15- 25 AC C LSUPP0084FCZZ 20- 18 AB C
LHLDZ1238FCZ1 19- 44 AE C LSUPP0086FCZZ 11- 47 AB C
LHLDZ1268FCZZ 10- 53 AE C LSUPP0094FCZZ 11- 48 AC C
LHLDZ1274FCZZ 14- 57 AF C LSUPP0095FCZZ 11- 46 AC C
LPINS0089FCZZ 13- 35 AA C LX-BZ0032FCZZ 6- 4 AB C
LPINS0094FCZZ 18- 23 AB C LX-BZ0193FCZZ 17- 46 AB C
LPINS0133FCZZ 17- 25 AA C " 19- 73 AB C
" 19- 18 AA C LX-BZ0266FCZZ 7- 36 AB C
LPINS0134FCZZ 17- 32 AB C LX-BZ0300FCZZ 14- 3 AB C
LPINS0155FCZZ 11- 6 AA C LX-BZ0320FCZZ 6- 19 AA C
" 18- 18 AA C " 9- 21 AA C
" 19- 8 AA C LX-BZ0324FCZZ 6- 7 AA C
LPINS0165FCZZ 21- 16 AB C LX-BZ0334FCZZ 14- 26 AA C
LPINS0288FCZZ 6- 5 AB C LX-BZ0335FCZZ 6- 36 AA C
LPINS0297FCZZ 14- 40 AB C " 7- 1 AA C
LPINS0298FCZZ 14- 63 AA C LX-BZ0342FCZZ 16- 21 AB C
LPLTM2430FCZZ 15- 26 AC C LX-BZ0426FCZZ 14- 12 AA C
LPLTM2573FCZ1 1- 10 AD C LX-BZ0529FCZZ 15- 27 AA C
LPLTM3718FCZZ 10- 46 AG C LX-BZ0578FCZZ 28-101 AC C
LPLTM3749FCZZ 26- 5 AC C LX-BZ0581FCZZ 11- 34 AB C
LPLTM3772FCZ1 15- 1 AU C LX-BZ0583FCZZ 11- 32 AB C
LPLTM3877FCZZ 15- 12 AD C LX-BZ0589FCZZ 11- 21 AA C
LPLTM3909FCZZ 27- 13 AD C LX-BZ0618FCZZ 9- 7 AA C
LPLTM4046FCZZ 6- 23 AD C LX-BZ0637FCZZ 7- 21 AC C
LPLTM4047FCZZ 6- 30 AD C LX-BZ0649FCZZ 28-102 AB C
LPLTM4054FCZZ 6- 11 AB C LX-BZ0656FCZZ 14- 70 AD C
LPLTM4067FCZZ 25- 8 AN C LX-BZ0663FCZZ 10- 2 AD C
LPLTM4068FCZZ 25- 11 AM C LX-BZ0670FCZZ 10- 30 AC C
LPLTM4124FCZZ 12- 1 AC C LX-BZ0713FCZZ 8- 23 AB C
LPLTM4562FCZZ 7- 2 AA C LX-BZ0725FCZZ 9- 29 AB C
LPLTM4757FCZZ 11- 4 AL C LX-BZ0753FCZZ 7- 7 AC C
LPLTM4759FCZZ 11- 38 AK C " 8- 12 AC C
LPLTM4761FCZZ 20- 9 AF C LX-BZ0767FCZZ 12- 20 AB C
LPLTM4762FCZZ 13- 5 AE C LX-BZ0771FCZZ 11- 37 AC C
LPLTM4763FCZZ 14- 42 AC C " 21- 2 AC C
LPLTM4764FCZZ 14- 29 AP C LX-BZ0772FCZZ 28-103 AD C
LPLTM4765FCZZ 14- 7 AD C LX-BZ0786FCZZ 8- 24 AC C
LPLTM4766FCZZ 6- 25 AN C LX-BZ0840FCZZ 8- 41 AC C

– 45 –

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

PRICE NEW PART PRICE NEW PART

PARTS CODE NO. RANK MARK RANK PARTS CODE NO. RANK MARK RANK
LX-BZ4008SC0M 25- 13 AA C MSPRT1324FCZ1 16- 9 AA C
LX-NZ0089FCZZ 18- 3 AA C MSPRT1395FCZZ 26- 3 AA C
LX-WZ0017FCZZ 6- 16 AA C MSPRT1640FCZZ 13- 30 AC C
LX-WZ0050FCZ1 7- 22 AA C MSPRT2277FCZZ 10- 52 AC C
LX-WZ0075FCZZ 28-104 AA C MSPRT2283FCZZ 20- 26 AC C
LX-WZ0134FCZZ 7- 23 AA C MSPRT2285FCZZ 7- 5 AC C
LX-WZ0139FCZZ 9- 31 AA C MSPRT2286FCZZ 16- 18 AC C
LX-WZ0186FCZZ 11- 24 AA C MSPRT2320FCZZ 21- 12 AC C
LX-WZ0225FCZZ 13- 22 AA C MSPRT2321FCZZ 21- 22 AB C
LX-WZ0256FCZZ 22- 23 AA C MSPRT2521FCZZ 19- 22 AC C
LX-WZ0285FCZZ 14- 64 AA C [N]
LX-WZ0294FCZZ 15- 14 AA C NBLTH0170FCZZ 19- 2 AH B
LX-WZ0310FCZZ 14- 60 AB C NBLTH0235FCZZ 17- 26 AF B
LX-WZ0314FCZZ 18- 33 AA C NBLTH0245FCZZ 11- 3 AN B
LX-WZ0413FCZZ 9- 32 AA C NBLTH0246FCZZ 19- 4 AK B
LX-WZ0421FCZZ 18- 42 AA C NBRGC0080FCZ1 11- 26 AD B
LX-WZ0424FCZZ 8- 40 AC C NBRGC0080FCZZ 14- 31 AD B
LX-WZ2028SCZZ 27- 14 AA C NBRGC0133FCZ1 11- 9 AC C
LX-WZ5028BCZZ 9- 37 AA C " 18- 19 AC C
[M] " 19- 11 AC C
MARMP0116FCZZ 21- 7 AC C NBRGC0136FCZ1 15- 7 AC B
MARMP0117FCZ1 21- 9 AD C NBRGC0136FCZZ 18- 25 AC B
MARMP0120FCZZ 13- 29 AE C NBRGC0188FCZZ 19- 16 AB B
MARMP0139FCZZ 13- 32 AE C NBRGC0307FCZZ 8- 38 AC C
MARMP0187FCZZ 17- 29 AC C NBRGC0387FCZ1 6- 49 AC B
MARMP0190FCZ1 19- 42 AG C NBRGC0401FCZZ 8- 39 AC C
MARMP0194FCZZ 21- 14 AG C NBRGC0504FCZZ 6- 50 AC C
MARMP0195FCZZ 22- 3 AD C NBRGC0531FCZZ 8- 25 AC C
MCAMM0093FCZZ 8- 22 AF C NBRGC0536FCZZ 11- 11 AF C
MHNG-0086FCZZ 3- 3 AL C NBRGC0537FCZZ 8- 21 AG C
MHNG-0096FCZZ 3- 2 AL C NBRGC0580FCZZ 15- 36 AG B
MLEVF0374FCZZ 10- 33 AC C NBRGC0584FCZZ 17- 43 AD C
MLEVF0666FCZZ 10- 6 AF C NBRGC2019SCZZ 17- 13 AC C
MLEVP0667FCZ1 10- 25 AD C NBRGC2029SCZZ 8- 3 AB B
MLEVP0668FCZZ 18- 11 AE C NBRGP0191FCZZ 17- 15 AB C
MLEVP0669FCZZ 17- 6 AE C NBRGP0299FCZZ 13- 34 AC B
MLEVP0670FCZZ 17- 18 AE C NBRGP0302FCZZ 21- 5 AB C
manuals4you.com

MLEVP0671FCZZ 27- 23 AE C NBRGP0426FCZZ 8- 30 AB C

MLEVP0672FCZZ 14- 34 AH C NBRGP0509FCZ1 10- 58 AG C
MLEVP0688FCZZ 10- 4 AH C NBRGP0510FCZZ 17- 4 AC C
MLEVP0738FCZZ 21- 30 AC C " 19- 9 AC C
MLEVP0739FCZZ 21- 29 AD C NBRGP0533FCZZ 14- 52 AG C
MSPRB2278FCZZ 19- 54 AY B NBRGP0534FCZ1 14- 23 AD C
MSPRB2350FCZZ 19- 55 AY B NBRGP0535FCZZ 14- 48 AD C
MSPRC1299FCZZ 11- 35 AA C NBRGP0547FCZZ 19- 69 AD C
MSPRC1315FCZZ 21- 36 AD C NBRGP0593FCZZ 19- 1 AD N C
MSPRC1317FCZZ 21- 28 AA C NBRGY0513FCZZ 19- 24 AK C
MSPRC1318FCZZ 21- 33 AA C NBRGY2122SCZZ 14- 41 AB C
MSPRC1534FCZZ 11- 33 AA C NCPL-0007FCZZ 11- 22 AC C
MSPRC1544FCZZ 21- 38 AE C NFANP0043FCZZ 7- 30 AZ B
MSPRC1804FCZZ 27- 11 AA C NGERH0070FCZZ 18- 47 AD C
MSPRC1811FCZZ 14- 33 AA C NGERH0111FCZZ 11- 27 AD C
MSPRC1873FCZZ 27- 8 AB C NGERH0147FCZZ 20- 30 AF C
MSPRC2025FCZZ 14- 61 AA C NGERH0193FCZZ 22- 11 AB C
MSPRC2184FCZZ 10- 9 AA C " 27- 22 AB C
MSPRC2276FCZZ 18- 34 AB C NGERH0205FCZZ 20- 29 AC C
MSPRC2280FCZZ 19- 35 AC C NGERH0314FCZZ 13- 36 AC C
MSPRC2281FCZZ 19- 34 AC C NGERH0349FCZZ 18- 41 AC C
MSPRC2282FCZZ 10- 57 AC C NGERH0457FCZZ 18- 16 AC C
MSPRC2287FCZ2 14- 50 AL C NGERH0495FCZZ 21- 17 AC C
MSPRC2288FCZZ 14- 25 AC C NGERH0515FCZZ 20- 24 AC C
MSPRC2295FCZZ 11- 36 AC C NGERH0623FCZZ 13- 38 AB C
MSPRC2319FCZZ 11- 23 AC C NGERH0626FCZZ 13- 40 AC C
MSPRC2335FCZZ 17- 30 AK C NGERH0739FCZZ 18- 31 AB C
MSPRC2336FCZZ 17- 28 AC C NGERH0740FCZZ 18- 26 AB C
MSPRC2348FCZZ 16- 15 AB C NGERH0742FCZZ 18- 36 AB C
MSPRC2366FCZZ 21- 21 AC C NGERH0866FCZZ 19- 19 AC C
MSPRC2367FCZZ 19- 43 AK C NGERH0892FCZZ 21- 15 AB C
MSPRC2368FCZZ 10- 3 AP C NGERH1015FCZZ 11- 13 AD C
MSPRC2369FCZZ 12- 24 AP C " 20- 28 AD C
MSPRC2370FCZZ 19- 72 AK C NGERH1029FCZZ 18- 38 AD C
MSPRC2416FCZZ 19- 28 AD C NGERH1030FCZZ 18- 32 AE C
MSPRC2417FCZZ 19- 74 AD C NGERH1031FCZZ 18- 22 AD C
MSPRC2591FCZZ 10- 31 AC C NGERH1033FCZZ 18- 40 AF C
MSPRC2704FCZZ 8- 8 AD C NGERH1034FCZZ 19- 32 AF C
MSPRP1293FCZZ 18- 2 AB C NGERH1035FCZZ 20- 31 AE C
MSPRP1550FCZZ 26- 8 AA C NGERH1036FCZZ 8- 14 AF C
MSPRP2101FCZZ 12- 10 AC C NGERH1037FCZZ 8- 20 AG C
MSPRP2354FCZZ 12- 4 AG C NGERH1040FCZZ 15- 4 AD C
MSPRP2355FCZZ 12- 16 AL C NGERH1042FCZZ 14- 43 AD C
MSPRT1203FCZZ 10- 45 AA C NGERH1043FCZZ 14- 37 AF C

– 46 –
 SF-1118

PRICE NEW PART PRICE NEW PART

PARTS CODE NO. RANK MARK RANK PARTS CODE NO. RANK MARK RANK
NGERH1044FCZZ 14- 24 AF C PCLR-0401FCZZ 18- 17 AD C
NGERH1045FCZZ 14- 30 AD C PCLR-0402FCZZ 9- 30 AE C
NGERH1046FCZZ 11- 10 AE C PCOVP0911FCZZ 1- 51 AB C
NGERH1056FCZZ 15- 16 AE C PCOVP0941FCZZ 1- 52 AB C
NGERH1057FCZZ 15- 17 AE C PCOVP1130FCZZ 25- 4 AB C
NGERH1060FCZZ 21- 44 AE C PCOVP1184FCZ1 14- 59 AC C
NGERH1071FCZZ 6- 6 AG C PCOVP1271FCZZ 1- 8 AZ D
NGERH1074FCZZ 14- 39 AD C PCOVP1272FCZ1 1- 26 AH N C
NGERH1078FCZZ 11- 16 AD C PCOVP1273FCZZ 1- 12 AM D
NGERH1079FCZZ 21- 45 AE C PCOVP1274FCZ1 26- 9 AC C
NGERH1214FCZZ 16- 26 AP C PCOVP1275FCZ1 26- 6 AC C
NGERR0878FCZZ 22- 7 AD C PCOVP1276FCZZ 6- 18 AR C
NGERR1038FCZZ 8- 26 AF C PCOVP1277FCZZ 7- 13 AN C
NGERR1039FCZZ 9- 22 AG C PCOVP1279FCZZ 13- 1 AT C
NGERR1047FCZZ 27- 21 AF C PCOVP1280FCZZ 13- 9 AN C
NGERR1048FCZZ 27- 20 AG C PCOVP1301FCZZ 10- 39 AL C
NGERR1283FCZZ 8- 44 AD C PCOVP1327FCZZ 1- 27 AF C
NPLYZ0106FCZZ 17- 27 AC C PCOVP1398FCZZ 2- 21 AN C
NPLYZ0172FCZ1 6- 3 AL C PCOVQ1278FCZZ 16- 2 BA D
NPLYZ0258FCZZ 18- 52 AC C PCUSF0319FCZZ 27- 9 AE C
NPLYZ0276FCZZ 9- 6 AG C PCUSF0334FCZZ 12- 17 AP C
NPLYZ0285FCZ1 11- 8 AE C PCUSF0338FCZZ 28-115 AC C
NPLYZ0292FCZZ 6- 15 AH C PCUSS0201FCZZ 9- 8 AA C
NPLYZ0295FCZ1 17- 3 AM C PCUSS0327FCZZ 12- 8 AD C
NPLYZ0297FCZZ 19- 7 AD C PDUC-0061FCZZ 7- 28 AM C
NPLYZ0298FCZZ 8- 13 AH C PDUC-0092FCZZ 10- 20 AS C
NPLYZ0340FCZZ 6- 14 AC C PDUC-0093FCZZ 19- 61 AL C
" 7- 8 AC C PFILD0186FCZZ 7- 32 AF B
" 8- 11 AC C PFILZ0267FCZZ 19- 63 AU B
NROLM1053FCZ1 10- 59 AY C PFILZ0268FCZZ 10- 19 AU N B
NROLM1061FCZZ 15- 10 BD C PFTA-0110FCZZ 6- 27 AF C
NROLP0845FCZ1 15- 21 AR C PGIDH1546FCZZ 26- 12 AH C
NROLP1054FCZ1 19- 3 AF C PGIDH1548FCZZ 16- 19 AG C
NROLP1060FCZZ 10- 54 AF C PGIDH1581FCZZ 21- 4 AN C
" 17- 20 AF C PGIDH1718FCZZ 19- 23 AM C
NROLR0878FCZZ 17- 35 AM C PGIDH1765FCZZ 16- 35 AD C
NROLR1049FCZ1 17- 24 AU C PGIDM1337FCZZ 1- 20 AK C
NROLR1051FCZZ 21- 18 AT C PGIDM1539FCZZ 6- 40 AC C
NROLR1055FCZ1 19- 10 AY C PGIDM1543FCZZ 10- 51 AR C
NROLR1056FCZ3 19- 17 AY C PGIDM1547FCZ3 26- 1 AK C
NROLR1058FCZ3 19- 25 BH C PGIDM1582FCZ1 21- 20 AV N C
NROLR1059FCZ1 17- 5 AS C " 22- 24 AV N C
NROLR1112FCZZ 16- 10 AG C PGIDM1583FCZZ 22- 2 AF C
NROLR1113FCZZ 16- 31 AG C PGIDM1584FCZZ 22- 1 AF C
NROLS0848FCZZ 13- 28 AP C PGIDM1597FCZZ 26- 14 AP C
NROLT1063FCZ2 16- 23 BD C PGIDM1602FCZZ 14- 54 AG C
NSFTD1597FCZZ 7- 16 AP C PGLSP0072FCZ1 7- 14 AN B
NSFTZ1595FCZZ 10- 36 AD C PGLSP0074FCZ3 1- 19 AZ B
NSFTZ1627FCZZ 13- 33 AG C PGUMS0147FCZZ 6- 29 AA C
NSFTZ1628FCZZ 13- 31 AF C PGUMS0228FCZZ 6- 22 AA C
NSFTZ2120FCZ2 10- 32 AP C PLNS-0043FCZ1 8- 1 BK C
NSFTZ2121FCZ1 11- 7 AK C PMAGT0015FCZZ 1- 9 AD B
NSFTZ2122FCZZ 18- 39 AL C PMIR-0076FCZZ 12- 11 AP B
NSFTZ2123FCZZ 18- 44 AK C PMIR-0127FCZZ 7- 18 AT B
NSFTZ2124FCZ1 18- 27 AL C PMIR-0128FCZZ 9- 4 AU B
NSFTZ2125FCZZ 18- 46 AK C PMIR-0129FCZZ 9- 5 AY B
NSFTZ2126FCZZ 11- 25 AN C PMIR-0130FCZZ 9- 28 AW B
NSFTZ2127FCZZ 10- 55 AM C PMIR-0131FCZZ 9- 27 AS B
NSFTZ2129FCZZ 17- 33 AP C PMLT-0834FCZZ 13- 4 AB C
NSFTZ2130FCZZ 17- 21 AF C PMLT-0835FCZZ 13- 8 AA C
NSFTZ2131FCZ1 6- 1 AS C PMLT-0836FCZZ 13- 7 AB C
NSFTZ2132FCZZ 7- 3 AF C PMLT-0984FCZ1 14- 46 AF C
NSFTZ2133FCZZ 6- 44 AH C PMLT-0985FCZ1 14- 45 AF C
" 19- 56 AH C PMLT-0991FCZZ 14- 73 AA C
NSFTZ2134FCZZ 8- 31 AG C PMLT-0995FCZZ 19- 60 AC C
NSFTZ2183FCZ1 21- 11 AM C PMLT-0999FCZZ 14- 44 AC C
NSFTZ2186FCZZ 10- 8 AF C PMLT-1001FCZZ 17- 42 AC C
NSFTZ2206FCZZ 17- 23 AK C PMLT-1005FCZZ 14- 84 AC C
NSFTZ2499FCZZ 1- 23 AD N C PMLT-1012FCZZ 14- 75 AA C
NSRW-0023FCZZ 14- 49 AS C PMLT-1021FCZZ 13- 49 AC C
[P] PMLT-1022FCZZ 13- 50 AG C
PBOX-0086FCZZ 13- 44 AN D PMLT-1023FCZZ 13- 47 AB C
PBRSR0140FCZ1 16- 14 AH B PMLT-1025FCZZ 14- 77 AE C
PCASZ0271FCZZ 26- 11 AH C PMLT-1026FCZZ 14- 78 AF C
PCLC-0237FCZ1 17- 14 AX B PMLT-1153FCZZ 19- 83 AC C
PCLC-0250FCZ1 19- 12 AX B PPIPP0109FCZZ 21- 35 AB C
PCLC-0270FCZZ 17- 11 AW B PPIPP0124FCZZ 21- 39 AB C
PCLR-0230FCZZ 17- 31 AD C PRDAR0066FCZZ 33- 2 AH C
PCLR-0351FCZZ 8- 29 AB C PRDAR0069FCZZ 29- 1 AG C
PCLR-0367FCZZ 18- 53 AC C PRDAR0078FCZZ 34- 3 AK C
PCLR-0401FCZZ 17- 12 AD C PRDAR0079FCZZ 34- 4 AL C

– 47 –

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

PRICE NEW PART PRICE NEW PART

PARTS CODE NO. RANK MARK RANK PARTS CODE NO. RANK MARK RANK
PRDAR0080FCZZ 34- 5 AK C PTPE-0217FCZZ 20- 40 AC C
PREFL0145FCZZ 12- 2 AT C PTPE-0226FCZZ 1- 35 AC C
PRNGP0019FCZZ 15- 11 AA C PTUBG0100FCZZ 16- 28 AC C
PRNGP0025FCZZ 6- 13 AA C PWIR-0173FCZZ 6- 8 AS C
" 14- 38 AA C PWIR-0174FCZZ 8- 9 AU C
PRNGP0026FCZZ 14- 66 AA C PWIR-0176FCZZ 16- 30 AP C
PRNGP0034FCZZ 10- 27 AA C [Q]
PRNGP0040FCZZ 1- 29 AA C QACCV6420QCN2 20- 14 AU B
PRNGP0049FCZZ 11- 15 AA C QCNCM0672FCZZ 35- 1 AB C
PRNGP0050FCZZ 15- 8 AE C QCNCM0877FCZZ 29- 3 AF C
PRNGP0081FCZZ 21- 10 AA C QCNCM0878FCZZ 29- 4 AF C
PSEL-0432FCZZ 13- 42 AA C QCNCM0879FCZZ 29- 5 AF C
PSEL-0433FCZZ 13- 41 AB C QCNCM0882FCZZ 33- 6 AD C
PSEL-0443FCZZ 15- 9 AA C QCNCM0883FCZZ 33- 5 AD C
PSEL-0446FCZZ 13- 3 AA C QCNCM1005MCZZ 35- 2 AB C
PSEL-0652FCZZ 15- 24 AC C QCNCM7014SC0C 35- 3 AA C
PSEL-0660FCZZ 13- 10 AG C QCNCM7014SC0D 29- 6 AB C
PSEL-0669FCZZ 10- 61 AD C " 33- 7 AB C
PSEL-0670FCZZ 15- 35 AC C QCNCW0690FCZZ 33- 8 AB C
PSEL-0675FCZZ 15- 23 AC C QCNCW0892FCZZ 30- 2 AD C
PSEL-0676FCZZ 15- 22 AC C QCNCW0893FCZZ 30- 3 AE C
PSHEG2817FCZ1 8- 2 AC C QCNCW0903FCZZ 34- 6 AF C
PSHEG3831FCZ1 18- 14 AF C QCNW-0001QCZZ 20- 14 AN B
PSHEP2335FCZZ 8- 5 AA C QFS-C1500QCZZ 33- 9 AF A
PSHEP2348FCZZ 17- 2 AB C QFS-D1326QCZZ 33- 10 AD A
" 19- 6 AB C " 34- 7 AD A
PSHEP2713FCZZ 15- 32 AC C QFS-D1328QCZZ 29- 7 AE A
PSHEP2751FCZZ 8- 6 AC C " 34- 8 AE A
PSHEP2917FCZZ 13- 43 AB C " 35- 4 AE A
PSHEP3223FCZZ 29- 2 AB C QFS-D1423QCZZ 34- 9 AE A
PSHEP3741FCZZ 10- 60 AF C QFSHA0025FCZZ 29- 8 AA C
PSHEP3747FCZZ 7- 11 AE C " 33- 12 AA C
PSHEP3824FCZZ 14- 2 AF C QFSHB0001GCZZ 35- 5 AB C
PSHEP3827FCZZ 19- 70 AE C QFSHB0024FCZZ 34- 10 AB C
PSHEP3832FCZZ 26- 13 AE C QFSHD0001QCZZ 33- 13 AA C
PSHEP3903FCZZ 21- 23 AC C QPIN-0009FCZZ 35- 6 AC C
PSHEP3904FCZZ 21- 25 AC C QPLGA0003QCZZ 20- 14 AN B
PSHEP3905FCZZ 21- 48 AE C QSLP-0157FCZZ 25- 7 AE C
PSHEP3906FCZZ 17- 41 AD C QSLP-0158FCZ1 25- 3 AE C
PSHEP3907FCZZ 6- 56 AD C QSOCZ2051SC32 29- 9 AC C
PSHEP3929FCZZ 14- 68 AD C QSOCZ6408ACZZ 29- 10 AB C
PSHEP3930FCZ1 14- 72 AD C QSW-C9170QCZZ 10- 14 AK B
PSHEP3931FCZZ 14- 74 AD C QSW-M0296FCZZ 10- 15 AM B
PSHEP3953FCZZ 20- 35 AD C QSW-M0431FCZZ 18- 54 AF B
PSHEP3955FCZZ 13- 27 AD C QSW-P0465FCZZ 30- 4 AC B
PSHEP4019FCZZ 14- 79 AC C QSW-P0469FCZZ 30- 5 AD B
PSHEP4026FCZ1 22- 26 AC C QTANN0015FCZZ 20- 12 AG C
PSHEP4047FCZZ 20- 38 AD C QTANP0115FCZZ 33- 14 AB C
PSHEP4058FCZZ 8- 43 AC C [R]
PSHEP4059FCZZ 8- 7 AK C RC-AZ0358FCZZ 29- 11 AE B
PSHEP4067FCZZ 8- 42 AD C RC-KZ472ANC3A 33- 15 AD C
PSHEP4068FCZ1 10- 64 AE C RCILF0043FCZ1 33- 16 AL C
PSHEP4109FCZZ 20- 39 AD C RCILF0045FCZZ 20- 15 AN C
PSHEP4116FCZZ 19- 48 AF C RCILF0082FCZZ 33- 42 AP C
PSHEP4345FCZZ 21- 52 AC C RCRM-0001FCZZ 29- 12 AD B
PSHEP4400FCZZ 16- 37 AD C RDTCT0116FCZZ 16- 8 AR B
PSHEP4404FCZZ 34- 33 AE C RDTCT0117FCZZ 15- 30 AZ B
PSHEP4594FCZZ 19- 36 AD N C RH-DZ0016FCZZ 29- 13 AB B
PSHEP4595FCZZ 19- 37 AD N C RLMPU0495FCZ1 12- 3 BC B
PSHEZ0287FCZZ 28-127 AG D RLMPU0551FCZZ 16- 27 BD B
PSHEZ1760FCZZ 22- 10 AB C RLMPU0553FCZZ 16- 27 BD B
PSHEZ2715FCZZ 3- 5 AU D RMOTD0619FCZZ 11- 29 AR B
PSHEZ3777FCZZ 33- 3 AD C RMOTE0700FCZZ 19- 62 AX B
PSHEZ3899FCZ1 14- 69 AC C RMOTN0765FCZZ 18- 13 BL B
PSHEZ3908FCZZ 20- 33 AF C RMOTN0768FCZZ 6- 20 AZ B
PSHEZ3909FCZZ 11- 55 AE C RMOTP0764FCZZ 10- 18 AZ B
PSHEZ3910FCZZ 15- 2 AB C RMOTP0766FCZ1 8- 18 AX N B
PSHEZ3945FCZZ 21- 24 AD C RMPTA0031FCZZ 33- 18 AE B
PSHEZ4015FCZZ 14- 13 AC C RMPTC4103QCJB 29- 14 AD B
PSHEZ4024FCZZ 28- 11 AE D RMPTC5102QCJB 29- 15 AB B
PSHEZ4137FCZZ 28-116 AC D RMPTC5103QCJB 29- 16 AD B
PSHEZ4364FCZZ 2- 2 AK N D RMPTC6223QCJB 29- 17 AB B
PSHEZ4449FCZZ 16- 36 AC C RMPTC6272QCJB 29- 18 AC B
PSPAZ0363FCZZ 18- 35 AA C RMPTC8103QCJB 29- 19 AC B
PSPAZ0674FCZZ 26- 15 AC C RPLU-0279FCZZ 21- 32 AN B
PSPAZ0679FCZZ 21- 50 AC C RPLU-0304FCZZ 18- 10 AN B
PSPAZ0695FCZZ 19- 76 AC C RR-NZ0442FCZZ 33- 35 AB C
PSPAZ1393FCZZ 1- 36 AC C RR-XZ0338FCZZ 33- 20 AC B
PTME-0168FCZZ 16- 16 AF S RRLYD3222QCZZ 35- 7 AL B
PTME-0211FCZ1 14- 62 AG C RRLYJ3100QCZZ 33- 21 AN B
PTME-0244FCZZ 19- 21 AG C RTHM-0009FCZZ 16- 6 AK B

– 48 –
 SF-1118

PRICE NEW PART PRICE NEW PART

PARTS CODE NO. RANK MARK RANK PARTS CODE NO. RANK MARK RANK
RTRNP0540FCZZ 20- 16 BD N B VHERD22FB//-1 29- 42 AD B
RTRNP0542FCZZ 20- 16 BF B VHI27C010D3FC 29- 55 AX N B
RTRNZ0530FCZZ 35- 8 AT B VHI74F02SJ/-1 29- 56 AF B
RTRNZ0535FCZZ 11- 45 BS N B VHI74HC04//-1 29- 57 AE B
[S] VHI74HC139/-1 29- 58 AG B
SPAKA4693FCZZ 28-105 AE D VHIH83041K12F 29- 43 BB B
SPAKA5317FCZZ 28- 8 AF D VHIHS4602//-1 33- 29 AT B
SPAKA5318FCZZ 28- 9 AD D VHILM324N//-1 29- 44 AK B
SPAKA5377FCZZ 28-117 AE D VHIM51953BL-1 29- 45 AF B
SPAKA5524FCZZ 28- 2 AT D VHIM66313FP-1 30- 10 AN B
SPAKA5559FCZZ 28- 12 AR D VHINJM2901N-1 29- 46 AK B
SPAKA5626FCZZ 28- 1 AE D VHIPQ05RF2/-1 34- 26 AK B
SPAKC5770FC18 28- 6 BB N D VHISLA7024MT/ 29- 47 AS B
SSAKA2440QCZZ 28-109 AB D VHISN74HC151N 29- 48 AG B
SSAKA3001CCZZ 28- 10 AA D VHISN74HC373S 29- 49 AG B
[T] VHISN74LS138N 29- 50 AG B
TCADZ1159FCZZ 28-119 AA D VHIST25C04FB6 29- 51 AM B
TCADZ1178FCZZ 28-106 AB D VHITA7291S/-1 29- 52 AF B
TCADZ1300FCZZ 28-114 AB D VHITD62504/-1 29- 53 AG B
TCADZ1354FCZZ 28-123 AF N D VHIULN2004AN1 29- 54 AE B
TCAUA0770FCZZ 1- 13 AB C VHPGP1A22LC-1 7- 26 AK B
TCAUH0821FCZZ 14- 83 AA C " 18- 49 AK B
TCAUH1000FCZZ 16- 3 AE C VHPLB603MF/-1 30- 11 AQ B
TINSE1653FCZZ 28- 7 AX N D VHPPC112LY2-1 33- 30 AF B
TLABH3805FCZZ 6- 59 AF C VHPSEL2213C// 30- 12 AB B
TLABH4084FCZZ 1- 38 AE C VHPSLR322MC3F 30- 13 AC B
TLABZ3803FCZZ 13- 51 AD C VHPSLR322VC3F 30- 14 AC B
TLABZ3996FCZZ 28-120 AD C VHRS21MD3V/-1 33- 31 AE B
TLABZ4011FCZZ 22- 4 AE C VHSTM1661P-LF 33- 32 AQ B
[U] VHSTM1661S-LF 33- 33 AK B
UCLEZ0108FCZ1 14- 27 AV C VRD-HT2EY101J 34- 27 AA C
[V] VRD-HT2EY102J 30- 15 AA C
VCEAAL1HC822M 34- 11 AK C VRD-HT2EY103J 29- 59 AA C
VCEAEW1EC222M 34- 13 AF C " 30- 16 AA C
VCEAGA1AW107M 34- 14 AB C VRD-HT2EY123J 30- 17 AA C
VCEAGA1AW477M 29- 21 AB C VRD-HT2EY271J 29- 60 AA C
VCEAGA1HW224M 29- 23 AA C VRD-HT2EY474J 33- 34 AA C
VCEAGA1VW106M 29- 25 AA C VRD-HT2EY513J 30- 18 AA C
VCEAGU1AW476M 29- 20 AA C VRD-HT2EY561J 30- 19 AA C
VCEAGU1CW476M 34- 15 AB C VRD-HT2EY562J 30- 20 AA C
VCEAGU1CW477M 29- 26 AC C VRD-HT2EY621J 29- 61 AA C
VCEAGU1EW476M 34- 16 AB C VRD-HT2EY750J 30- 21 AA C
VCEAGU1HW105M 29- 22 AA C VRNHT2HK1000F 29- 62 AC C
VCEAGU1HW476M 29- 24 AB C VRS-HT2HA101J 33- 36 AA C
VCEAGU1VW107M 33- 22 AB C VRS-HT2HA201J 33- 37 AA C
VCEAGU1VW476M 34- 17 AB C VRS-HT2HA271J 34- 28 AB C
VCEAGU1VW477M 29- 27 AD C VRS-HT3DA1R0J 29- 63 AB C
VCEAJU1CW476M 30- 6 AB C VRS-HT3LAR22J 29- 64 AC C
VCFYEG2EA224M 33- 23 AE C VRS-RE3LA103J 33- 38 AB C
VCKYPU1HB331K 30- 7 AA C VRS-ST3AB180J 29- 65 AA C
VCKYPU1HF223Z 30- 8 AA C VRS-TS2AD101J 29- 66 AA C
" 34- 18 AA C VRS-TS2AD102J 29- 67 AA C
VCKYTQ1HB102K 29- 28 AA C VRS-TS2AD103J 29- 68 AA C
VCKYTQ1HB222K 29- 29 AA C VRS-TS2AD104J 29- 69 AA C
VCKYTQ1HB223K 29- 30 AB C VRS-TS2AD105J 29- 70 AA C
VCKYTQ1HB471K 29- 31 AB C VRS-TS2AD152J 29- 71 AA C
VCQYNU1HM103K 29- 32 AA C VRS-TS2AD153F 29- 72 AA C
VCQYNU1HM104K 29- 33 AB C VRS-TS2AD162J 29- 73 AA C
" 33- 24 AB C VRS-TS2AD202J 29- 74 AA C
VCQYNU1HM224K 29- 34 AC C VRS-TS2AD222J 29- 75 AA C
VCQYNU1HM473K 33- 25 AB C VRS-TS2AD242D 29- 76 AA C
VCQYNU1HM474K 33- 26 AD C VRS-TS2AD242J 29- 77 AA C
VHDD10SC6MR-1 34- 20 AL B VRS-TS2AD243F 29- 78 AB C
VHDD1N60///-1 33- 27 AC B VRS-TS2AD243J 29- 79 AA C
VHDD4SBS6//-1 34- 21 AN B VRS-TS2AD271F 29- 80 AA C
VHDDAN202K/-1 29- 35 AB B VRS-TS2AD272J 29- 81 AA C
VHDDAP202K/-1 29- 36 AB B VRS-TS2AD392J 29- 82 AA C
VHDDSM1D1//-U 29- 37 AB B VRS-TS2AD472F 29- 83 AA C
VHDDSS131//-1 34- 19 AA B VRS-TS2AD472J 29- 84 AA C
VHDDSS133//-1 29- 38 AA B VRS-TS2AD473F 29- 85 AA C
" 30- 9 AA B VRS-TS2AD473J 29- 86 AA C
" 35- 9 AA B VRS-TS2AD561J 29- 87 AA C
VHDRU3M////-1 29- 39 AC B VRS-TS2AD562J 29- 88 AA C
" 34- 22 AC B VRS-TS2AD621J 29- 89 AA C
VHDS1WBA60S-1 33- 28 AD B VRS-TS2AD622F 29- 90 AA C
" 35- 10 AD B VRS-TS2AD622J 29- 91 AA C
VHDSF10SC6/-1 34- 23 AK B VRS-TS2AD681J 29- 92 AA C
VHEHZS5B3//-1 29- 40 AB B VRS-TS2AD682J 29- 93 AA C
VHEMTZJ10A/-1 34- 24 AC B VRS-TS2AD750F 29- 94 AA C
VHERD13EB1/-1 34- 25 AB B VRS-TS2AD750J 29- 95 AA C
VHERD18EL3/-1 29- 41 AB B VRS-TS2AD751F 29- 96 AA C

– 49 –

manuals4you.com
 SF-1118

PRICE NEW PART PRICE NEW PART

PARTS CODE NO. RANK MARK RANK PARTS CODE NO. RANK MARK RANK
VRS-TS2AD752D 29- 97 AA C XEPSD30P08000 19- 30 AA C
VRS-TS2AD822J 29- 98 AA C " 27- 15 AA C
VS2SA673-C/-1 29-100 AE B XEPSD30P08X00 16- 12 AA C
VS2SB1240-/-1 30- 22 AD B " 19- 75 AA C
VS2SC945///-1 29-101 AD B XEPSD40P06000 9- 1 AA C
VS2SD1207-T-1 34- 29 AD B XEPSD40P08000 20- 3 AA C
VS2SD1991A/-1 30- 23 AD N B " 21- 3 AA C
VS2SD2045-/-1 34- 30 AH B " 27- 7 AA C
VS2SK1286//-1 29-102 AH B XEPSD40P10000 17- 9 AA C
VSDTA123YS/-1 29- 99 AB B XEPSD40P30000 7- 31 AA C
[X] XEPSD40P35000 10- 17 AA C
XBBSD30P06000 6- 28 AA C XHBSD30P04000 16- 4 AA C
XBBSD30P08000 18- 20 AA C XHBSD30P06000 10- 21 AA C
XBBSD30P18000 15- 20 AA C " 12- 21 AA C
XBBSD40P08000 13- 25 AA C " 16- 1 AA C
" 18- 57 AA C XHBSD30P08000 6- 63 AA C
XBBSD40P10000 6- 10 AA C " 21- 26 AA C
" 7- 27 AA C " 34- 32 AA C
XBBSD40P12000 25- 16 AA C XHBSD30P10000 16- 7 AA C
XBBSD40P14000 19- 71 AA C XHBSD40P06000 20- 34 AA C
XBPBN30P05K00 12- 19 AB C XHBSD40P08000 10- 49 AA C
XBPBW30P06000 15- 34 AA C " 20- 22 AA C
XBPSD20P03000 18- 12 AA C " 20- 32 AA C
XBPSD30P04000 25- 15 AA C " 21- 41 AA C
XBPSD30P06000 8- 27 AA C XHBSD40P12000 19- 41 AA C
" 14- 8 AA C XHBSD40P14000 19- 86 AA C
" 33- 39 AA C XHBSE40P08000 1- 14 AA C
XBPSD30P08K00 19- 77 AA C " 10- 1 AA C
" 29-103 AA C " 11- 2 AA C
" 33- 40 AA C " 18- 9 AA C
XBPSD30P08KS0 15- 3 AA C " 22- 22 AA C
" 34- 31 AA C XHBSE40P10000 1- 3 AA C
XBPSD30P10000 25- 5 AA C " 6- 64 AA C
XBPSD30P10K00 33- 41 AA C " 10- 11 AA C
XBPSD30P16000 20- 11 AA C " 19- 14 AA C
XBPSD30P18000 9- 35 AC C " 19- 59 AA C
XBPSD30P20000 25- 14 AA C XHPSD23P10000 18- 55 AA C
XBPSD40P06000 9- 23 AA C XHPSD30P06000 10- 28 AA C
" 18- 51 AA C " 11- 28 AA C
" 20- 8 AA C " 18- 1 AA C
XBPSD40P06K00 6- 24 AA C XHPSD40P08000 6- 26 AA C
" 7- 29 AA C " 7- 37 AA C
" 11- 40 AA C " 20- 10 AA C
XBPSD40P08ES0 10- 62 AA C XJBSD40P12000 3- 4 AA C
XBPSD40P08K00 20- 7 AA C XNESD30-24000 12- 22 AA C
XBPSD40P08KS0 6- 54 AA C " 19- 78 AA C
XBPSD40P10KS0 20- 5 AA C XNESF40-32000 7- 24 AA C
XBPSD40P12000 18- 48 AA C " 9- 33 AA C
XBPSD40P25XS0 20- 4 AA C XRESP20-03000 8- 4 AA C
XBPSD40P30K00 6- 45 AA C " 10- 37 AA C
" 19- 57 AA C XRESP30-04000 8- 15 AA C
XBSSE30P10000 1- 11 AA C XRESP30-05000 10- 43 AA C
XBTSC40P04000 7- 12 AA C XRESP40-06000 10- 44 AA C
XBTSE40P04000 1- 21 AA C " 13- 37 AA C
XEBS230P08000 14- 55 AA C " 14- 35 AA C
XEBSD30P06000 10- 38 AA C " 15- 13 AA C
" 22- 9 AA C " 18- 37 AA C
XEBSD30P08000 13- 6 AA C " 21- 6 AA C
" 13- 52 AA C XRESP50-06000 6- 48 AA C
" 14- 28 AA C " 11- 12 AA C
" 15- 31 AA C " 14- 71 AA C
XEBSD30P10000 15- 18 AA C " 15- 6 AA C
XEBSD30P20000 14- 36 AA C " 17- 44 AA C
XEBSD40P08000 13- 26 AA C " 18- 21 AA C
" 19- 20 AA C " 19- 15 AA C
" 27- 29 AA C " 21- 46 AA C
XEBSD40P10000 14- 53 AA C XRESP70-08000 6- 2 AA C
XEBSD40P12000 10- 56 AA C " 10- 7 AA C
" 27- 16 AA C " 11- 5 AA C
XEBSD40P30000 19- 68 AA C " 14- 32 AA C
XEBSE30P08000 22- 5 AA C " 17- 1 AA C
XEBSE30P10000 1- 28 AA C " 18- 15 AA C
XEBSE40P10000 1- 17 AA C " 19- 5 AA C
XEBSF30P06000 12- 23 AA C " 20- 25 AA C
XEBSF30P08000 13- 24 AA C " 21- 51 AA C
XEPSD20P08000 2- 15 AA C XUBSD30P05000 13- 23 AA C
XEPSD30P06000 25- 2 AA C XUPSD30P04000 14- 11 AA C
" 26- 4 AA C XWHSD30-05070 22- 8 AA C
XEPSD30P08000 2- 16 AA C XWHSD30-05080 13- 39 AA C
" 8- 19 AA C " 16- 5 AA C
" 14- 6 AA C XWHSD30-08100 22- 12 AA C

– 50 –
 SF-1118

PRICE NEW PART PRICE NEW PART

PARTS CODE NO. RANK MARK RANK PARTS CODE NO. RANK MARK RANK
XWUSD50-06100 9- 41 AA C
XWVSD40-05000 27- 28 AA C
XXXSP30L15000 16- 34 AB C

– 51 –

manuals4you.com
SF-1118

COPYRIGHT C 1997 BY SHARP CORPORATION

All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without prior written permission of the publisher.

SHARP CORPORATION
Printing & Reprographic Systems Group
Quality & Reliability Control Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-11, Japan
December 1997 Printed in Japan S